The Project Gutenberg eBook of Pawnee Hero Stories and Folk-Tales
    
This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States,
you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.

Title: Pawnee Hero Stories and Folk-Tales

Author: George Bird Grinnell

Release date: July 31, 2011 [eBook #36923]
                Most recently updated: January 7, 2021

Language: English

Credits: Produced by David Edwards, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
        Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was
        produced from scanned images of public domain material
        from the Google Print project.)


*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PAWNEE HERO STORIES AND FOLK-TALES ***




Produced by David Edwards, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was
produced from scanned images of public domain material
from the Google Print project.)







Transcriber's Note

The original text used characters with macron or breve above to
indicate pronunciation. As these characters are not available in this
text encoding, the transcriber has instead used a circumflex in place
of a macron, e.g. û, and a dieresis in place of a breve, e.g. ü. These
should be read as indicated in the introduction to the book.

Illustration captions in {brackets} have been added by the transcriber
for the convenience of the reader.




                  PAWNEE
        HERO STORIES AND FOLK-TALES

               WITH NOTES ON

   THE ORIGIN, CUSTOMS AND CHARACTER OF
             THE PAWNEE PEOPLE

                    BY

           GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL


                 New York
   Forest and Stream Publishing Company
                   1889


            Copyright, 1889, by
           George Bird Grinnell.




  [Illustration: SIGNAL--"WHO ARE YOU?" ANSWER--"PA´-NI."]




             TO THE MEMORY OF

             MAJOR FRANK NORTH

           --_Pa´-ni Le-shar_--

  This Record of His People is Inscribed.




NOTE.


Last spring I visited the Pawnee Agency in the Indian Territory. On
the day after my arrival, I rode over to the house of Eagle Chief,
whom, under his warrior name, White Eagle, I had known for many years.
Entering the door, I found myself in the presence of the Chief, who,
after quickly putting his hand over his mouth in his astonishment,
greeted me with a cordial deep-voiced _Lau_. Then we sat down and
filled the pipe and talked. Through all our talk I could see that he
was curious to know the object of my visit. At last he said, "My son I
am glad that you have come to us once more. My mind is big when I look
at you and talk to you. It is good that you are here. Why have you
come again to the Pawnee village? What brings you here at this time?"

I answered, "Father, we have come down here to visit the people and
to talk to them; to ask them about how things used to be in the olden
times, to hear their stories, to get their history, and then to put
all these things down in a book, so that in the years to come, after
the tribe have all become like white people, the old things of the
Pawnees shall not be forgotten."

The Chief meditated for a while and then said, "It is good and it is
time. Already the old things are being lost, and those who knew the
secrets are many of them dead. If we had known how to write, we would
have put all these things down, and they would not have been
forgotten, but we could not write, and these stories were handed down
from one to another. The old men told their grandchildren, and they
told their grandchildren, and so the secrets and the stories and the
doings of long ago have been handed down. It may be that they have
changed as they passed from father to son, and it is well that they
should be put down, so that our children, when they are like the white
people, can know what were their fathers' ways."

Most of the material contained in this little book was collected on
that visit.




CONTENTS.


    HERO STORIES.

                                                            PAGE
    Comanche Chief, the Peace-Maker,                          25

    Lone Chief, Skür´-ar-a Le-shar,                           45

    The Prisoners of Court House Rock,                        67

    Wolves in the Night,                                      70

    A Leader of Soldiers,                                     74

    A Cheyenne Blanket,                                       76

    Little Warrior's Counsel,                                 79

    A Comanche Bundle,                                        83


    FOLK-TALES.

    The Dun Horse,                                            87

    A Story of Faith,                                         98

    The Bear Man,                                            121

    The Ghost Wife,                                          129

    Ti-ke-wa-kush, the Man who Called the Buffalo,           132

    Pa-hu-ka´-tawa,                                          142

    The Boy who Was Sacrificed,                              161

    The Snake Brother,                                       171

    O´re-ka-rahr,                                            182

    The Ghost Bride,                                         191

    The Boy who Saw A-ti´-us,                                195

    How the Deer Lost His Gall,                              204

    Yellow Fox,                                              206


    NOTES ON THE PAWNEES.

    The Pawnees:

        I.  Relationships,                                   215

       II.  Origin and Migrations,                           223

      III.  The Skidi,                                       231

       IV.  Name and Emblem,                                 239

    Pawnee Customs:

        I.  Early Days,                                      249

       II.  Every-day Life,                                  259

      III.  A Summer Hunt,                                   270

    The Pawnee in War:

        I.  Enemies and Methods of Warfare,                  303

       II.  Pa´-ni Le-shar and His Scouts,                   323

      III.  War Parties,                                     335

    Religion:

        I.  Beliefs,                                         350

       II.  Ceremonies,                                      360

      III.  Medicine and Mystery,                            374

    Later History:

        I.  Removal to the Indian Territory,                 389

       II.  Present Condition and Progress,                  397




THE PAWNEES AND THEIR STORIES.


Once the Pawnees were a great people. They were very numerous. They
were undisputed masters of a vast territory. They had everything that
heart could wish. Their corn and their buffalo gave them food,
clothing and shelter; they had weapons for war and for the chase. They
roamed over the country without let or hindrance. In peace they were
light-hearted and contented; in war cunning, fierce and successful.
Their name was a terror to their enemies. This was in the past. Now
they are few in number, poor, a prey to disease, a vanishing race.

My acquaintance with the tribe began in 1870. From that time to the
present I have had frequent intercourse with them; have lived in their
villages; and been with them on their buffalo hunts. During the weeks
and months spent in camp and village, I have listened to many stories
of Pawnee heroes and to folk-tales of the miraculous doings of the
olden time. In my intercourse with the tribe, extending over a period
of nearly twenty years, I have been deeply impressed by the high
qualities of the Pawnee character; and the more familiar I have become
with this people, the more strongly have I felt that a permanent
record should be made of the tales which reflect that character.
Unless thus collected now, much of this lore must inevitably be
forgotten.

For the Pawnees are passing away. When I first joined them on their
buffalo hunts from their old home on the Loup Fork in Nebraska, the
tribe numbered three thousand; last March in the Indian Territory I
found but eight hundred. And more rapidly than the dwindling of the
people are their traditions lapsing from memory under the changed
conditions of the tribe's life. The lore, which sprang up as an
indigenous growth of the wide-stretching prairie and the wilderness
where the wild Pawnee warrior hunted free, finds scanty nurture in the
uncongenial soil of fields tilled by Pawnee followers of the plow.
With the new modes of living come new views of life, new motives, new
sympathies--in a word, civilization. To earn a living by toil, to
wrest subsistence from the earth, this is the problem confronting the
Pawnees to-day, the task which is engaging the sinew and purpose of
the tribe. In the transition stage, the memory of the old days, of old
manners and rites and ceremonies and of old heroes, is with the elders
of the race, those ancient braves whose lives bridge the past and the
present. When I visited the Agency last March, it was to write down
from the lips of these old men such material as I could collect. When
they shall die much of the unwritten lore will perish too, for with
them will cease that sympathetic and perfect credence, which alone
gives to folk-lore vitality and lastingness. What is written in this
volume then belongs distinctly to the wild Indian.

The task that I have set for myself is that of a recorder. No attempt
has been made to give a literary color to the hero stories and
folk-tales here written out. I have scrupulously avoided putting into
them anything of my own. The stories are told to the reader as they
were told to me. They are not elaborated. I have tried to show how
Indians think and speak, rather than to make their stories more
entertaining by dressing them up to suit the civilized taste. My
object in giving these narratives in their present shape is to make a
book which shall be true to life, and shall faithfully reflect the
Pawnee character, as the story tellers have themselves painted it. In
a very few cases I have added some words explaining matters so well
understood by those familiar with the Indians as to need no
explanation. If these tales have any ethnological value, it will be
enhanced by their being given in the precise form in which they were
told by those to whom they have been handed down from generation to
generation; but quite apart from this is another point which is
entitled to consideration.

The entire ignorance concerning Indians, which prevails among the
general public, can be dispelled only by letting that public
understand something of the ways of life of the wild Indian, something
of the subjects about which he thinks and talks, as well as of how he
looks at these subjects, and what he has to say about them.

The late Mrs. Jackson's charming story, "Ramona," did much to bring
the more intelligent class of readers in touch with the Indians, and
to awaken sympathy for them by pointing out the unnumbered wrongs
perpetrated on this race by the Government. Mrs. Jackson's book was a
story, a novel; wonderfully well told and full of truth and feeling;
but while it may have been a relation of facts, it did not profess to
treat of actual persons. It is looked upon by many readers as a mere
romance. It is a book about which I was once asked, skeptically, "Did
you ever see any Indians like those?" In the Pawnee stories here set
down there is no romance nor coloring. The Indians themselves are
talking, and whatever the faults and weak points of these tales--and
some of them are sufficiently obvious--they at least give the reader a
true conception of Indians as they have actually lived. They are
stories of Indians by Indians. There is about them nothing of the
white man; and the intelligent person, who is sufficiently interested
in the subject to read this book through, will gain from it a new
insight into Indian character.

The Indian of Cooper--with his bravery, his endurance, his acuteness,
his high qualities of honesty, generosity, courtesy and
hospitality--has been laughed at for half a century. Yet every man who
has mingled much with the Indians in their homes has known individuals
who might have sat for the portraits which Cooper drew of some of his
aboriginal heroes. There are good men among Indians, just as among
the whites. The prevalent notion of the Indian has been formed from
the worst class of this people, the lazy, filthy beggars who haunt the
settlements of the West, who to their own vices have added new ones
picked up from their surroundings, and who are hopelessly degraded.
These are not typical Indians, and it is unjust to judge a whole race
from such degenerate specimens. There is still another notion of the
Indian fondly cherished by many worthy people, whose sympathies have
been wrought upon by the cruelty and injustice with which we have
treated this race. These good people look upon all Indians as simple
children of nature, who would do no wrong if they had not been
contaminated by contact with vicious whites. It is unnecessary to say
that this notion of the Indian is also incorrect.

The Indian is neither a fiend nor a saint. There are good ones and bad
ones. As a rule, perhaps they try to act up to their ideas of what is
right, but the standard of a race of barbarians cannot be the same as
that of a civilized people, and in judging of their character we must
make allowances for this difference. The standard of right and wrong
among civilized people is a growth, the product of the experience of
thousands of years. The Indian races have not been through a like
experience. They have regarded as virtues some things which seem to us
the worst of crimes. The Indian differs from the white man in
education and manner of life, and so, of course, in his modes of
thought. He has not been taught the lesson of self-control, which his
surroundings oblige each civilized man to begin to learn as a child.
He has known until recent times no law save that of strength. He has
been taught that war is the noblest of pursuits--the only one worthy
of man. And that war has consisted in making forays upon his enemies,
taking their possessions, and, if possible, their lives and their
scalps. His warfare consisted in surprises rather than open combat. A
scalp taken was a trophy of victory, and the scalp of a woman was
almost as eagerly sought as that of a brave or of a chief. It was an
evidence of injury inflicted on the enemy. To steal horses from the
enemy was an achievement creditable and also profitable.

We commonly speak of the raids of war parties as horse stealing
expeditions, but this is wholly misleading, because to the civilized
understanding the phrase horse stealing carries with it an idea of
dishonesty. No such meaning attaches to the Indian equivalent of this
phrase. They take horses by stratagem or secretly, by the usual, and
to them legitimate, methods of warfare. To speak of their stealing
horses, using that verb in the sense which we commonly give it, would
be like saying that an army stole the cannon which it captured in an
engagement with the enemy. Captured horses were the legitimate spoils
of war. The wealth of the Indians was in their horses. They had no
fortified places, no ships of war, no cannon, no works of art. Their
only valuable possessions were their horses. These were the only
property that could be carried off. Therefore, when an expedition was
made against a hostile tribe, scalps and horses were naturally its
object. Horses, being their only valuable possessions, constituted
their medium of exchange, so far as they had any. Did a man wish to
purchase an ornament, or an article of dress which took his fancy, he
gave a horse for it. If he bought a wife he paid for her in horses.
The most valuable present that could be made was a good horse; and
horses were often given by the well-to-do to their friends and
relations who had been sick or unfortunate. On the other hand, when,
as was sometimes the case, a conquered tribe was condemned to pay a
war indemnity, they paid it in horses. It is related that when the
Skidi broke their treaty with the other bands, and were afterward
conquered by them, they were obliged to pay such a fine.

This view of Indian warfare being understood, the motive of the hero
stories here given, and of many of the folk-tales, becomes plain.

The Pawnees are essentially a religious people. They worship
_Ti-ra´-wa_, who is in and of everything. Unlike many of the Indian
tribes of the West, they do not adore any material thing. They regard
certain places as sacred, but these are so only because blessed by the
Divine presence. The Pawnee Deity is not personified. He is
intangible, quite as much so as the God of the Christians. The sacred
character of _Ti-ra´-wa_ extends to animal nature. The fishes which
swim in the rivers, the birds of the air and the beasts which roam
over the prairie, have sometimes intelligence, knowledge and power far
beyond those of man. But they are not gods. Their miraculous
attributes are given them by the Ruler, whose servants they are, and
who often makes them the medium of his communications to man. They are
his messengers--his angels--and their powers are always used for
good. Prayers are made to them; sometimes for direct help in time of
need, but more often for intercession. Often in the folk-tales it will
be seen that when the blessing asked for is some small thing, a prayer
is made to the animals (_Nahu´rac_), but if the petitioners are asking
for some great thing, something which is very difficult to grant, then
the prayer is made to "One Above," to "The Ruler," that is, to the
Supreme Being.

Nothing of importance was ever undertaken without a prayer for help,
for success. All the serious undertakings of the year, whose success
would affect the general welfare, were preceded by religious
ceremonies, when all the tribe took part, and prayers were made and
sacrifices offered to _Ti-ra´-wa_; and in all lesser enterprises, the
individuals who were interested humbled themselves and implored the
Divine assistance. A party starting off on the warpath prayed for
success and made a burnt offering. Prayer and sacrifice always marked
the beginning of the feast, and often its end. Success in their
undertakings was acknowledged by grateful offerings to the Ruler. The
victorious warrior sometimes sacrificed the scalp torn from the head
of his enemy, and this was burned with elaborate ceremonies by the
High Priest. He who brought back from a foray many horses, gave one to
the priest as a thank-offering to the Ruler. One of the well-known
Seven Brothers said to me, "It is our aim, after we have been helped,
to give thanks."

The feeling of these Indians toward their God is one of humility and
reverence. They do not love him, but they look to him for help at all
times. The young are exhorted to humble themselves before him, to pray
to him, to look to One Above, to ask help from the Ruler. In the
stories which are included in this book the allusions constantly made
to _Ti-ra´-wa_--the Supreme Power--the prayers offered and the
humility and self-abnegation so often expressed, show faith, profound
religious feelings, and great elevation of thought.

       *       *       *       *       *

Among tribal names of North American Indians, none is more familiar to
us than Pawnee; yet of no tribe is less known. Frequent allusions to
them occur in the writings of early travelers in the West; but only one
satisfactory attempt has been made to write a connected history of this
family. In the _Magazine of American History_ for 1880 Mr. John B.
Dunbar published a most interesting account of this tribe, but his
sketch is mainly historical, and does not profess to treat exhaustively
of the lives and modes of thought of this people. It is, however, a
history of very great importance and value, and in preparing the
historical matter which is included in this volume, I have not
hesitated to draw on Mr. Dunbar's papers, which must form the basis of
any subsequent account of the Pawnees, and which should be read by all
who are interested in this people.

I owe much of my interest in and knowledge of the Pawnees to my long
intimacy with the late Major Frank North, who from his extended
intercourse and close connection with this people--a connection which
lasted more than thirty years--was unquestionably better informed
about them than any other white man has ever been; and with Capt.
L. H. North, his brother, who was for many years associated with Major
North in command of the Pawnee Scouts.

In gathering the material here presented I have been assisted also by
James R. Murie, a nephew of Comanche Chief; by Ralph J. Weeks, a
half-brother of Lone Chief; by Harry Kuhns, by Eagle Chief and Bear
Chief, Skidis; by Good Chief and Curly Chief, Kit-ke-hahk´-is; by
Secret Pipe Chief and Frank White, Chau-is, and by many others of my
Pawnee friends, to all of whom my acknowledgments are due.

In the pronunciation of the few Pawnee words used in these stories,
the vowel sounds, as nearly as I can give them, are as follows: _a_ as
in father, _e_ as the _a_ in ale, _i_ as _e_ in cede, _û_ long as _oo_
in pool, _ü_ short as in us, _au_ as _ou_ in house. These sounds
depend somewhat on the letters which follow the vowels, and the
spelling does not always conform to the rule laid down. The last two
syllables in the word Pita-hau-erat, for example, are pronounced
_êrät_ or _idot_. The sounds of _d_, _l_, _n_ and _r_ are difficult to
express by English letters; _r_ sometimes has its own sound quite
distinctly, at others more the sound of _d_; _n_ often has a _d_
sound, and _l_ a sound of _n_. It will be noted that throughout this
volume I have used the familiar English word Pawnee instead of the
evidently more correct _Pa´-ni_.

Finally I have refrained from commenting on the stories, though there
is abundant opportunity for comment.

                                                    G. B. G.
    July, 1889.




_HERO STORIES._




COMANCHE CHIEF.

The Peace-Maker.


I.

Many years ago there lived in the Ski´-di village a young man, about
sixteen years old. His name was _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ (the hawk). At this
time the Pawnees wore their hair in the ancient fashion, cut as the
Osages wear theirs; the whole head was shaved except a roach running
back from the forehead beyond the scalp lock.

A war party went off to the south and he joined them as a servant.
They went a long way and a long way, traveling far, but they got no
horses and came back. Afterward another party started off on the
warpath, and he went with it. They traveled many days, going to the
southwest, and at length they came to a camp, and hid themselves to
wait until it was dark. It was a camp of the Comanches.

When night had come they all went into the camp to steal horses. This
young man went to a lodge near which stood three horses, two spotted
horses and one gray. They were tied near the door of the lodge, and
from this he thought they must be fast, for the Indians usually tie up
their best horses close to the lodge door, where they will be under
their eyes as much as possible. He went to the lodge to cut the ropes,
and just as he was about to do so he thought he heard some one inside.
He stepped up close to the lodge, and looked in through a little
opening between the door and the lodge, and saw a small fire burning,
and on the other side of the fire was sitting a young girl, combing
her long hair. The young man looked around the lodge to see who else
was there, and saw only an old man and an old woman, and the
fire-maker. He cut the ropes of the two spotted horses standing
outside, led the horses out of the camp, and met his companion. To him
he said, "Now, brother, you take these horses and go to the hill where
we were hiding to-day, and wait for me there. I have seen another fine
spotted horse that I want to get; I will go back for it and will meet
you before morning at that place."

He went back, as if to get the spotted horse, but returned to the
lodge where the girl was. He went all around it, and looked at it
carefully. He saw that there were feathers on the lodge, and rows of
animals hoofs hanging down the sides, which rattled in the wind, and
to one of the lodge-poles was tied a buffalo tail, which hung down.
Then he went back to the door and looked in at the girl again. She had
braided her hair and was sitting there by the fire. He stayed there a
long time that night looking at her. Toward morning he went to look
for his companion. When he met him he told him that some one had taken
the spotted horse before he got to it; he could not find it. When the
party all met next morning, they found that they had taken a lot of
horses, and they started north to go home. They reached the Pawnee
village, and every one was glad of their success.

After this, whenever this young man saw anything that was nice or
pretty, such as medals, ear-rings, finger rings for women, beadwork
leggings, bracelets, necklaces, wampum, beads--things that the
Comanches did not have--he would give a pony for it. For one year he
went on like this, gathering together these pretty things. When the
year had gone by he had no horses left; he had given them all away to
get these presents. He packed all these things up in a bundle, and
then spoke one night to his friend, saying, "I intend to go off on the
warpath again, and I would like to have you go with me; we two will go
alone." His friend agreed to go.


II.

Before the time came to start, other young men heard of it, and
several joined them. There were eight of them in all. _Kut-a´wi-kutz_
was the leader. He told his young men that they were going to a
certain place where he knew there were lots of spotted horses to
steal. They started out on foot. After traveling many days, they came
to the place where the camp had been at the time he saw the girl.
There was now no camp there.

They went on further, and at length came to a camp and hid themselves.
When night came the leader told his men to remain where they were
hiding, and he would go into the camp and see if there were any horses
to take. He went through all the camp looking for the lodge in which
he had seen the girl, but he did not find it. Then he went back to
where the young men were hiding, and told them that this was not the
camp they were looking for; that they did not have here the spotted
horses that they wanted. In the camp of the year before there had been
many spotted horses.

The young men did not understand this, and some of them did not like
to leave this camp without taking any horses, but he was the leader
and they did as he said. They left that camp and went on further.

After traveling some days they came to another camp, and hid themselves
near it. When night came on _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ said to his young men, "You
stay here where you are hiding, and I will go into this camp and see if
it is the one we are looking for." He went through the camp but did not
find the lodge he sought. He returned to the hiding place, and told the
party there that this was not the camp they were looking for, that the
spotted horses were not there. They left the camp and went on.

When they had come close to the mountains they saw another camp.
_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ went into this camp alone, and when he had been
through it, he went back to his party and told them that this was the
camp they had been looking for. Then he sent the young men into the
camp to steal horses, and he put on his fine leggings and moccasins
that he had in his bundle, and painted himself and went with them. He
took a horse and his friend took one. They met outside the village. He
told his friend to get on his own horse and lead the other, and with
the rest of the party to go off east from the camp to a certain place,
and there to wait for him. "I have seen," he said, "another fine horse
that I like, and I wish to go back and get it."

His friend looked sorrowfully at him and said, "Why are you all
dressed up like this, and why is your face painted? What are you doing
or what is in your mind? Perhaps you intend to do some great thing
to-night that you do not want me, your friend, to know about. I have
seen for a long time that you are hiding something from me."

_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ caught his friend in his arms and hugged him and
kissed him and said, "You are my friend; who is so near to me as you
are? Go on as I have said, and if it turns out well I will tell you
all. I will catch up with you before very long."

His friend said, "No, I will stay with you. I will not go on. I love
you as a brother, and I will stay with you, and if you are going to do
some great thing I will die with you."

When _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ found that his friend was resolved to remain
with him, he yielded and told him his secret. He said to him, "My
brother, when we were on the warpath a year ago, and I took those two
spotted horses, I heard a little noise in the lodge by which they were
tied. I looked in and I saw there a girl sitting by the fire combing
her hair. She was very pretty. When I took the spotted horses away, I
could not put that girl out of my mind. I remembered her. Brother,
when we went back home that girl was constantly in my mind. I could
not forget her. I came this time on purpose to get her, even if it
shall cost me my life. She is in this camp, and I have found the lodge
where she lives."

His friend said, "My brother, whatever you say shall be done. I stay
with you. You go into the camp. I will take the horses and go to that
high rocky hill east of the camp, and will hide the horses there. When
you are in the village I will be up in one of the trees on the top of
the hill, looking down on the camp. If I hear shooting and see lots of
people running to the lodge I will know that you are killed, and I
will kill myself. I will not go home alone. If I do not see you by
noon, I will kill myself."

_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ said, "It is good. If I am successful I will go up
there after you, and take you down into the camp."

They parted. The friend hid the horses and went up on the hill.
_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ went into the camp.


III.

It was now the middle of the night. When he came to the lodge, he saw
there was a fire in it. He did not go in at once; he wanted the fire
to go out. He stayed around the lodge, and gradually the fire died
down. It was dark. He went into the lodge. He was painted and finely
dressed, and had his bundle with him. He took his moccasins off and
his leggings, and hung them up over the girl's bed; then strings of
beads, then five or six medals, bracelets, ear-bobs, beaded leggings,
everything he had--his shirt. He took his blanket, and spread it over
the bed where the girl was lying, stepped over the bed, and crept
under his own blanket, and lay down by her side.

When he lay down she woke up, and found that there was some one lying
by her, and she spoke to him, but he did not answer. He could not
understand her, for he did not know Comanche. She talked for a long
time, but he did not speak. Then she began to feel of him, and when
she put her hands on his head--_Pi-ta´-da_--Pawnee--an enemy! Then she
raised herself up, took a handful of grass from under the bed, spread
the fire and put the grass on it. The fire blazed up and she saw him.
Then she sprang up and took the top blanket, which was his, off the
bed, and put it about her, and sat by the fire. She called her father
and said, "Father get up; there is a man here."

The old man got up, and got his pipe and began smoking. This old man
was the Head Chief of the Comanches. He called the servant, and told
him to make a fire. The girl got up and went over to where her mother
was lying and called her. The mother got up; and they all sat by the
fire.

The old man smoked for a long time. Every now and then he would look
at the bed to see who it could be that was lying there, and then he
would look at all the things hanging up over the bed--at the medals
and other things. He did not know what they were for, and he wondered.
At length the old man told the servant to go and call the chiefs of
the tribe, and tell them to come to his lodge.

Presently the chiefs came in one by one and sat down. When they had
come there was still one brave who ought to have come that was not
there. His name was Skin Shirt; the father wanted him. He sent for him
three times. He sent word back to the chief to go on with the council,
and that he would agree to whatever they decided. The fourth time he
was sent for he came, and took a seat by the chief, the girl's father.
This brave spoke to _Kut-a´wi-kutz_, and told him to get up, and take
a seat among them. He did so. The girl was sitting on the other side
of the fire. When he got up, he had to take the blanket that was left,
which was the girl's. He put it around him, and sat down among them.

When the chiefs came in, there was among them a Pawnee who had been
captured long ago and adopted by the Comanches, and was now himself a
chief; he talked with _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ and interpreted for him, telling
him everything that was said as each one spoke.

After the young man had seated himself, the chief filled his pipe, and
gave the pipe to his brave to decide what should be done with this
enemy. The brave took the pipe, but he did not wish to decide, so he
did not light it, but passed it on to another chief to decide. He
passed it on to another, and he to another, and so it went until the
pipe came back to the Head Chief. When he got it again, he asked
_Kut-a´wi-kutz_, "Why have you come here this night and lain down in
my lodge, you who are an enemy to my people? And why have you hung up
in the lodge all these strange things which we see here? I do not
understand it, and I wish to know your reasons."

The boy said to him, "A long time ago I came south on the warpath to
steal horses. I traveled until I came to your camp. I saw three horses
tied outside a lodge, two spotted horses and a gray. While I was
cutting one of the ropes, I heard a little noise inside the lodge, and
pushing aside the door I looked in, and saw that girl combing her
hair. I stole the two spotted horses, and took them out of the camp,
and gave them to a friend of mine, and came back to your lodge, and
kept looking at the girl. I stayed there until she went to bed. For a
long year I have been buying presents; beads and many other things,
for I had made up my mind that I would go after this girl. I came down
here to find her. I have been to where you were camped last year, and
to two other camps that I discovered. She was not in these and I left
them, and came on until I found the right camp. This is the fourth
place. Now I am here. I made up my mind to do this thing, and if her
relations do not like it they can do as they please. I would be happy
to die on her account."

When he had spoken the old chief laughed. He said: "Those two spotted
horses that you stole I did not care much about. The gray horse was
the best one of the three, and you left him. I was glad that you did
not take him. He was the best of all." Then for a little while there
was silence in the lodge.

Then the chief, the girl's father, began to talk again; he said, "If I
wanted to decide what should be done with this man, I would decide
right now, but here is my brave, Skin Shirt, I want him to decide. If
I were to decide, it would be against this man, but he has my
daughter's blanket on, and she has his, and I do not want to decide. I
pass the pipe to my brave, and want him to light it."

The brave said, "I want this chief next to me to decide," and he
passed him the pipe, and so it went on around the circle until it came
to the Head Chief again. He was just about to take it and decide the
question, when they heard outside the lodge the noise made by some one
coming, shouting and laughing; then the door was pushed aside and an
old man came in, and as he passed the door he stumbled and fell on
his knees. It was the girl's grandfather. He had been outside the
lodge, listening.

The pipe was passed to the chief, and he gave it again to his brave to
decide. While the brave was sitting there, holding the pipe, the old
grandfather said, "Give me the pipe, if you men cannot decide, let me
do it. In my time we did not do things this way. I never passed the
pipe; I could always decide for myself."

Then Skin Shirt passed him the pipe, and he lit it and smoked. Then he
said, "I do not wish to condemn to death a man who is wearing my
granddaughter's blanket." The interpreter began to tell
_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ that the old man was going to decide in his favor, and
that when he got through speaking he must get up and pass his hands
over him, and thank him for taking pity on him, and so to all the
others. The old man continued, "Now, chiefs, do not think hardly of
what I am going to say, nor be dissatisfied with my decision. I am
old. I have heard in my time that there is a tribe up north that is
raising from the ground something that is long and white, and
something that is round; and that these things are good to eat. Now,
chiefs, before I die, I want to eat of these things, and I want my
granddaughter to go and take her seat by this man, and for them to be
man and wife. Since I was young we have been enemies, but now I want
the two tribes to come together, join hands and be friends." And so it
was decided.

The young man got up and passed his hands over the old man, and over
the brave, and passed around the circle and blessed them all. The
Pawnee, who was interpreter, now told him to get up, and get a medal
and put it on the brave, and then another and put it on the chief, and
so on until all the presents were gone. And he did so, and put on them
the medals, and ear-rings, and strings of beads, and breast-plates of
wampum, until each had something. And these things were new to them,
and they felt proud to be wearing them, and thought how nice they
looked.


IV.

By this time it was daylight, and it had got noised abroad through the
camp that there was a Pawnee at the Head Chief's lodge, and all the
people gathered there. They called out, "Bring him out; we want him
out here." They crowded about the lodge, all the people, the old men
and the women and the young men, so many that at last they pushed the
lodge down. They shouted: "Let us have the Pawnee. Last night they
stole many horses from us." The chiefs and braves got around the
Pawnee, and kept the Comanches off from him, and protected him from
the people. The Cheyennes were camped close by, near the hill
southeast of the Comanches, and they, too, had heard that the
Comanches had a Pawnee in the camp. They came over, and rode about in
the crowd to try and get the Pawnee, and they rode over a Comanche or
two, and knocked them down. So Skin Shirt got his bow and arrows, and
jumped on his horse, and rode out and drove the Cheyennes away back to
their camp again.

The Cheyennes saw that the Comanches did not want the Pawnee killed,
so they sent a message inviting him over to a feast with them,
intending to kill him, but Skin Shirt told them that he was married
into the tribe. While the Cheyennes were parading round the Comanche
camp, they were shooting off their guns in the air, just to make a
noise. Now, the young Pawnee on the hill, who was watching the camp to
see what would happen to his friend, saw the crowd and heard the
shooting, and made up his mind that _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ had been killed.
So he took his knife, and put the handle against a tree and the point
against his breast, and put his arms around the tree and hugged it,
and the knife blade passed through his heart and he fell down and
died.

In the afternoon when all the excitement had quieted down, the
Cheyennes came over again to the Comanche camp, and invited the Pawnee
and his wife to go to their village, and visit with them. Then Skin
Shirt said, "All right, we will go." Three chiefs of the Comanches
went ahead, the Pawnee followed with his wife, and Skin Shirt went
behind. They went to the Cheyenne camp. The Cheyennes received them
and made a great feast for them, and gave the Pawnee many horses. Then
they went back to the Comanche camp. _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ never went up to
the hill until the next morning. Then he went, singing the song he had
told his friend he would sing. He called to him, but there was no
reply. He called again. It was all silent. He looked for his friend,
and at last he found him there dead at the foot of the tree.


V.

_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ then stayed with the Comanches. The Cheyennes came
north and east, and the Comanches went on west, nearer to the
mountains. While the Pawnee was with the Comanches, they had several
wars with the Utes, Lipans and Tonkaways. _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ proved
himself a brave man, and, as the son-in-law of the chief, he soon
gained great influence, and was himself made a chief.

After some years the old man, his wife's grandfather, told the Pawnee
that he thought it was time that he should eat some of those things
that he had long wanted to eat that grew up north; that he was getting
pretty old now. _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ said, "It is time. We will go." So he
had his horses packed, and with his immediate family and the old man,
started north toward the Pawnee country. At this time he was called
_Kut-a´wi-kutz-u si-ti´-da-rit_, which means "See! The Hawk." When
going into battle he would ride straight out to strike his enemy, and
the Comanches who were looking at him would say, "See! The Hawk." So
that became his name.

They traveled a long time until they came to the Pawnee ground. As
they were traveling along, they came to a field where were growing
corn, beans and squashes. The Pawnee said to the old man,
"Grandfather, look at that field. There are the things that you have
desired to eat." He got off his horse and went into the field, and
pulled some corn, some beans and some squashes, and took them to the
old man, and gave them to him. The old man supposed they were to be
eaten just as they were, and he tried to bite the squashes. This made
the Pawnee laugh. When they came to the village, the Pawnees were very
glad to see him who had been lost long ago. He told the people that he
had brought these Indians to eat of the corn and other things; that
they were his kinsfolk. He told them, too, about the young man who had
killed himself. His relations went out into the fields, and gathered
corn and beans and squashes, and cooked them for the Comanches.

They stayed there a long time at the Pawnee village. When they were
getting ready to return, the Pawnees dried their corn, and gave a
great deal of it to the Comanches, packing many horses with it for the
Indians at home. Then the Comanches started south again, and some of
the Pawnee young men, relations of _Kut-a´wi-kutz_, joined him, and
went back with them. After they had returned to the Comanche camp, the
old grandfather died, happy because he had eaten the things he wanted
to eat.

Soon after this, _Kut-a´wi-kutz_ started back to the Pawnee village,
and some young men of the Comanches joined him. Some time after
reaching the village he went south again, accompanied by some young
Pawnees, but leaving most of the Comanches behind. He had arranged
with the chiefs of the Pawnees that they should journey south, meet
the Comanches on the plains and make peace. When he reached the
Comanches, the whole village started north to visit the Pawnees, and
met them on their way south. When they met, the two tribes made
friends, smoked together, ate together, became friends.

After they had camped together for some time, some Comanches stayed in
the Pawnee camp, and some Pawnees in the Comanche camp.
_Kut-a´wi-kutz_ was called by the Pawnees Comanche Chief. He would
have remained with the Comanches, but when he went back with them his
wife fell sick. The Comanche doctors could not help her, and he wanted
to take her north to see the Pawnee doctors, but the Comanches would
not let him. They kept him there, and his wife died. Then he was
angry, for he thought if he had taken her north her life might have
been saved.

So he left the Comanches, and went and lived with the Pawnees, and was
known among them always as Comanche Chief, the Peace-Maker, because he
made peace between the Pawnees and Comanches. He was chief of the
Ski´-di band, and a progressive man of modern times. He sent his
children East to school at Carlisle, Pa.

Comanche Chief died September 9th, 1888.

  [Illustration: PAWNEE PIPE.]




LONE CHIEF.

Skür´-ar-a Le-shar.


I.

Lone Chief was the son of the chief of the Kit-ke-hahk´-i band. His
father died when the boy was very young, less than a year old. Until
he was old enough to go to war, his mother had supported him by
farming--raising corn, beans and pumpkins. She taught the boy many
things, and advised him how to live and how to act so that he might be
successful. She used to say to him, "You must trust always in
_Ti-ra´-wa_. He made us, and through him we live. When you grow up,
you must be a man. Be brave, and face whatever danger may meet you. Do
not forget, when you look back to your young days, that I have raised
you, and always supported you. You had no father to do it. Your father
was a chief, but you must not think of that. Because he was a chief,
it does not follow that you will be one. It is not the man who stays
in the lodge that becomes great; it is the man who works, who sweats,
who is always tired from going on the warpath."

Much good advice his mother gave him. She said, "When you get to be a
man, remember that it is his ambition that makes the man. If you go on
the warpath, do not turn around when you have gone part way, but go on
as far as you were going, and then come back. If I should live to see
you become a man, I want you to become a great man. I want you to
think about the hard times we have been through. Take pity on people
who are poor, because we have been poor, and people have taken pity on
us. If I live to see you a man, and to go off on the warpath, I would
not cry if I were to hear that you had been killed in battle. That is
what makes a man: to fight and to be brave. I should be sorry to see
you die from sickness. If you are killed, I would rather have you die
in the open air, so that the birds of the air will eat your flesh, and
the wind will breathe on you and blow over your bones. It is better to
be killed in the open air than to be smothered in the earth. Love your
friend and never desert him. If you see him surrounded by the enemy,
do not run away. Go to him, and if you cannot save him, be killed
together, and let your bones lie side by side. Be killed on a hill;
high up. Your grandfather said it is not manly to be killed in a
hollow. It is not a man who is talking to you, advising you. Heed my
words, even if I am a woman."

The boy listened to these words, and he did not forget them.


II.

In the year 1867 he enlisted in the Pawnee Scouts under Major Frank
North, and served in L. H. North's company. He was always a good
soldier, ready, willing and brave. At a fight near the Cheyenne Pass
in 1867, he counted _coup_ on a woman and a man, Arapahoes who had
stolen some horses at Fort Laramie.

At this time the boy's name was _Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi_, Running
Chief. After he came back from this scout, he went on a war party of
which Left Hand was the leader, and they went to the Osage country. He
was no longer a servant, but a scout, a leading man in the party, one
of those who went ahead as spies. He had good judgment and understood
his duties. When they came to the Osage country, he was selected as
one of the leaders of a small branch party to steal horses. His party
took thirty head of horses. In the Osage country the young men were
not allowed to take all the horses they could. On account of the few
fords where they could cross the streams, they could not take a big
herd, but only what they could ride and lead, and at the same time go
fast. Across one river there was only one rocky ford, and over another
stream with deep banks there was only one rocky ford where they could
cross. Because they did not know this, in former times many Pawnees
had been caught and killed in the Osage country. So now they took but
few horses at a time, because these rivers were very deep and no one
could cross them except at these rock fords. Out of the horses taken
at this time Running Chief obtained one of the best and fastest ever
known among the Pawnees--a cream-colored horse, long famous in the
tribe. For his skillful leadership of this party he was given much
credit.

After returning home--the same year--he led a party to go off on the
warpath to the Cheyennes. He found a camp on the headwaters of the
North Canadian, and his party took seven horses, but these horses
looked thin and rough, and he was not satisfied with them; he was
ashamed to go home with only these. He told his party to take them
home, but that he was going off by himself to get some better ones. He
had with him a friend, with whom he had grown up, and whom he loved.
This young man was like a brother to Running Chief. These two went off
together, and went to the Osage camp, and staid about it for three
nights, and then took five horses, the best in the camp. They took
them back to the village. It was customary for the leading man in a
party to make a sacrifice to _Ti-ra´-wa_. Running Chief did this,
giving one horse to the chief priest. This sacrifice promoted him to
be a warrior.


III.

The next year he led a party again to the Osage country. He took some
horses and brought them home. This same year (1868) a party started
south. He was not the leader, but he went with them. They went to the
Wichita, Comanche and Kiowa villages--they were all camped
together--stole some horses and started back with them. Before they
had gone very far Running Chief stopped and said he was going back.
His friend was with the party, and when he found that Running Chief
had resolved to go back he said, "I will stop here with you."

The two went back toward the village that they had just left, and
climbed a hill that stood near it, and hid themselves there. They
waited, watching, for they had not decided what they would do. The
next day in the afternoon they began to get hungry, and they began to
talk together. Running Chief said to his friend, "My brother, are you
poor in your mind?[1] Do you feel like doing some great
thing--something that is very dangerous?"

  [1] Poor in mind; _i. e._, despondent, unhappy, miserable.

His friend answered at once, "Yes, I am poor. I am ready. Why do you
ask me?"

Running Chief thought a little while before he answered, and as he
thought, all the pain and suffering of his life seemed to rise up
before him, so that he could see it. He remembered how he had been a
poor boy, supported by his mother, and all that they two had suffered
together while he was yet a child. He remembered how his sister had
been killed when he was a boy only ten years old, and how he had
mourned for her, when her husband, who was jealous of her, had shot
her through the body with an arrow and killed her. She was the only
sister he had, and he had loved her. He felt that he was poor now,
and that there was no hope of anything better for him, and he did not
want to live any longer. After he had thought of all these things he
said to his friend, "My life is not worth anything to me;" and then he
told him of his bad feelings. Finally he said, "Now you go off and
leave me here alone. I am tired of living, but you go home. You have
relations who would mourn for you. I do not want you to lose your life
on my account."

His friend answered him, "I will not go away from you. We have grown
up together, and I will stick to you. Wherever you go I will go, and
whatever you do I will do."

Then Running Chief meditated for a long time. He had not made up his
mind what to do. He thought to himself, "This, my friend, will stay
with me. I do not want to be the cause of his death." So he
considered. Finally he said to his friend, "If I shall make up my mind
to go to some place where there is great danger, I shall go."

His friend said, "I will go with you."

Running Chief thought again, and at last he said, "On account of my
feelings I have decided to go into the camp of my enemies, and be
eaten by their dogs."

The other man said, "Whatever you have determined on I also will do."


IV.

Then they jumped up out of the hole they were hiding in, and tied up
their waists, and prepared to start. They were not very far from a
trail which connected two villages, along which persons kept passing,
and the Indians of these villages were all about them. When they
jumped up to go toward the trail, they saw four or five persons
passing at a little distance. When they saw these people, Running
Chief called out to them, "_High--eigh_," and made motions for them to
come to him. He wanted to show his strong will, and that on account of
his bad feelings he wished to have his troubles ended right there. He
called to them twice, and each time the Indians stopped and looked at
the Pawnees, and then went on. They did not know who it was that was
calling them; perhaps they thought the Pawnees were two squaws.

The two young men went out to the trail and followed these persons
toward the village. They went over a little hill, and as soon as they
had come to the top and looked over it, they saw the village. On this
side of it, and nearest to them were three lodges. At the foot of the
hill was a river, which they must cross to come to these three lodges.
When they came to the river, the friend asked; "Shall we take off our
moccasins and leggings to cross?" Running Chief replied, "Why should I
take off my moccasins and leggings when I know that my life is just
going over a precipice? Let us go in as we are." So they crossed with
moccasins and leggings on. The river was only half-leg deep.

Just as they reached the further bank, all on a sudden, it came over
Running Chief what they were doing--that they were going to certain
death. All his courage seemed to leave him, and he felt as if he had
no bones in his body. Then for a moment he faltered; but he could not
give up now. He felt that if he was a man he must go forward; he could
not turn back. He stopped for an instant; and his friend looked at
him, and said, "Come, let us hurry on. We are near the lodges." He
stepped forward then, but his feet seemed to be heavy and to drag on
the ground. He walked as if he were asleep.

There was no one about near at hand, and as they went forward Running
Chief prayed with all his mind to _Ti-ra´-wa_ that no one might come
until they had reached the lodge, and had got inside. When they had
got to within about one hundred yards of the lodge, a little boy came
out, and began to play around the door, and when they were about fifty
yards from him he saw them. As soon as he looked at them, he knew that
they did not belong to the camp, and he gave a kind of a scream and
darted into the lodge, but no one came out. The people within paid no
attention to the boy. As they walked toward the lodges Running Chief
seemed not to know where he was, but to be walking in a dream. He
thought of nothing except his longing to get to this lodge.

They went to the largest of the three lodges. Running Chief raised the
door and put his head in, and as he did so, it seemed as if his breath
stopped. He went in and sat down far back in the lodge, opposite the
entrance, and though his breath was stopped, his heart was beating
like a drum. His friend had followed him in, and sat down beside him.
Both had their bows in their hands, strung, and a sheaf of arrows.

When they entered the lodge, the man who was lying down at the back of
the lodge uttered a loud exclamation, "_Woof_," and then seemed struck
dumb. A plate of corn mush had just been handed him, but he did not
take it, and it sat there on the ground by him. One woman was just
raising a buffalo horn spoon of mush to her mouth, but her hand
stopped before reaching it, and she stared at them, holding the mush
before her face. Another woman was ladling some mush into a plate, and
she held the plate in one hand and the ladle above it, and looked at
them without moving. They all seemed turned into stone.

As the two Pawnees sat there, Running Chief's breath suddenly came
back to him. Before it had all been dark about him, as if he had been
asleep; but now the clouds had cleared away, and he could see the road
ahead of him. Now he felt a man, and brave. As he looked around him,
and saw the man lying motionless, and one woman just ready to take a
mouthful, and the other woman with the ladle held over the dish, he
perceived that they could not move, they were so astonished.

At length the Wichita had come to his senses. He drew a long breath,
and sat up, and for a while looked at the two Pawnees. Then he made
some sign to them which they did not understand, but they guessed that
he was trying to ask who they were. Running Chief struck his breast,
and said, "_Pi-ta´-da_" (Pawnee). As soon as the Wichita heard that he
caught his breath, and heaved a long sigh. He did not know what to
think of two Pawnees coming into his lodge. He could not think what it
meant. He drew a long breath. He did not touch his plate of food, but
motioned a woman to take it away. Presently he called to some one in
the neighboring lodge. He was answered, and in a moment a man came in.
He called again, and another entered, and the three looked for a long
time at the two Pawnees. These were sitting motionless, but watching
like two wildcats to see what was going to happen. Each had his bow
and arrows by his side, and his knife inside his robe. At length the
owner of the lodge spoke, and one of the men went out, and after a
little they heard the sound of horses' hoofs coming, and they supposed
some one was riding up. Every now and then Running Chief would touch
his friend's knee with his own, as if to say, "Watch."

The owner of the lodge made a sign and pointed to the east and said
"_Capitan_."[2] At the same time he was dressing himself up, putting
on a pair of officer's trousers and a uniform coat. Meantime the
Pawnees heard the rattle of one saddle, and then of another. The
Wichita chief put on his blanket, and his pistol belt around it, and
then made signs for them to go out. He led the way, and the Pawnees
followed. As they went, Running Chief touched his friend, as if to
say, "Watch. They may shoot us as we go out." But when they looked out
of the lodge, the Wichita was walking toward the horses, so there was
no danger. He mounted a horse, and signed to Running Chief to get up
behind him. Another man mounted the other horse, and the friend got up
behind him.

  [2] A Spanish word meaning chief.

As they rode toward the main village, it came into the mind of Running
Chief to kill the man he was riding behind, and to ride away. There
was where he had to fight his hardest battle. He was tempted to kill
this man in front of him, but he was not overpowered by this
temptation. He overcame it. He thought that perhaps he might be
mounted on a poor horse, and even if he did kill this man and his
friend the other, they might be on slow horses and be caught at once.
Every little while he would look at his friend and roll his eyes, as
if to say, "Watch on your side and I will watch on mine."

As he came near to the village, the Wichita warrior called out, and
began to sing a song, and all at once the village was in an uproar.
The men, women and children seemed to start up out of the ground, and
the lodges poured forth their inmates. Running Chief felt that he was
in danger, but he knew that he was not in as much danger as the man
before him. He could take the pistol out of the belt that he had hold
of and kill him, or he could use his own knife. The Wichita knew that
he was in danger. He knew that he was in the power of the enemy.

After the Wichita had called out to the people that they had enemies
with them, he kept on talking, saying, "Keep quiet. Do not do
anything. Wait. Keep away from me and be still. I am in danger." They
would not have listened to him, if it had not been that he was a
leading man, and a brave warrior. The riders came to the largest
lodge, which stood in the middle of the village. Here they stopped.
When Running Chief got off the horse, he held tightly the belt of the
Wichita, who dismounted; and they went together into the lodge of the
Head Chief, and the others followed and went in, and all sat down
opposite the door. All this time there was a hubbub outside. People
were flying from their lodges to that of the Head Chief, and lifting
up the edge of the lodge, and peeping under it at the Pawnees. They
chattered to each other, and called out to those who were coming; all
was noise and confusion.


V.

The under chiefs came in one by one, until all were present. Then one
of them made a speech, saying that it would be best to leave
everything to the Head Chief, and that he should decide what ought to
be done with these enemies. Then it was silent for a time, while the
Chief was making up his mind what should be done; and during this
silence Running Chief felt a touch on his shoulder, and looked behind
him, and there was handed to him under the edge of the lodge a dish of
meat. He took it and began to eat, and his companion also ate with
him. After he had eaten a few mouthfuls, he took his arrows, which he
had held in his hand, and put them in his quiver, and unstrung his bow
and laid it aside, and his friend did the same.

Then the Chief stood up and spoke to those sitting there and said,
"What can I do? They have eaten of my food. I cannot make war on
people who have been eating with me." While he was saying this,
Running Chief was again touched on the shoulder, and some one handed
him a cup of water, and he drank; and the Chief, as he saw this,
added, "and have also drunk of my water." He then turned and called to
a certain man, who could speak Pawnee, and told him to ask these men
if they were on the warpath. He asked them, "Are you on the warpath?"
and they replied, "Yes, we are on the warpath."

Then said he, "What are you here for?"

Running Chief answered, "You have plenty of dogs. I am here that my
body may be eaten by them."

When the Wichitas heard this they all made a sound, _Ah-h-h-h!_ for
they were surprised at his bravery. The Chief asked him, "Do you know
anything about the horses that were missed last night?"

He said, "Yes."

"Where are they?" said the Head Chief.

Running Chief replied, "The party have gone off with them--Pawnees."

"Were you with them?"

"Yes, I was with them, and I stopped behind on purpose to come into
your village."

The Head Chief then turned to the others and talked for a little
while. He said, "See what a brave man this is. He had resolved to die.
But he shall not die, because he has eaten our food and drunk of our
water. Although we are enemies of this man's tribe, yet we are the
same people with them, who have been apart for a long time. I cannot
help it; my heart is touched by his talk and by their bravery. By
their bravery they are safe." And all the Wichitas said "_Waugh_."

Then the Head Chief through the interpreter talked to Running Chief.
He said, "Are you a chief?"

Running Chief replied, "No, I am not a chief; I am like a dog; I am
poor."

The Head Chief said to him, "By your bravery you have saved
yourselves. You shall have the road to your home made white before
you. Let there not be one blood spot on it." Then he turned to those
who were sitting about the lodge and said, "Now, my young men, do
something for them."

A young man named Crazy Wolf stood up and spoke; and when he had
finished, the interpreter said, "That man has given you a black horse,
the best that he has."

Another young man on the other side of the lodge spoke, and the
interpreter said, "He has given you a roan horse, the best that he
has." Then all the Wichitas began to speak at once, and before they
knew it, the Pawnees had ten head of horses, and robes and blankets,
saddles, bridles, shields, spears and moccasins--many beautiful
presents. So they were well provided.

The Head Chief again stood up and talked to the assembly, praising
these Pawnees; and he stepped over to Running Chief and shook hands
with him, and when he did so, Running Chief stood up and put his arms
around the Chief and pressed him to his breast, and the Chief did the
same to him, and when Running Chief had his arms around the Chief, the
Chief trembled, and came near to crying. The Chief embraced the other
Pawnee, and looked him in the face and said, "What brave men you are!"

The friend said, "What my friend stepped, that I stepped; I trod in
his footprints; I had one mind with him."

As the Chief stepped back to his place he spoke through the
interpreter, "Now you have eaten of my food and drunk of my water.
Everything that I have is yours. My women and my children are yours.
You are not a chief, but you are a chief."[3] Then he spoke to the
crowd and they all went away, leaving only the principal men in the
lodge.

  [3] You are not a chief, but you have made yourself a chief by your
  great qualities.

That afternoon the Pawnees were feasted everywhere, and had to eat
till they were almost dead; and as they went about, all of their
former sadness seemed to be swept away, and Running Chief felt like
crying for joy.

While they were feasting, the man who had given the black horse went
out, and caught it up, and painted it handsomely, and rode into the
village, and put on it a silver bridle, and eagle feathers in its mane
and tail, and when Running Chief was going from one lodge to another
he met him, and jumped off the horse and said, "Brother, ride this."
He gave him also a shield and a spear.

These Pawnees staid two months with the Wichitas, and all their
troubles seemed at an end. At length Running Chief called a council of
the chiefs, and told them that now he wished to make ready to go home
to his village. He thanked them for all that they had done for him,
and said that now he would go. The chiefs said, "It is well. We are
glad that you have been with us and visited us. Take the good news
back to your tribe. Tell them that we are one people, though long
separated. Let the road between our villages be made white. Let it no
more show any spots of blood."

Running Chief thanked them and said, "I will go and take the good news
to my people. I shall show them the presents you have made us, and
tell them how well we have been treated. It may be that some of the
chiefs of my tribe will wish to come down to visit you, as I have
done." The Head Chief said, "Can I rely on your words, that I shall be
visited?" Running Chief replied, "You can rely on them if I have to
come alone to visit you again." The Chief got up and put his arms
about him, and said, "I want to be visited. Let there be no more war
between us. We are brothers; let us always be brothers." Then they
gave him many more presents, and packed his horses, and six braves
offered to go with him through the Cheyenne country. They went through
in the night. Running Chief said afterward, "I could have stolen a lot
of horses from the Cheyennes, but I thought, I will be coming back
through this country and it is better not."

At the Pawnee village these two young men had been mourned by their
relations as lost or dead. It was in the spring (March, 1869) when
they reached home, and there was joy in the tribe when they came in
with the presents. Running Chief was praised, and so was his friend.
Both had been brave and had done great things.

Now Running Chief's name was changed from _Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi_ to
_Skür´-ar-a le-shar_ (Lone Chief).


VI.

The following summer in August, at the close of the summer hunt, three
hundred Pawnees, old men and young, under the leadership of Lone
Chief, visited the Wichitas, who received them well, and gave them
many horses. Lone Chief was not satisfied with the peace that he had
made with the Wichitas. He also visited the Kiowas, and made peace,
and was given by them eight fine horses. He also led his party to the
Comanches, and visited them, and got many presents. In the fall the
Pawnees returned to their village. Many of them fell sick on the way,
and some died.

In the winter of 1869-70 Lone Chief and his friend led a war party
against the Cheyennes. They took six hundred head of horses. The
Cheyennes now tell us that in the seventy-five lodges of that camp
there was not left a hoof. All night and all next day they ran the
herd. Then Lone Chief said, "Let us not run the horses any longer,
they will not come after us; they are afoot." When the party got on
the north side of the Republican, on the table lands, a terrible storm
of snow and wind came upon them, and they were nearly lost. For three
days and three nights they lay in the storm. All were frozen, some
losing toes and fingers. They survived, however, and brought in all
their horses. Again Lone Chief sacrificed to _Ti-ra´-wa_. A second
sacrifice is very unusual and a notable event.

  [Illustration: OLD-FASHIONED "T. GRAY" AX.]




THE PRISONERS OF COURT HOUSE ROCK.


Court House Rock is a high, square-shaped bluff, or butte, on the
North Platte River. It is composed of a hard, yellowish clay, which is
but slowly eroded by the weather, though soft enough to be cut readily
with a knife. On all sides except one, this rock or butte is nearly or
quite vertical, and its sides, smoothed and polished by the wind and
the rain, offer no projecting points, to serve as foot or hand holds
for one who might wish to climb up or down. On one side there is a way
by which an active man may reach the summit, where he finds a flat
tableland of moderate extent.

A number of years ago a war party of Skidi, who were camped near Court
House Rock, were surprised by a party of Sioux. There were many of
them, and they drove the Skidi back, and at length these were obliged
to climb the steep side of Court House Rock. The Sioux dared not
follow them up on to the rock, but guarded the only place where it was
possible to come down, and camped all around the rock below to starve
the Skidi out. The Skidi had nothing to eat nor to drink, and suffered
terribly from hunger and still more from thirst. The leader of the
party suffered most of any, for he thought that he would surely lose
all his men. He felt that this was the worst of all. He must not only
die, but must also be disgraced, because under his leadership the
young men of his party had been lost. He used to go off at night,
apart from the others, and pray to _Ti-ra´-wa_ for help; for some way
to save his party.

One night while he was praying, something spoke to him, and said,
"Look hard for a place where you may get down from this rock, and so
save both your men and yourself." He kept on praying that night, and
when day came, he looked all along the edge of the rock for a place
where it might be possible to get down. At last he found near the edge
of the cliff a point of the soft clay rock sticking up above the level
of the rest. The side of the rock below it was straight up and down,
and smooth. At night he took his knife, and began to cut about the
base of this point of rock, and night after night he kept at this
until he had cut away the base of the point, so that it was no larger
around than a man's body. Then he secretly took all the lariats that
the party had, and tied them together, and let them down, and found
that his rope was long enough to reach the ground. He put the rope
around the point, and made a loop in it for his feet, and slowly let
himself down to the ground. He got there safely, and then climbed back
again. The next night he called his men about him, and told them how
it was, and that they might all be saved. Then he ordered the youngest
and least important man of the party to let himself down, and after
him the next youngest, and so on, up to the more important men, and
last of all the leader's turn came. He let himself down, and they all
crept through the Sioux camp and escaped.

They never knew how long the Sioux stayed there watching the rock.
Probably until they thought that the Skidi had all starved to death.




WOLVES IN THE NIGHT.


In the year 1879 Little Warrior, with a Chaui boy and a soldier, was
off scouting on the plains east of the mountains. They saw a long way
off--perhaps twenty miles--some objects that seemed to be moving. It
was one of those hot dry days in summer, when all the air is quivering
and all things are distorted by the mirage. They watched these objects
through their glasses for a long time. They seemed to move and quiver,
and they could not tell what they were, but Little Warrior thought
they were mounted men. They seemed to be traveling in the same
direction with this scouting party. At length they could see that they
were mounted men, and were driving some loose animals.

When night came, the two Pawnees left their horses with the soldier
and started on foot to look for the camp of the strangers, and to find
out who they were. They formed the plan to make themselves look like
coyotes, so that they could go close to the camp. Each took from under
his saddle a white sheet, which, when the time came, they would tie
around their bodies, having their guns inside, held under their arms,
and their pistols in their belts about their waists. It was a bright
moonlight night, the moon being so bright that it made it hard to see
far on the prairie.

The camp was found in a little hollow, and was occupied by seven Ute
Indians. They had a dog with them. The Pawnees could hear them talking
and laughing, as they sat about the big fire they had built. They
could see the horses too.

The men put on their white sheets, and getting down on all fours,
prowled about like wolves, gradually drawing nearer and nearer to the
camp. Two or three times the dog smelt them and barked, but they paid
no attention to it, but trotted hither and thither, smelling the
ground and sometimes sitting up on their haunches like wolves, and
then going on again. After a little while they came so close to the
camp that they could see that the horses were staked out, and that
there were some mules feeding about, hobbled. One of the Utes, who
noticed the wolves prowling near the camp, got his gun and shot at
the Chaui boy, but he did not hit him. The boy loped off and joined
Little Warrior behind a hill, and there the two waited.

Little Warrior said to his companion, "These men have come far to-day.
They are pretty tired. Wait and they will lie down and go to sleep."
Presently the camp quieted down and the Utes slept.

The Pawnees then made themselves wolves again, and went close to the
Ute camp. The horses were staked close to where the men were sleeping,
but the mules had wandered off a little to one side. Six mules were
together, and one was by itself on the other side of the camp. Little
Warrior went around the camp to this one, and cut its hobbles, and
then drove it slowly toward the others. Then they drove the whole
seven quietly away from the camp. If it had not been for the dog, they
could very likely have stolen the horses too, and left the Utes afoot,
and perhaps they might have been able to kill the Utes.

They drove the mules about two miles, and then went on to where they
had left their horses. They found the soldier nearly frightened to
death. He said he did not like to be left by himself in such a lonely
place; he wanted to go to camp. They told him they were going to
return and get those mules. They did so, and secured them, and drove
them in to their own camp, which they reached about six o'clock the
next morning.

It was learned afterward that fourteen mules had been stolen from a
Government train, and a reward of $200 had been offered for their
recovery. These taken by the two Pawnees were seven of the stolen
animals, and each of the men received $50 as his proportion of the
reward.

  [Illustration: WHIP.]




A LEADER OF SOLDIERS.


In 1876, when the attack was made by General Mackenzie on the village
of the Cheyenne chief, Dull Knife, the Pawnee Scouts charged down on
the village on the south side of the creek, while on the north side of
the stream, a company of United States cavalry, under Lieut. McKinney,
were making a charge. Before the village was reached, Ralph J. Weeks,
an educated Pawnee, and some others of the scouts crossed the stream
and were riding near the soldiers. As they were crossing the cañon at
the mouth of which the village stood, the enemy began to fire at them
from the ravine. Lieut. McKinney was killed at the first volley, and
immediately afterward his first sergeant fell, leaving the troop
without a commander. The soldiers hesitated, stopped, and then turned
round, and began to retreat.

Ralph rode up behind them, and got off his horse, and called out,
"Hold on boys, don't run. There are only seven Indians there. Come on,
and we will kill them all. Get off your horses and come ahead on foot.
There are only seven of them. We will kill them all."

The men stopped in their retreat, dismounted, and under Ralph's
direction and leadership, went forward, and did kill all the Indians
in the ravine.

  [Illustration: KNIFE SCABBARD.]




A CHEYENNE BLANKET.


The Cheyennes, like other Indians, do not speak to each other when
they are away from the camp. If a man goes away from the village, and
sits or stands by himself on the top of a hill, it is a sign that he
wants to be alone; perhaps to meditate; perhaps to pray. No one speaks
to him or goes near him.

Now, there was once a Pawnee boy, who went off on the warpath to the
Cheyenne camp. In some way he had obtained a Cheyenne blanket. This
Pawnee came close to the Cheyenne camp, and hid himself there to wait.
About the middle of the afternoon, he left his hiding place, and
walked to the top of the hill overlooking the village. He had his
Cheyenne blanket wrapped about him and over his head, with only a
little hole for his eyes. He stood there for an hour or two, looking
over the Cheyenne camp.

They were coming in from buffalo hunting, and some were leading in the
pack horses loaded down with meat. A man came along, riding a horse
packed with meat, and leading another pack horse, and a black spotted
horse that was his running horse. These running horses are ridden only
on the chase or on war parties, and are well cared for. After being
used they are taken down to the river and are washed and cleaned with
care. When the boy saw this spotted horse, he thought to himself that
this was the horse that he would take. When the man who was leading it
reached his lodge, he dismounted and handed the ropes to his women,
and went inside.

Then the Pawnee made up his mind what he would do. He started down the
hill into the village, and walked straight to this lodge where the
women were unloading the meat. He walked up to them, reached out his
hand, and took the ropes of the spotted horse and one of the others.
As he did so the women fell back. Probably they thought that this was
some one of the relations of the owner, who was going to take the
running horse down to the river to wash it. The Pawnee could not talk
Cheyenne, but as he turned away he mumbled something--_m-m-m-m_--as if
speaking in a low voice, and then walked down toward the river. As
soon as he had gone down over the bank and was out of sight, he jumped
on the spotted horse and rode into the brush, and pretty soon was away
with two horses, stolen out of the Cheyenne camp in broad daylight.

  [Illustration: A WAR SHIELD.]




LITTLE WARRIOR'S COUNSEL.


Most of the Pawnee heroes are so regarded because of victories, daring
deeds, the _coups_ they have counted and the horses they have stolen.
The glory of Comanche Chief and of Lone Chief depends mainly on their
bravery, rather than on the fact that they were peace-makers. Yet
there should be room among these stories for the account of an
educated Pawnee--a brave--who by his wise counsel to an Indian of a
hostile tribe saved many lives, both of Indians and of white men.
Little Warrior was educated at a Western college, but has shown his
bravery on the field of battle, and has sacrificed a scalp to
_Ti-ra´-wa_.

In the year 1879, at the time of the Ute outbreak, after Major
Thornburgh's command had been annihilated, Little Warrior was employed
as a scout for the troops. On the headwaters of the Arkansas River he
was one day scouting in advance of the command, in company with four
white soldiers and four Indian scouts. One day, the party saw far off
on the prairie an Indian, who showed a white flag, and came toward
them. When he had come near to them, the soldiers proposed to kill
him, and report that he was a Ute, one of the Indians that they were
looking for. But Little Warrior said, "No. He has a white flag up, and
it may be that he is carrying a dispatch, or, perhaps, he is a white
man disguised as an Indian."

When the man had come close to them, they saw that he was dressed like
a Comanche; he did not have the bristling fringe of hair over the
forehead that the Utes wear, and his side locks were unbraided. Little
Warrior asked him, by signs, if he was alone, to which he replied in
the same language that he was alone. Then Little Warrior inquired who
he was. The stranger made the sign for Comanche--a friendly tribe.

They took him into the camp, and after a while Little Warrior began to
talk to him in Comanche. He could not understand a word of it.

Then the Pawnee said to him, "My friend, you are a Ute." The stranger
acknowledged that he was.

Then Little Warrior talked to him, and gave him much good advice. He
said, "My friend, you and I have the same skin, and what I tell you
now is for your good. I speak to you as a friend, and what I say to
you now is so that you may save your women and your children. It is of
no use for you to try to fight the white people. I have been among
them, and I know how many they are. They are like the grass. Even if
you were to kill a hundred it would be nothing. It would be like
burning up a few handfuls of prairie grass. There would be just as
many left. If you try to fight them they will hunt you like a ghost.
Wherever you go they will follow after you, and you will get no rest.
The soldiers will be continually on your tracks. Even if you were to
go up on top of a high mountain, where there was nothing but rocks,
and where no one else could come, the soldiers would follow you, and
get around you, and wait, and wait, even for fifty years. They would
have plenty to eat, and they could wait until after you were dead.
There is one white man who is the chief of all this country, and what
he says must be done. It is no use to fight him.

"Now if you are wise you will go out and get all your people, and
bring them in, on to the reservation, and give yourself up. It will be
better for you in the end. I speak to you as a friend, because we are
both the same color, and I hope that you will listen to my words."

The Ute said, "My friend, your words are good, and I thank you for the
friendly advice you have given me. I will follow it and will agree to
go away and bring in my people."

Little Warrior said, "How do you make a promise?"

The Ute said, "By raising the right hand to one above."

Little Warrior said, "That is the custom also among my people."

The Ute raised his hand and made the promise.

After he had been detained two or three weeks, he was allowed to go,
and about a month afterward, he brought in the band of which he was
chief, and surrendered. Through his influence afterward, the whole
tribe came in and gave themselves up. He was grateful to Little
Warrior for what he had done for him, and told him that if he ever
came back into his country he would give him many ponies.




A COMANCHE BUNDLE.


A Pawnee boy went to the Comanche village after horses. At night he
went into the camp, crept to the door of a lodge, and took a horse
that was tied there. It was bright moonlight, and as he was cutting
the rope he saw, hanging before the lodge, a handsome shield and a
spear, which he took. There was also a bundle hanging there. He took
this down, opened it, and found in it a war bonnet, beaded moccasins
and leggings, and a breast-plate of long beads. He dressed himself in
all these fine things, mounted the horse and rode away.




_FOLK-TALES._




THE DUN HORSE.


I.

Many years ago, there lived in the Pawnee tribe an old woman and her
grandson, a boy about sixteen years old. These people had no relations
and were very poor. They were so poor that they were despised by the
rest of the tribe. They had nothing of their own; and always, after
the village started to move the camp from one place to another, these
two would stay behind the rest, to look over the old camp, and pick up
anything that the other Indians had thrown away, as worn out or
useless. In this way they would sometimes get pieces of robes, worn
out moccasins with holes in them, and bits of meat.

Now, it happened one day, after the tribe had moved away from the
camp, that this old woman and her boy were following along the trail
behind the rest, when they came to a miserable old worn out dun horse,
which they supposed had been abandoned by some Indians. He was thin
and exhausted, was blind of one eye, had a bad sore back, and one of
his forelegs was very much swollen. In fact, he was so worthless that
none of the Pawnees had been willing to take the trouble to try to
drive him along with them. But when the old woman and her boy came
along, the boy said, "Come now, we will take this old horse, for we
can make him carry our pack." So the old woman put her pack on the
horse, and drove him along, but he limped and could only go very
slowly.


II.

The tribe moved up on the North Platte, until they came to Court House
Rock. The two poor Indians followed them, and camped with the others.
One day while they were here, the young men who had been sent out to
look for buffalo, came hurrying into camp and told the chiefs that a
large herd of buffalo were near, and that among them was a spotted
calf.

The Head Chief of the Pawnees had a very beautiful daughter, and when
he heard about the spotted calf, he ordered his old crier to go about
through the village, and call out that the man who killed the spotted
calf should have his daughter for his wife. For a spotted robe is
_ti-war´-uks-ti_--big medicine.

The buffalo were feeding about four miles from the village, and the
chiefs decided that the charge should be made from there. In this way,
the man who had the fastest horse would be the most likely to kill the
calf. Then all the warriors and the young men picked out their best
and fastest horses, and made ready to start. Among those who prepared
for the charge was the poor boy on the old dun horse. But when they
saw him, all the rich young braves on their fast horses pointed at
him, and said, "Oh, see; there is the horse that is going to catch the
spotted calf;" and they laughed at him, so that the poor boy was
ashamed, and rode off to one side of the crowd, where he could not
hear their jokes and laughter.

When he had ridden off some little way, the horse stopped, and turned
his head round, and spoke to the boy. He said, "Take me down to the
creek, and plaster me all over with mud. Cover my head and neck and
body and legs." When the boy heard the horse speak, he was afraid; but
he did as he was told. Then the horse said, "Now mount, but do not
ride back to the warriors, who laugh at you because you have such a
poor horse. Stay right here, until the word is given to charge." So
the boy stayed there.

And presently all the fine horses were drawn up in line and pranced
about, and were so eager to go that their riders could hardly hold
them in; and at last the old crier gave the word, "_Loo-ah_"--Go! Then
the Pawnees all leaned forward on their horses and yelled, and away
they went. Suddenly, away off to the right, was seen the old dun
horse. He did not seem to run. He seemed to sail along like a bird. He
passed all the fastest horses, and in a moment he was among the
buffalo. First he picked out the spotted calf, and charging up
alongside of it, _U-ra-rish!_ straight flew the arrow. The calf fell.
The boy drew another arrow, and killed a fat cow that was running by.
Then he dismounted and began to skin the calf, before any of the other
warriors had come up. But when the rider got off the old dun horse,
how changed he was! He pranced about and would hardly stand still near
the dead buffalo. His back was all right again; his legs were well and
fine; and both his eyes were clear and bright.

The boy skinned the calf and the cow that he had killed, and then he
packed all the meat on the horse, and put the spotted robe on top of
the load, and started back to the camp on foot, leading the dun horse.
But even with this heavy load the horse pranced all the time, and was
scared at everything he saw. On the way to camp, one of the rich young
chiefs of the tribe rode up by the boy, and offered him twelve good
horses for the spotted robe, so that he could marry the Head Chief's
beautiful daughter; but the boy laughed at him and would not sell the
robe.

Now, while the boy walked to the camp leading the dun horse, most of
the warriors rode back, and one of those that came first to the
village, went to the old woman, and said to her, "Your grandson has
killed the spotted calf." And the old woman said, "Why do you come to
tell me this? You ought to be ashamed to make fun of my boy, because
he is poor." The warrior said, "What I have told you is true," and
then he rode away. After a little while another brave rode up to the
old woman, and said to her, "Your grandson has killed the spotted
calf." Then the old woman began to cry, she felt so badly because
every one made fun of her boy, because he was poor.

Pretty soon the boy came along, leading the horse up to the lodge
where he and his grandmother lived. It was a little lodge, just big
enough for two, and was made of old pieces of skin that the old woman
had picked up, and was tied together with strings of rawhide and
sinew. It was the meanest and worst lodge in the village. When the old
woman saw her boy leading the dun horse with the load of meat and the
robes on it, she was very much surprised. The boy said to her, "Here,
I have brought you plenty of meat to eat, and here is a robe, that you
may have for yourself. Take the meat off the horse." Then the old
woman laughed, for her heart was glad. But when she went to take the
meat from the horse's back, he snorted and jumped about, and acted
like a wild horse. The old woman looked at him in wonder, and could
hardly believe that it was the same horse. So the boy had to take off
the meat, for the horse would not let the old woman come near him.


III.

That night the horse spoke again to the boy and said, "_Wa-ti-hes
Chah´-ra-rat wa-ta_. To-morrow the Sioux are coming--a large war party.
They will attack the village, and you will have a great battle. Now,
when the Sioux are drawn up in line of battle, and are all ready to
fight, you jump on to me, and ride as hard as you can, right into the
middle of the Sioux, and up to their Head Chief, their greatest
warrior, and count _coup_ on him, and kill him, and then ride back. Do
this four times, and count _coup_ on four of the bravest Sioux, and
kill them, but don't go again. If you go the fifth time, may be you
will be killed, or else you will lose me. _La-ku´-ta-chix_--remember."
So the boy promised.

The next day it happened as the horse had said, and the Sioux came
down and formed a line of battle. Then the boy took his bow and
arrows, and jumped on the dun horse, and charged into the midst of
them. And when the Sioux saw that he was going to strike their Head
Chief, they all shot their arrows at him, and the arrows flew so
thickly across each other that the sky became dark, but none of them
hit the boy. And he counted _coup_ on the Chief, and killed him, and
then rode back. After that he charged again among the Sioux, where
they were gathered thickest, and counted _coup_ on their bravest
warrior, and killed him. And then twice more, until he had gone four
times as the horse had told him.

But the Sioux and the Pawnees kept on fighting, and the boy stood
around and watched the battle. And at last he said to himself, "I have
been four times and have killed four Sioux, and I am all right, I am
not hurt anywhere; why may I not go again?" So he jumped on the dun
horse, and charged again. But when he got among the Sioux, one Sioux
warrior drew an arrow and shot. The arrow struck the dun horse behind
the forelegs and pierced him through. And the horse fell down dead.
But the boy jumped off, and fought his way through the Sioux, and ran
away as fast as he could to the Pawnees. Now, as soon as the horse was
killed, the Sioux said to each other, "This horse was like a man. He
was brave. He was not like a horse." And they took their knives and
hatchets, and hacked the dun horse and gashed his flesh, and cut him
into small pieces.

The Pawnees and Sioux fought all day long, but toward night the Sioux
broke and fled.


IV.

The boy felt very badly that he had lost his horse; and, after the
fight was over, he went out from the village to where it had taken
place, to mourn for his horse. He went to the spot where the horse
lay, and gathered up all the pieces of flesh, which the Sioux had cut
off, and the legs and the hoofs, and put them all together in a pile.
Then he went off to the top of a hill near by, and sat down and drew
his robe over his head, and began to mourn for his horse.

As he sat there, he heard a great wind storm coming up, and it passed
over him with a loud rushing sound, and after the wind came a rain.
The boy looked down from where he sat to the pile of flesh and bones,
which was all that was left of his horse, and he could just see it
through the rain. And the rain passed by, and his heart was very
heavy, and he kept on mourning.

And pretty soon, came another rushing wind, and after it a rain; and
as he looked through the driving rain toward the spot where the pieces
lay, he thought that they seemed to come together and take shape, and
that the pile looked like a horse lying down, but he could not see
well for the thick rain.

After this, came a third storm like the others; and now when he looked
toward the horse he thought he saw its tail move from side to side two
or three times, and that it lifted its head from the ground. The boy
was afraid, and wanted to run away, but he stayed.

And as he waited, there came another storm. And while the rain fell,
looking through the rain, the boy saw the horse raise himself up on
his forelegs and look about. Then the dun horse stood up.


V.

The boy left the place where he had been sitting on the hilltop, and
went down to him. When the boy had come near to him, the horse spoke
and said, "You have seen how it has been this day; and from this you
may know how it will be after this. But _Ti-ra´-wa_ has been good, and
has let me come back to you. After this, do what I tell you; not any
more, not any less." Then the horse said, "Now lead me off, far away
from the camp, behind that big hill, and leave me there to-night, and
in the morning come for me;" and the boy did as he was told.

And when he went for the horse in the morning, he found with him a
beautiful white gelding, much more handsome than any horse in the
tribe. That night the dun horse told the boy to take him again to the
place behind the big hill, and to come for him the next morning; and
when the boy went for him again, he found with him a beautiful black
gelding. And so for ten nights, he left the horse among the hills,
and each morning he found a different colored horse, a bay, a roan, a
gray, a blue, a spotted horse, and all of them finer than any horses
that the Pawnees had ever had in their tribe before.

Now the boy was rich, and he married the beautiful daughter of the
Head Chief, and when he became older, he was made Head Chief himself.
He had many children by his beautiful wife, and one day when his
oldest boy died, he wrapped him in the spotted calf robe and buried
him in it. He always took good care of his old grandmother, and kept
her in his own lodge until she died. The dun horse was never ridden
except at feasts, and when they were going to have a doctors' dance,
but he was always led about with the Chief, wherever he went. The
horse lived in the village for many years, until he became very old.
And at last he died.




A STORY OF FAITH.


Long ago, before they ever had any of these doctors' dances, there
was, in the Kit-ke-hahk´-i tribe, a young boy, small, growing up. He
seemed not to go with the other boys nor to play with them, but would
keep away from them. He would go off by himself, and lie down, and
sometimes they would find him crying, or half crying. He seemed to
have peculiar ways. His father and mother did not try to interfere
with him, but let him alone. Sometimes they would find him with mud or
clay smeared over his face and head. That is the sign of a doctor.
When you see a person putting mud on his face or head, it shows that
he has faith in the earth. From the earth are taken the roots that
they use in medicine.

When the parents saw this, they did not understand it. How should he
know anything about mud being the sign of a doctor? They did not
understand, but they just let him do it.

The boy grew up till he came to have the ways of a young man, but he
never went with any of the other boys. After he had grown up, they saw
that he had something in his mind. Sometimes he would fast for two
days, and sit by himself, smoking and praying to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and not
saying anything to any one. His father was a brave but not a chief,
and had plenty of horses. The son was well dressed and comfortably
off.

When any one in the camp was sick, this young man would take pity on
him, and of his own accord would go and doctor him, and pretty soon
the person would be well again. Through his doing this, the people
began to hear about him, and his name became great. He was humble, and
did not want to be thought well of. He was not proud, but he was
always doing good. At that time, there were many doctors in the tribe,
and they wondered how it was that he could cure so many people, when
he had never been taught by any of them. They could not understand it,
and they began to be jealous of him. He never wanted to be with the
doctors, but liked to stay by himself. He wanted to be alone rather
than with any one.

In that time there were bad doctors, and they began to hear about this
humble man and to be jealous of him. These bad doctors could curse a
man, and he would be cursed, and could poison one. They had great
power and influence, for everybody feared them.

The bands of the Pawnees were not then together, as they are now. As
the people talked about this young man, one of the other bands heard
about him. In this band was a great doctor, and this doctor thought to
himself, "This young man's influence is growing. If I do not do
something, he will soon be ahead of me."

This great doctor went to the village to visit this young man, to see
how he looked, and to find out how he got his knowledge and his power,
for he knew he had never been taught. He wanted to eat with him, and
talk with him, and find out whence his learning came. He reached the
Kit-ke-hahk´-i village. He was welcomed, and the young man treated him
with respect, and asked him to come into the lodge, and sit down with
him. At night they talked together. The great doctor said, "I am glad
to see you. You can come to me for advice sometimes." The young man
thanked him. They smoked together. It is the custom always when an
Indian is visiting another, for the one that is being visited to
present all the smokes; but at this time the great doctor said, "We
will smoke my tobacco." So all night they smoked his tobacco. The next
morning he went away. He did not again eat with the young man. He
said, "I am glad, and I am going." And he went away to his village.
This happened in the winter.

This young man was not married. His father had asked him to marry, but
he would not. He said he had reasons.

About summer time, he felt different from what he had. He was drowsy
and felt badly. He felt heavy. He seemed to be swelling up with some
strange new disease. The great doctor had poisoned him with this
result. How it was no one can tell, but it was so. This was a
disgrace, and he did not know how to get out of it. There was no way.
He would go off and cry, and pray to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and sometimes would
stay for three or four days without anything to eat. He was so
miserable that one time he was going to kill himself. He did not tell
his father or any one about this, but kept it to himself. The tribe
went off on a hunt and left the old village. Before they started, the
man went off on a hill somewhere to meditate and pray, and his father
told him that when he was ready to start he should ride such a horse,
and he left it in the village for him when he should come in.

When he came into the empty village he found the horse tied there, and
he saddled it and started; but instead of going in the direction the
tribe had taken, he went east. His horse was a fine one. He went away
off by himself for some days, and at last he stopped, and got off his
horse, and tied it to a tree. Then he called aloud and said, "_A-ti-us
ta´-kaw-a_ (My Father, in all places), it is through you that I am
living. Perhaps it was through you that this man put me in this
condition. You are the ruler. Nothing is impossible to you. If you see
fit, take this away from me." Then he turned round and said, "Now,
you, all fish of the rivers, and you, all birds of the air, and all
animals that move upon the earth, and you, oh Sun! I present to you
this animal." He said again, "You birds in the air, and you animals
upon the earth, we are related, we are alike in this respect, that
one ruler made us all. You see me, how unhappy I am. If you have any
power, intercede for me."

When he had finished his prayer, he went up to the horse, and stabbed
it with his knife and killed it, and it fell down dead. He turned it
so that its head was toward the east, and raised it on its belly,
doubling its knees under it, and cut the hide down the back, and
skinned it down on both sides, so that the birds of the air and the
animals of the earth might feed on it.

The tribe at this time was camped on the head of the Republican River.
He went on toward the east until he came to the place on the Platte
River called _Pa-huk´_ (hill island). He saw that there were many wild
animals on this point, and he liked it, and thought he would stay
there, and perhaps dream. He stopped there a while, feeling very
badly, and mourning all the time on this point. He was there several
days, and one night it happened that he went to sleep [fainted], for
he was exhausted with much weeping and praying. Something spoke to
him, and said, "What are you doing here?" He woke up, and looked
around, but saw no one. It was only a voice. Another night when he was
asleep a voice asked him, "What are you doing here?" He awoke and
looked about, but saw no one. A third night the same thing happened,
and he was wondering what it meant. Then he answered and said, "Who
ever you are who speaks to me, look at me and you will see that I am
poor in mind.[4] I am a man, and yet I am in a condition that no man
was ever in before. I am here only to suffer and to die. Whoever you
are who speaks to me, take pity on me and help me." He received no
answer.

  [4] Poor in mind, _i. e._, despondent, miserable, unhappy.

The fourth night something touched him. He was half awake when he felt
it. Something said, "What are you doing here?" He was lying on his
side, his head toward the east and his feet toward the west. Something
tapped him on the shoulder, and he looked up and saw a great big
animal, big black eyes and a whitish body, _Pah´_, big elk. When he
looked at it, the animal said, "Get up and sit down;" and the elk too
sat down. The elk said, "I have heard of you and of your condition,
and I am here to tell you that we all know your trouble. Right here
where you are, under you, is the home of the _Nahu´rac_ (animals). I
know that it is impossible to help you, but I shall let them
know--they already know--that you are here. I can only help you so
far as to take you to the places where these animals are. If this
animal home cannot help you, I will take you to another place; if that
fails, I will take you to another place; if that fails, to another.
Then you will see that I have done my part. If it is impossible for
the animals to do it, we have still one above that we look to." As
soon as he had said this, he vanished like a wind; disappeared all at
once.

While the boy sat there, thinking about what the animal had said to
him, he fell asleep with his mind full of these things. In his sleep
something talked to him. It said, "I know that you feel badly, and
that your mind is poor. I have passed you many times, and I have heard
you crying. I belong here, but I am one of the servants. I have
informed my leaders, those who command me, about you, and that you are
so poor in your mind, and they have said to me, 'If you take pity on
him, do as you please, because you are our servant.'"

At this time he woke up, and saw sitting by him a little bird.[5] He
talked to it. He said, "Oh, my brother, I feel pleased that you
understand my poor mind. Now take pity on me and help me." The bird
said to him, "You must not talk in this way to me. I am only a
servant. To-morrow night I will come this way, and will show you what
to do. To-morrow night I will come this way, and whatever you see me
do, you do the same thing." Then he disappeared. The man then felt a
little easier in his mind, and more as if there were some hope for
him.

  [5] This is a small bird, blue above, white below, with red legs.
  It is swift-flying, and sometimes dives down into the water. It is
  the messenger bird of the _Nahu´rac_. See also story of the Boy who
  was Sacrificed.

The next night the bird came, and was flying about near him after
dark, waiting for the time. When the time came, the bird flew close to
him, and said, "Come. Let us go to the edge of the cut bank." When
they had come to the edge of the bank above the water in the river,
the bird said, "Now, my friend, you are poor. What I do, you do. When
I dive down off this bank, you follow me." The man replied to him,
"Yes, I am poor. Whatever you tell me to do, I will do." So when the
bird dived down off the cut bank, the man threw off everything, and
cared nothing for what he did except to follow the bird. He leaped
down after it, and as he sprang, it seemed to him that he felt like a
bird, and could sail this way and that. He did not feel as if he were
falling, and were going to be hurt, but as if he were flying, and
could control his movements. Just as he reached the water in his fall,
it seemed to him that he was standing in the entrance way of a lodge,
and could look through into it and see the fire burning in the middle.

While he was standing there, the bird flew in ahead of him, and he
heard it say, "Here he is." He stepped toward the entrance, and just
as he came to it the _Nahu´rac_ all made their different noises, for
they are not used to the smell of human beings. The bears growled, and
the panthers and wild cats and wolves and rattlesnakes and other
animals all made their sounds. As he went in, there was a bear
standing on one side, and a great snake on the other, and it was very
difficult for the man to go in. He hesitated a little to enter that
narrow passage, but something behind him seemed to push him ahead,
although the bear stood ready to seize him, and the snake was rattling
and standing up as if about to strike. If he had not had the courage
to pass them he would have been lost, but he looked neither to the
right nor to the left, but walked straight ahead past them. As soon as
he had passed them, they both sank back and were quiet. Then all the
_Nahu´rac_ made another kind of a noise, as if welcoming him. The
bear began to lie down; and the snake stretched itself out again. As
he went in he just stood there and looked around. He saw there all
kinds of animals. The head doctor was a white beaver, very large,
there was another a garfish, another an otter, and the fourth was a
sandhill crane.

The man sat down, and he looked very pitiful. Then for a while
everything was silent. Then the servant said to the four head doctors,
"I have brought this man here. I have taken pity on him, and I want
you to take pity on him." Then it was more silent than ever. The man
looked about him, and saw all the animals, and saw them roll their
eyes around at him.

Presently the servant got up, and stood right in the midst. The head
doctors sat at the back of the lodge opposite the door on the other
side of the fire. The bird said, "My rulers, you know me. I am your
servant, and I am always obedient to your commands. No matter what you
tell me to do, I do it. No matter how long the journeys you send me
on, I go. Many nights I have lost sleep because of carrying out your
commands. I have seen this man many times, and I am weary of his
crying as I fly back and forth. Now, I want you to take pity on this
man, because I pity him. Look on this poor-minded man and pity him."

Then the bird went to the young man, and took from him his pipe, which
was filled, and carried it round and stood before the beaver, the head
doctor, and held out the pipe to him to take. The white beaver did not
stretch out his hand for it, and the bird stood there for a long time.
At last the bird began to cry, and the tears began to run down its
face, and it cried hard; and at last the white beaver stretched out
his hand, and then drew it back again, and hesitated; and the bird
kept on crying, and at length the head doctor reached out his hand and
took the pipe. Just as soon as he took the pipe, all the animals made
a kind of a hissing sound, as much as to say, _Loo´ah_--Good. They
were pleased. Then the white beaver, holding the pipe, said, "I cannot
help but reach out for this pipe, for I take pity on my servant. But
it is impossible for me to promise that I will do this thing, but I
will do what I can. I will leave it to this other _Nahu´rac_ to say
what shall be done;" and he passed the pipe to the other _Nahu´rac_
who sat next to him. This animal reached for the pipe, and took it. He
made a speech, and said, "My friends, I am poor, I am poor. I have
not such power as that;" and he passed the pipe to another; and he
said, "I have not the power;" and he passed it to another; and so it
went around the circle. The pipe had passed around, and none of the
_Nahu´rac_ had the power. None of them seemed to understand how to
help the man. Then the white beaver said, "My friend, you see that no
one of us have the power to help you. There is another lodge of
_Nahu´rac_ at _Pa´howa_. You must go there and ask them." Then the
_Nahu´rac_ made medicine, and the young man went to sleep, and when he
awoke at daylight, he found himself on the point where he had lain
down to sleep the night before.

He was discouraged and wept all day long. At night the elk came to him
and said, "Go to sleep; I will take you over to _Pa´howa_." The man
slept and the elk took him on its back and carried him while asleep,
and the next morning he found himself on that point of _Pa´howa_.

That night the messenger bird came to him and said, "Now, my friend,
follow me, and what you see me do, that do yourself. When I dive down
into _Pa´howa_, you follow me." The bird dived down into the spring,
and the young man jumped after him, and again found himself standing
at the door of a lodge, and the same things took place as before. Here
the same animals were the head doctors. The chief head doctor talked
to the boy and said, "My friend, I am sorry you have come to me in the
condition you are in. My friend, this is something impossible. If it
were anything else it might be possible for us to cure your trouble.
Nothing like it was ever known before."

When he had said this he turned to the _Nahu´rac_ and said, "Now you
shall be the leaders. If there are any of you who understand things
like this; if any of you can take the lead in things like this, why do
it. It is beyond my power. Say what shall be done, any of you. My mind
would be big if any of you could take pity on this poor man."

Another one of the _Nahu´rac_ stood up and spoke, "My brother [to the
white beaver], and my brother [to the young man], do not feel hard at
me. This is beyond my power. I cannot do anything to help him." So it
went around the circle, every one saying that it was impossible. After
it had gone round, the head doctor again stood up and said, "Now, my
friend, you can see that it is impossible to cure you of this trouble,
but there is another lodge of the _Nahu´rac_ on the west side of the
Loup River. You go there." Then they put him to sleep, and when he
awoke next morning, he was on top of the ground near _Pa´howa_.

That night the elk took him while he was asleep to the place on the
Loup. The next night he was sitting on the ground there, and the bird
came to him, and he followed the bird down over the bank and into the
_Nahu´rac_ lodge. Here the head doctors were the same animals, and
they made speeches as had been done at the other places, and, as
before, it was left to the assembly, and all agreed that it was beyond
their power. Then the white beaver directed him to go to an island in
the Platte, near the Lone Tree, where there was another lodge of the
_Nahu´rac_. The elk took him to this island. Under the center of this
island was the lodge. The messenger bird was with him and went into
the lodge and asked the _Nahu´rac_ to help him. The white beaver made
a speech, and said, "My friend, I have heard the condition that you
are in. Of all these lodges that you have visited, that lodge at
_Pa-huk´_ is the head. I want you to go back there, and tell the
leaders there that they are the rulers, and that whatever they shall
do will be right, and will be agreed to by the other lodges. They
must help you if they can. If they cannot do it, no one can."

When the elk took him back to _Pa-huk´_, the bird again conducted him
into the lodge. He had left his pipe here. When he entered the lodge
all the animals made a hissing sound--_No´a_--they were glad to see
him again. The man stood in the middle of the lodge and spoke. He
said, "Now you animals all, you are the leaders. You see how poor my
mind is. I am tired of the long journeys you have sent me on. I want
you to take pity on me."

The white beaver stood up and took the pipe and said, "Oh, my brother,
I have done this to try these other lodges of _Nahu´rac_, to see if
any of them were equal to me. That was the reason that I sent you
around to all these other lodges, to see if any of them would be
willing to undertake to rid you of your burden. But I see that they
all still acknowledge that I am the leader. Now I have here an animal
that I think will undertake to help you and to rid you of your
trouble." Saying this he stepped out to the right, and walked past
some of the _Nahu´rac_ until he came to a certain animal--a ground
dog--and held out the pipe to it. There were twelve of these animals,
all alike--small, with round faces and black whiskers--sitting on
their haunches. He held out the pipe to the head one of these twelve.
When the white beaver reached out the pipe to this animal he did not
take it. He hesitated a long time, and held his head down. He did not
want to take the pipe. He looked around the lodge, and at the man, and
drew in his breath. At last he reached out his paws and took the pipe,
and as he did so, all the _Nahu´rac_ made a noise, the biggest kind of
a noise. They were glad.

Then the head ground dog got up and said, "Now, doctors, I have
accepted this pipe on account of our servant, who is so faithful, and
who many a night has lost sleep on account of our commands. I have
accepted it for his sake. It is impossible to do this thing. If it had
been earlier, I could perhaps have done it. Even now I will try, and
if I fail now, we can do nothing for him."

After they had smoked, they told the man to go and sit down opposite
the entrance to the lodge, between the head doctors and the fire.
These twelve animals stood up and walked back and forth on the
opposite side of the fire from him, facing him. After a while they
told him to stand up. The head ground dog now asked the other
_Nahu´rac_ to help him, by singing, and they all sang; and the ground
dogs danced, keeping time to the singing, and moved their hands up and
down, and made their jaws go as if eating, but did not open their
mouths.

After a while they told him to lie down with his head toward the
doctors and his feet toward the entrance. After he had lain down, they
began to move and went round the lodge toward him, and the head ground
dog jumped over the man's belly, and as he jumped over him he was seen
to have a big piece of flesh in his mouth, and was eating it. Another
ground dog followed him, and another, and each one ran until he came
to the man, and as each one jumped over him, it had a piece of flesh
in its mouth, eating it. So they kept going until they had eaten all
the swelling. The young man was unconscious all this time, for he
afterward said he knew nothing of what had happened.

The head ground dog spoke to the animals, and said, "Now, _Nahu´rac_,
you have seen what I can do. This is the power that I have. That is
the reason I am afraid to be out on the prairie, because when I get
hungry I would kill men and would eat them. My appetite would
overpower me, and I do not want to do these things, I want to be
friendly. This is the reason that I do not travel around on top of
the ground. I stay hid all the time."

The man was still unconscious, and the head ground dog said, "Now,
_Nahu´rac_, I do not understand how to restore this man. I leave that
to you." Then the ground dogs went back to their places and sat down.
Then the head doctor, the beaver, spoke to the bears. He said, "Now
this man belongs to you. Let me see what you can do." The head bear
got up and said, "Very well, I will come. I will let you see what I
can do." Then the bears stood up and began to sing. The head bear
would jump on top of the man, and act as if he were going to tear him
to pieces, and the others would take hold of him, and shake him
around, and at last his blood began to flow and the man began to
breathe, but he was still unconscious. After a while he moved and came
to life, and felt himself just as he had been many months before. He
found that his trouble was gone and that he was cured.

The head bear still stood by him and spoke to the _Nahu´rac_. He said,
"Now, _Nahu´rac_, this is what I can do. I do not care how dangerously
wounded I may be, I know how to cure myself. If they leave any breath
at all in me, I know how to cure myself." Then the bears went to
their place and sat down.

The man got up and spoke to the _Nahu´rac_, thanking them for what
they had done for him. He stayed there several nights, watching the
doings of the _Nahu´rac_. They taught him all their ways, all the
animal secrets. The head doctor said to him, "Now, I am going to send
you back to your home, but I will ask a favor of you, in return for
what I have done for you."

The man answered him, "It will be so, whatever you say."

The doctor said, "Through you let my animals that move in the river be
fed. Now you can see who we are. I move in the water. I have no
breath, but I exist. We every one of us shall die except _Ti-ra´-wa_.
He made us, just as he made you. He made you to live in the air. We
live where there is no air. You see the difference. I know where is
that great water that surrounds us [the ocean]. I know that the heaven
[sky] is the house of _Ti-ra´-wa_, and we live inside of it. You must
imitate us. Do as we do. You must place your dependence on us, but
still, if anything comes up that is very difficult, you must put your
dependence on _Ti-ra´-wa_. Ask help from the ruler. He made us. He
made every thing. There are different ways to different creatures.
What you do I do not do, and what I do you do not do. We are
different. When you imitate us you must always blow a smoke to each
one of these four chief doctors, once to each; but to _Ti-ra´-wa_ you
must blow four smokes. And always blow four to the night, to the east,
because something may tell you in your sleep a thing which will
happen. This smoke represents the air filled with the smoke of hazy
days. That smoke is pleasant to _Ti-ra´-wa_. He made it himself. Now
go home, and after you have been there for a time, go and pay a visit
to the doctor who put you in this condition."

The young man went home to his village, and got there in the night. He
had long been mourned as dead, and his father was now poor in mind on
account of him. He went into his father's lodge, and touched him, and
said, "Wake up, I am here."

His father could not believe it. He had thought him dead a long time.
He said, "Is it you, or is it a ghost?"

The young man answered, "It is I, just the same as ever. Get up, and
go and tell my uncles and all my relations that I am here. I want you
to give me something; a blue bead, and some Indian tobacco, and some
buffalo meat, and a pipe."

The father went about and told his relations that his son had come
back, and they were very glad, and came into the lodge, bringing the
presents, and gave them to the boy. He took them, and went down to the
river, and threw them in, and they were carried down to the _Nahu´rac_
lodge at _Pa-huk´_.

A few days after this the boy got on his horse, and rode away to visit
the doctor who had brought his trouble on him. When he reached the
village, the people said to the doctor, "A man is coming to visit
you," and the doctor was troubled, for he knew what he had done to the
boy. But he thought that he knew so much that no one could get the
better of him. When the boy came to the lodge, he got off his horse,
went in and was welcomed. After they had eaten, the boy said to him,
"When you visited me we smoked your tobacco; to-day we will smoke
mine."

They did so, for the doctor thought that no one could overcome him.
They smoked until daylight, and while they were smoking, the boy kept
moving his jaws as if eating, but did not open his mouth. At daylight
the boy said he must be going. He went, and when he got down to the
river, he blew strongly upon the ice, and immediately the water in the
river was full of blood. It was the blood of the doctor. It seems that
the ground dogs had taught the young man how to do their things.

When the people found the doctor he was dead in his lodge, and he was
all hollow. All his blood and the inside of him had gone into the
river, and had gone down to feed the animals. So the boy kept his
promise to the _Nahu´rac_ and had revenge on the doctor.

The boy was the greatest doctor in the Kit-ke-hahk´-i band, and was
the first who taught them all the doctors' ceremonies that they have.
He taught them all the wonderful things that the doctors can do, and
many other things.

  [Illustration: OLD-FASHIONED KNIFE.]




THE BEAR MAN.


There was once a young boy, who, when he was playing with his fellows,
used often to imitate the ways of a bear, and to pretend that he was
one. The boys did not know much about bears. They only knew that there
were such animals.

Now, it had happened that before this boy was born his mother had been
left alone at home, for his father had gone on the warpath toward the
enemy, and this was about five or six months before the babe would be
born. As the man was going on the warpath, he came upon a little bear
cub, very small, whose mother had gone away; and he caught it. He did
not want to kill it because it was so young and helpless. It seemed to
him like a little child. It looked up to him, and cried after him,
because it knew no better; and he hated to kill it or to leave it
there. After he had thought about this for a while, he put a string
around its neck and tied some medicine smoking stuff, Indian tobacco,
to it, and said, "_Pi-rau´_--child, you are a _Nahu´rac_; _Ti-ra´-wa_
made you, and takes care of you. He will look after you, but I put
these things about your neck to show that I have good feelings toward
you. I hope that when my child is born, the _Nahu´rac_ will take care
of him, and see that he grows up a good man, and I hope that
_Ti-ra´-wa_ will take care of you and of mine." He looked at the
little bear for quite a long time, and talked to it, and then he went
on his way.

When he returned to the village from his warpath, he told his wife
about the little bear, and how he had looked at it and talked to it.

When his child was born it had all the ways of a bear. So it is among
the Pawnees. A woman, before her child is born, must not look hard at
any animal, for the child may be like it. There was a woman in the
Kit-ke-hahk´-i band, who caught a rabbit, and, because it was gentle
and soft, she took it up in her hands and held it before her face and
petted it, and when her child was born it had a split nose, like a
rabbit. This man is still alive.

This boy, who was like a bear, as he grew up, had still more the ways
of a bear. Often he would go off by himself, and try to pray to the
bear, because he felt like a bear. He used to say, in a joking way, to
the other young men, that he could make himself a bear.

After he had come to be a man, he started out once on the warpath with
a party of about thirty-five others. He was the leader of the party.
They went away up on the Running Water, and before they had come to
any village, they were discovered by Sioux. The enemy pursued them,
and surrounded them, and fought with them. The Pawnees were
overpowered, their enemies were so many, and all were killed.

The country where this took place is rocky, and much cedar grows
there. Many bears lived there. The battle was fought in the morning;
and the Pawnees were all killed in a hollow. Right after the fight, in
the afternoon, two bears came traveling along by this place. When they
came to the spot where the Pawnees had been killed, they found one of
the bodies, and the she bear recognized it as that of the boy who was
like a bear. She called to the he bear, and said, "Here is the man
that was very good to us. He often sacrificed smokes to us, and every
time he ate he used always to take a piece of food and give it to us,
saying, 'Here is something for you to eat. Eat this.' Here is the one
that always imitated us, and sung about us, and talked about us. Can
you do anything for him?" The he bear said, "I fear I cannot do it. I
have not the power, but I will try. I can do anything if the sun is
shining. I seem to have more power when the sun is shining on me."
That day it was cloudy and cold and snowing. Every now and then the
clouds would pass, and the sun come out for a little while, and then
the clouds would cover it up again.

The man was all cut up, pretty nearly hacked in small pieces, for he
was the bravest of all. The two bears gathered up the pieces of the
man, and put them together, and then the he bear lay down and took the
man on his breast, and the she bear lay on top of it to warm the body.
They worked over it with their medicine, and every now and then the he
bear would cry out, and say, "_A-ti´-us_--Father, help me. I wish the
sun was shining." After a while the dead body grew warm, and then
began to breathe a little. It was still all cut up, but it began to
have life. Pretty soon the man began to move, and to come to life, and
then he became conscious and had life.

When he came to himself and opened his eyes he was in the presence of
two bears. The he bear spoke to him, and said, "It is not through me
that you are living. It was the she bear who asked for help for you,
and had you brought back to life. Now, you are not yet whole and well.
You must come away with us, and live with us for a time, until all
your wounds are healed." The bears took him away with them. But the
man was very weak, and every now and then, as they were going along,
he would faint and fall down; but still they would help him up and
support him; and they took him along with them, until they came to a
cave in the rocks among the cedars, which was their home. When he
entered the cave, he found there their young ones that they had left
behind when they started out.

The man was all cut up and gashed. He had also been scalped, and had
no hair on his head. He lived with the bears until he was quite healed
of his wounds, and also had come to understand all their ways. The two
old bears taught him everything that they knew. The he bear said to
him, "None of all the beings and animals that roam over the country
are as great and as wise as the bears. No animal is equal to us. When
we get hungry, we go out and kill something and eat it. I did not
make the wisdom that I have. I am an animal, and I look to one above.
He made me, and he made me to be great. I am made to live here and to
be great, but still there will be an end to my days, just as with all
of us that _Ti-ra´-wa_ has created upon this earth. I am going to make
you a great man; but you must not deceive yourself. You must not think
that I am great, or can do great things of myself. You must always
look up above for the giver of all power. You shall be great in war
and great in wealth.

"Now you are well, and I shall take you back to your home, and after
this I want you to imitate us. This shall be a part of your greatness.
I shall look after you. I shall give to you a part of myself. If I am
killed, you shall be killed. If I grow old, you shall be old.

"I want you to look at one of the trees that _Ti-ra´-wa_ made in this
earth, and place your dependence on it. _Ti-ra´-wa_ made this tree
(pointing to a cedar). It never gets old. It is always green and
young. Take notice of this tree, and always have it with you; and when
you are in the lodge and it thunders and lightens,[6] throw some of it
on the fire and let the smoke rise. Hold that fast."

  [6] A cedar is never struck by lightning.

The he bear took the skin of a bear, and made a cap for him, to hide
his naked skull. His wounds were now all healed, and he was well and
strong. The man's people had nearly forgotten him, it had been so long
ago, and they had supposed that the whole party had been killed.

Soon after this the he bear said, "Now we will take that journey."
They started, and went to the village, and waited near it till it was
night. Then the bear said to him, "Go into the village, and tell your
father that you are here. Then get for me a piece of buffalo meat, and
a blue bead, and some Indian tobacco, and some sweet smelling
clay."[7]

  [7] A green clay, which they roast, and which then turns dark red,
  and has a sweet smell.

The man went into the village, and his father was very much surprised,
and very glad to see him again. He got the presents, and brought them
to the bear, and gave them to him, and the bear talked to him.

When they were about to part, the bear came up to him, and put his
arms about him, and hugged him, and put his mouth against the man's
mouth, and said, "As the fur that I am in has touched you it will make
you great, and this will be a blessing to you." His paws were around
the man's shoulders, and he drew them down his arms, until they came
to his hands, and he held them, and said, "As my hands have touched
your hands, they are made great, not to fear anything. I have rubbed
my hands down over you, so that you shall be as tough as I am. Because
my mouth has touched your mouth you shall be made wise." Then he left
him, and went away.

So this man was the greatest of all warriors, and was brave. He was
like a bear. He originated the bear dance which still exists among the
tribe of Pawnees. He came to be an old man, and at last died of old
age. I suspect the old bear died at the same time.

  [Illustration: A RATTLE.]




THE GHOST WIFE.


One time there were living together a man and his wife. They had a
young child. The woman died. The man was very sad, and mourned for his
wife.

One night he took the child in his arms, and went out from the village
to the place where his wife was buried, and stood over the grave, and
mourned for his wife. The little child was very helpless, and cried
all the time. The man's heart was sick with grief and loneliness. Late
in the night he fell asleep, fainting and worn out with sorrow. After
a while he awoke, and when he looked up, there was a form standing by
him. The form standing there was the one who had died. She spoke to
her husband, and said, "You are very unhappy here. There is a place to
go where we would not be unhappy. Where I have been nothing bad
happens to one. Here, you never know what evil will come to you. You
and the child had better come to me."

The man did not want to die. He said to her, "No; it will be better if
you can come back to us. We love you. If you were with us we would be
unhappy no longer."

For a long time they discussed this, to decide which one should go to
the other. At length the man by his persuasions overcame her, and the
woman agreed to come back. She said to the man, "If I am to come back
you must do exactly as I tell you for four nights. For four days the
curtain must remain let down before my sleeping place; it must not be
raised; no one must look behind it."

The man did as he had been told, and after four days had passed, the
curtain was lifted, and the woman came out from behind it. Then they
all saw her, first her relations, and afterward the whole tribe. Her
husband and her child were very glad, and they lived happily together.

A long time after this, the man took another wife. The first wife was
always pleasant and good-natured, but the new one was bad-tempered,
and after some time she grew jealous of the first woman, and
quarreled with her. At length, one day the last married became angry
with the other, and called her bad names, and finally said to her,
"You ought not to be here. You are nothing but a ghost, anyway."

That night when the man went to bed, he lay down, as was his custom,
by the side of his first wife. During the night he awoke, and found
that his wife had disappeared. She was seen no more. The next night
after this happened, the man and the child both died in sleep. The
wife had called them to her. They had gone to that place where there
is a living.

This convinced everybody that there is a hereafter.




TI-KE-WA-KUSH.

The Man who Called the Buffalo.


This happened in the olden time before we had met the white people.
Then the different bands lived in separate villages. The lodges were
made of dirt. The Kit-ke-hahk´-i band went off on a winter hunt,
roaming over the country, as they used to do, after buffalo. At this
time they did not find the buffalo near. They scouted in all
directions, but could discover no signs of them. It was a hard time of
starvation. The children cried and the women cried; they had nothing
at all to eat.

There was a person who looked at the children crying for something to
eat, and it touched his heart. They were very poor, and he felt sorry
for them. He said to the Head Chief, "Tell the chiefs and other head
men to do what I tell them. My heart is sick on account of the
suffering of the people. It may be that I can help them. Let a new
lodge be set up outside the village for us to meet in. I will see if I
can do anything to relieve the tribe." The Chief said that it was well
to do this, and he gave orders for it.

While they were preparing to build this lodge they would miss this man
in the night. He would disappear like a wind, and go off a long way,
and just as daylight came, he would be there again. Sometimes, while
sitting in his own lodge during the day, he would reach behind him,
and bring out a small piece of buffalo meat, fat and lean, and would
give it to some one, saying, "When you have had enough, save what is
left, and give it to some one else." When he would give this small
piece of meat to any one, the person would think, "This is not enough
to satisfy my hunger;" but after eating until he was full, there was
always enough left to give to some other person.

In those days it was the custom for the Head Chief of the tribe, once
in a while, to mount his horse, and ride about through the village,
talking to the people, and giving them good advice, and telling them
that they ought to do what was right by each other. At this time the
Chief spoke to the people, and explained that this man was going to
try to benefit the tribe. So the people made him many fine presents,
otter skins and eagle feathers, and when they gave him these things
each one said, "I give you this. It is for yourself. Try to help us."
He thanked them for these presents, and when they were all gathered
together he said, "Now you chiefs and head men of the tribe, and you
people, you have done well to give me these things. I shall give them
to that person who gives me that power, and who has taken pity on me.
I shall let you starve yet four days. Then help will come."

During these four days, every day and night he disappeared, but would
come back the same night. He would say to the people that he had been
far off, where it would take a person three or four days to go, but he
was always back the same night. When he got back on the fourth night,
he told the people that the buffalo were near, that the next morning
they would be but a little way off. He went up on the hill near the
camp, and sacrificed some eagle feathers, and some blue beads, and
some Indian tobacco, and then returned to the camp. Then he said to
the people, "When that object comes to that place of sacrifice, do
not interfere with it; do not turn it back. Let it go by. Just watch
and see."

The next morning at daylight, all the people came out of their lodges
to watch this hill, and the place where he had sacrificed. While they
were looking they saw a great buffalo bull come up over the hill to
the place. He stood there for a short time and looked about, and then
he walked on down the hill, and went galloping off past the village.
Then this man spoke to the people, and said, "There. That is what I
meant. That is the leader of the buffalo; where he went the whole herd
will follow."

He sent his servant to the chiefs to tell them to choose four boys,
and let them go to the top of the hill where the bull had come over,
and to look beyond it. The boys were sent, and ran to the top of the
hill, and when they looked over beyond it they stopped, and then
turned, and came back, running. They went to the chiefs' lodge, and
said to the chiefs sitting there, "Beyond that place of sacrifice
there is coming a whole herd of buffalo; many, many, crowding and
pushing each other."

Then, as it used to be in the old times, as soon as the young men had
told the Chief that the buffalo were coming, the Chief rode about the
village, and told every one to get ready to chase them. He said to
them besides, "Do not leave anything on the killing ground. Bring into
the camp not only the meat and hides, but the heads and legs and all
parts. Bring the best portions in first, and take them over to the new
lodge, so that we may have a feast there." For so the man had
directed.

Presently the buffalo came over the hill, and the people were ready,
and they made a surround, and killed all that they could, and brought
them home. Each man brought in his ribs and his young buffalo, and
left them there at that lodge. The other parts they brought into the
village, as he had directed. After they had brought in this meat, they
went to the lodge, and staid there four days and four nights, and had
a great feast, roasting these ribs. The man told them that they would
make four surrounds like this, and to get all the meat that they
could, "But," he said, "in surrounding these buffalo you must see that
all the meat is saved. _Ti-ra´-wa_ does not like the people to waste
the buffalo, and for that reason I advise you to make good use of all
you kill." During the four nights they feasted this man used to
disappear each night.

On the night of the fourth day he said to the people, "To-morrow the
buffalo will come again, and you will make another surround. Be
careful not to kill a yellow calf--a little one--that you will see
with the herd, nor its mother." This was in winter, and yet the calf
was the same color as a young calf born in the spring. They made the
surround, and let the yellow calf and its mother go.

A good many men in the tribe saw that this man was great, and that he
had done great things for the tribe, and they made him many presents,
the best horses that they had. He thanked them, but he did not want to
accept the presents. The tribe believed that he had done this
wonderful thing--had brought them buffalo--and all the people wanted
to do just what he told them to.

In the first two surrounds they killed many buffalo, and made much
dried meat. All their sacks were full, and the dried meat was piled up
out of doors. After the second surround, they feasted as before.

After four days, as they were going out to surround the buffalo the
third time, the wind changed, and before the people got near them, the
buffalo smelt them, and stampeded. While they were galloping away, the
man ran up on to the top of the hill, to the place of sacrifice,
carrying a pole, on which was tied the skin of a kit fox; and when he
saw the buffalo running, and that the people could not catch them, he
waved his pole, and called out _Ska-a-a-a!_ and the buffalo turned
right about, and charged back right through the people, and they
killed many of them. He wished to show the people that he had the
power over the buffalo.

After the third surround they had a great deal of meat, and he called
the chiefs together and said, "Now, my chiefs, are you satisfied?"
They said, "Yes, we are satisfied, and we are thankful to you for
taking pity on us and helping us. It is through your power that the
tribe has been saved from starving to death." He said, "You are to
make one more surround, and that will be the end. I want you to get
all you can. Kill as many as possible, for this will be the last of
the buffalo this winter. Those presents that you have made to me, and
that I did not wish to take, I give them back to you." Some of the
people would not take back the presents, but insisted that he should
keep them, and at last he said he would do so.

The fourth surround was made, and the people killed many buffalo, and
saved the meat. The night after this last surround, he disappeared and
drove the buffalo back. The next morning he told the people to look
about, and tell him if they saw anything. They did so, but they could
not see any buffalo.

The next day they moved camp, and went east toward their home. They
had so much dried meat that they could not take it all at once, but
had to come back and make two trips for it. When they moved below,
going east, they had no fresh meat, only dried meat; but sometimes
when this man would come in from his journeys, he would bring a piece
of meat--a little piece--and he would divide it up among the people,
and they would put it into the kettles and boil it, and everybody
would eat, but they could not eat it all up. There would always be
some left over. This man was so wonderful that he could change even
the buffalo chips that you see on the prairie into meat. He would
cover them up with his robe, and when he would take it off again, you
would see there pounded buffalo meat and tallow (pemmican),
_tup-o-har´-ash_.

The man was not married; he was a young man, and by this time the
people thought that he was one of the greatest men in the tribe, and
they wanted him to marry. They went to one of the chiefs and told him
that they wanted him to be this man's father-in-law, for they wanted
him to raise children, thinking that they might do something to
benefit the tribe. They did not want that race to die out. The old
people say that it would have been good if he had had children, but he
had none. If he had, perhaps they would have had the same power as
their father.

That person called the buffalo twice, and twice saved the tribe from a
famine. The second time the suffering was great, and they held a
council to ask him to help the tribe. They filled up the pipe and held
it out to him, asking him to take pity on the tribe. He took the pipe,
and lighted it, and smoked. He did it in the same way as the first
time, and they made four surrounds, and got much meat.

When this man died, all the people mourned for him a long time. The
Chief would ride around the village and call out, "Now I am poor in
mind on account of the death of this man, because he took pity on us
and saved the tribe. Now he is gone and there is no one left like
him."

This is a true and sacred story that belongs to the Kit-ke-hahk´-i
band. It happened once long ago, and has been handed down from father
to son in this band. The Skidi had a man who once called the buffalo,
causing them to return when stampeded, as was done in this story.

       *       *       *       *       *

Note.--Big Knife, a Skidi, who died only recently, said that the man
was alive in his time. _Kuru´ks-u le-shar_ (Bear Chief), a Skidi, says
that he knew the man. His name was Carrying Mother.

  [Illustration: BABY ON BOARD.]




PA-HU-KA´-TAWA.


About the end of the winter, before the grass began to grow in the
spring, a company of three brothers and two other men went out from
the village to trap beaver. When they had been gone about ten days,
and had got up above the Forks of the Loup River, they camped on the
South Fork, and in the morning sent one man ahead to see if he could
find any beaver sign, and could look out a good trapping ground.

When he had gone a little distance from the camp, he saw some Sioux,
and at the same moment they saw him. He did not run back to the camp;
he was too anxious to save himself; but ran across to a little creek,
and hid in the brush, not trying to let his brothers know that the
enemy were near. The Sioux followed him and found him, and chased him
about, and shot at him all day, until near sundown, when they killed
him.

The four other men had stopped in camp, but were not so far off but
that they could hear the shouts and yells, and they ran off from the
camp, and hid themselves and waited. When the other man did not come
back, they knew that he had been killed.

The next morning, the four men talked together. One said, "We had
better go up and see if he is killed." Another said, "Yes, let us go
there. It may be that we can bury him." So they went up where he had
been, going very carefully, and looking over all the hills as they
went, so as to see any enemies if they were about. They found him. He
was dead, shot full of arrows, scalped, his whole head skinned, his
arms and legs unjointed, his head cut off; he was all cut to pieces.
So they thought that there was not enough of him left to bury, and
besides, those killed in battle are often left unburied. When they
found how it was, they started back to the village, and when they came
close to it, one of the men called out, "_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ is killed!"
He called that out so that the people might know, and might begin to
mourn.

When they came into the village, the relations of this man felt very
badly because he was killed. It was coming on toward the time when
they begin to clear up their patches, to plant the corn, and to hoe,
and his father and mother mourned, and said, "Now we have no one to
help us hoe. We are old, and he helped us; but now he is gone." So
they mourned for him.

They did not visit the place where he had been killed for some time.
It was now spring, and they were planting, and hoeing the corn, and
when they got through their work, the whole tribe started out on the
summer hunt to get buffalo, as they used to do. They started up the
Loup, and when they had traveled along a number of days, they came
near the place where the man had been killed. When they got there, the
men who had been with him said, "This is the place where
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ was killed," and his father and mother and all his
relations went over to the place where he had lain, to gather his
bones together and then to bury them. When they got to the place, they
could find no bones at all, but the arrows were there, sticking
straight up in the ground; all the arrows that had been shot into the
body. They wondered that they had not fallen down, for they thought
that the wolves might have dragged the body, but when they looked
everywhere about for the bones, they could find no sign of them
anywhere. It seemed strange to them that the arrows should be there
standing up in the ground, and they wondered what had become of the
bones. At length they gave up looking for them, and went back to the
camp. When they could not find the bones, they went on and hunted
buffalo, and killed plenty, and made dried meat. After two months they
started back to the village, going down the Platte River. His mother
had cried so much for _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_, that she had become blind.

One pleasant afternoon they were camped on the Platte. The evening was
warm and soft and still. As the sun went down toward the earth, long
shining rays seemed to come down from it to the ground. All through
the air was a light smoke, and in the west the sky was red. Just as
the sun was setting, the people all heard a voice calling from the
other side of the river. They listened; and the voice said,
"_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ is coming back to you." Then all the Indians jumped
up, and ran across the river to meet him, for they thought perhaps he
was coming back. When they had got to the other side, they looked
about, but could see no one. Then they heard a voice from behind
them, on the other side of the camp, which said, "He is coming from
here." They all turned round and ran back to the other side of the
camp; but no one was there; and in a little while they heard the voice
again, on the other side of the river, saying, "He is coming." Then
they knew it was only a voice and not a person. They stopped running
about, and that night they talked about the voice. The next day they
went on down the river, and at length got back to the main village.
There they stayed six months, and by this time their dried meat was
all eaten, and it was toward spring.

The mother of _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ had her bed near the door of the lodge
on the left hand side, the last bed next to the door. One night, at
midnight, he came into the lodge, and touched his mother and said,
"Mother! mother!" His mother used to dream of him almost every night,
and she thought she was dreaming now. She said, "Oh, my son, do not do
this. You are deceiving me again." He stopped; but presently he
touched her again, and pushed her shoulder, and she awoke.

He said to her, "Mother, I am here," and she reached out and felt him.

She said, "Are you really my son?"

He answered, "Yes, I am your son."

Then she put her arms around him, and hugged him, and said to him,
"Oh, my son, my son, you have come back to me." She cried, she was so
glad.

Then they talked together. He gave her a piece of meat--a piece of
fresh buffalo meat--though they had had no fresh meat in the village
for six months. He said to his mother, "I am really alive, though I
was killed. The _Nahu´rac_ (animals) took pity on me, and have made me
alive again. And now I am going off; but do not cry about me any
more." Then he went away.

The next morning, when his mother awoke, she found by her side the
piece of fresh meat, and she began to cook it on the coals. The people
wondered where she got the fresh meat, and asked her about it, but she
would not tell them where she got it, for her son had told her to say
nothing. They asked her again where she got it, and she told them she
found it in her bed.

After a long time her son came again in the night, and went into the
lodge, and spoke to his mother, saying, "Mother, I am here again." She
awoke, and rejoiced that he had come back. He said to her, "My
mother, I know that you are poor. You are blind on account of me,
because you have cried so much. Now, my mother, there is standing by
the side of your daughter's bed, water in a wooden bowl. After I have
left you to-night, go over there, and put your face down deep into the
water, and open your eyes in the water, and then you will see." Before
he left her he gave her some _ka´wis_.[8]

  [8] Chopped buffalo meat tied up in the small intestine.

After he had gone, she did as he had told her. She got up, and feeling
her way along with her hands, crept into the place where her daughter
slept. There she felt the wooden bowl with water in it, and she put
her face deep down into the water, and opened her eyes in it, and when
she took her face out of the water, and opened her eyes again, she
could see. Then she was glad. Everybody wondered how the mother's eyes
had been cured, but she told no one, except only her oldest son.

After a long time _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ came down again to see his mother.
He said to her, "Mother, I am going up to see my oldest brother." He
went to see his brother in the night. His brother was expecting him,
for his mother had warned him. _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said, "Now, my
brother, I think you have heard that I come all the time to see our
mother. I wish that you would put up your lodge outside the camp, so
that I can come and see you often. I want to talk to you, and tell you
my thoughts and all my troubles. I am a spirit." His brother answered
him that he would do as he had asked, and the first night after the
lodge had been set up outside the camp, _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ came down,
and said to his brother, "To-morrow night I want you to select the two
bravest men in the tribe, and let them go about through the camp, and
call all the chiefs and all the bravest warriors in the tribe, and let
them gather at your home. Do not build any fire in the lodge. Let it
all be dark, for I am coming down in the night to see them."

When the next night came, the chiefs and the braves gathered at the
lodge just about dark. They made no fire, but sat there waiting for
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ to come down. After a while he came down to the
lodge, and came in where they were sitting. When they were all silent,
he came in, and every step he made it seemed that sparks of fire were
flying out from him. He went and stood before his brother, and said to
him, "I am in everything; in the grass, the water, the trees. I am a
part of all these things. I know every thought of yours, and if you
only whispered, I would hear it. I know everything, and about
everything, even about the ocean which is so far off, and where the
water is salt.

"There are two dances that I like, in which there are songs sung about
me." Then he sang these songs and told them how to dance these
dances.[9] He said, "Dance these dances and sing about me, calling me
by name."

  [9] These dances afterward were practiced in two of the secret
  societies.

Then he said, "Brother, I want you to know that there is a tribe of
your enemies getting ready to go on the warpath against you. I will
let you know when they start, and all they do. Every move they make I
will tell you of. They are coming from far up the Missouri River."

Two or three nights later _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ appeared to his brother,
and said, "They are coming. To-morrow night they will be here spying
round the camp. Be ready for them. You must ask me to take pity on
you, telling me what you want to do, and I will make you strong, so
that you can succeed. If you want to strike two or three, ask me. If
you want to kill two or three, tell me. You must call me grandfather."

The next night they danced and asked him to take pity on them. One
young man prayed, saying, "Let me strike nine, and at the tenth let me
be wounded, but let me not die." A second young man prayed, saying, "I
want to strike five and capture the biggest man in the party." Another
man asked him, "Let me strike two, and then let me be killed." To each
one who asked a favor of him, he said, "Let it be so." They did not
see him, for there was no fire in the lodge. It was dark.

He said to them, "Be ready. To-morrow morning is the time when the
enemy will attack you. I will send a fog from the north as a warning.
They will come down toward the village, and you must go out on the
plain in front of the village, and have a skirmish with them. Then
draw off, and look toward the point of bluff which runs down into the
plain on the east end of the battle field. Watch that point and you
will see me. I will appear to you there. And this shall be a sign to
you that it is I whom you see. When I come up over that point and turn
around, facing to the north, the wind will change and will come from
the south. And when the wind blows from the south, you make a charge
on them."

So it was. The next morning the enemy made an attack on them, and
came down toward the village. It was the very day he had said. The
warriors went out on the plain to meet them. They were wondering in
what shape _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ would appear to them, how he would look.
On that morning, before the Sioux appeared, a white fog came down from
the north. Then the Sioux made the attack, and the people began to
look for _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_. And while they were looking toward the
bluff, a great white wolf came up over the point, and stood looking
first one way and then another, and then it turned around and faced
the north. And immediately the wind changed and blew from the south.
When the wolf appeared, some of the braves doubted whether it was
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_, but when it turned round, and the wind changed, then
they knew that it was he.

Then they made the charge, and each one of those who had asked a favor
received it. In every case what _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ had promised came
true. The man who had prayed that he might strike nine and at the
tenth be wounded, struck nine and was wounded at the tenth, but he did
not die; the one who asked to strike five, and to capture the biggest
man in the party, did so. He caught the prisoner, and overcame him,
and put a rope around his neck, and led him into the village. And when
he got him to the village the women beat the captive with sticks and
clubs, and threw dirt at him, and had lots of fun with him. The young
man who had asked it, killed two, and then was himself killed. All
that _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ had promised came to pass.

The people killed many of the Sioux, and drove them far, chasing and
killing them all day long. Then they came back to the village,
bringing with them the scalps and the weapons that they had taken, the
bows and the spears, the shields and the war bonnets. They danced in
the village, and sang and rejoiced. Every one was glad because the
people had won a great victory.

The next night after the day of the battle, _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ came down
to his brother's lodge, and told him that he wanted to speak to him.
His brother awoke all his wives, and sent them out of the lodge,
telling them not to come back until he called them. Then
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said to his brother, "Now, my brother, you people
have seen whether what I say to you is true or not. You have seen what
has happened, you can judge. Now, brother, I want you to feel of me
all over; nobody else but you to feel of me, my brother." His brother
passed his hands all over his breast and arms and body and legs.
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said, "Now put your hands on top of my head, and feel
there." He did so, and felt something soft. _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said, "Do
you know what that is? That is the down feathers."

Then he told the story of his being killed. He said, "That time after
I got killed, all kinds of _Nahu´rac_ took pity on me. The flies and
bugs, the fishes and birds, the deer and the wolves, all the animals
took pity on me, and helped me to come to life again. They looked all
over for my flesh and my bones, and brought them all together. One
part of me, the top part of my skull, they could not find. The bugs
crept through the ground looking for it, the fishes swam through the
water and sought it, the flies buzzed about over the sand, and the
deer and wolves hunted for it on the prairie, but they could not find
this piece anywhere. Nor could they find my brains. Perhaps, when I
was killed, the crows eat them out. When they had gathered the pieces
all together, they laid each piece in its own place, so that they had
the form of a man, and in place of the top of the skull and the brains
they put the down feathers. After they had put all the pieces
together, they stood around me, and prayed, and passed their paws over
me, and danced and sang, and at last I breathed a little. Then they
prayed again, and passed their paws over me, and at length I breathed
regularly. Then I was not dead any more; I was alive again. Not as a
person was I alive, but as a spirit.

"I am in every thing; in the wind, in the rain, in the grass. I go
over the whole world. I am the wind, and I go everywhere all over the
world. There is no one above me but _Ti-ra´-wa_. He is the only one I
am under. He is the ruler of all. Whenever any human being on this
earth, man, woman or child, says anything about me, I hear it surely.
You must tell all this to every one, and say to them that if they are
sick or unfortunate, let them pray to me, and I will heal or help
them.

"Now you know that I am living, but I am a spirit; and whenever you
people have a fight with the Sioux, if you pray to me, and call me by
name, and ask to be brave, and to be helped, I will hear you. If you
wish to be brave, or if you wish not to be hurt in battle, even though
the enemy be right upon you, and just striking or shooting at you, I
will protect you. I shall live forever, as long as this world exists.
So long as I come to you, I want you people to conquer the Sioux all
you can, on account of what they did to me when they killed me and cut
me in pieces. So long as the Sioux come down to attack you, I want you
to conquer them every time.

"Now, brother, when I come down to see you, you must not get tired of
me. I want to come down often to see you, and talk to you, to tell you
what is going to happen, and to warn you whenever the Sioux are coming
down to attack the Skidi. I go about everywhere, to the camps of the
different bands of Sioux, and I know what the chiefs are saying in
council; when they are talking of sending out war parties against you.
If I come down to you often, do not get tired of seeing me."

He knew himself that his brother would some time refuse to listen to
him, but his brother did not know it, and he said, "I will never get
tired of you."

Some time after this, the Sioux came down again to attack the Skidi
village. Two days before they came, _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ came down to his
brother and warned him, saying, "A big war party of Sioux will be here
day after to-morrow to fight with you. But I am going to attend to
them. On the morning of the second day from this, tell all the people
to be ready, and to have their horses tied up close to the lodges,
where they can get at them. Then, if you look up in the sky, you will
see thick black clouds, as if you were going to have a great rain.
When you begin fighting, do not be afraid of the enemy. Do not be
afraid of them; go right up to them; they will not be able to shoot,
their bowstrings will be wet, and the sinews will stretch and slip off
the ends of the bows. They will not be able to hurt you."

On the morning that he had said, the Sioux came down, and the people
went out to meet them. The sky above was black with clouds. When they
began fighting, a heavy rain commenced to fall, but it did not rain
everywhere, but only just where the Sioux were. The bowstrings of the
Sioux got wet, so that they could not use them, for the sinews
stretched, so that when they bent their bows the strings slipped off
the ends of the bows, and there was no force to their arrows. The
Skidi overcame the Sioux and drove them, and the Sioux ran far. The
rain followed the Sioux, and rained over them, but nowhere else, and
the Sioux fled, and the Skidi won a great victory.

Soon after this, _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ came down and visited his brother,
and said to him, "My brother, whenever you have a feast or a council
of old men, you must smoke to me and say, 'Father, we want you to help
us.' Then I will hear you. At the same time you must pray to
_Ti-ra´-wa_. There is one above us who is the ruler of all. I do not
wish to be talked about commonly or by common men, but that whenever
you have a feast you should call in the young men and tell them about
me and let them hear." He did not want his name used irreverently, nor
wish that the story of what he had suffered and done should be told
commonly or for mere amusement. It is sacred and should be told only
at solemn times.

Some time after this talk with his brother, he came down again to see
him. Another man was living in his brother's lodge, and on this night
his brother was not there, he was sleeping somewhere else.
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ asked this man where his brother was. He answered,
"He is not here to-night, he is sleeping somewhere else."
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said, "Go over and tell him that I am here, and that
I want to see him." The man went and gave the message to the brother,
who said, "I do not want to go. Tell him I am asleep." The man went
back and told _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ that his brother could not come. He
said, "He is asleep." _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ sent him back again, to get the
brother. The man went, and said to the brother, "He wants to see you
very much." The brother said, "Tell him I can't come; I want to sleep
to-night." The man returned and said, "He does not want to come, he is
sleeping." He was sent back for the brother the third time, to tell
the brother he must come, he was wanted. He sent word back that he
could not, he was too sleepy. Then _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ said, "Very well.
Go back and tell him to sleep now, to sleep all he wants. I told him
before that he would get tired of me at last. Let him sleep all he
wants, I will come to him no more. I can go to some other tribe. This
is the last time I will come. Tell him to sleep. I will trouble him no
more. I am going off, but tell the people not to forget me; to talk of
me sometimes, and to pray to me, and I will help them and care for the
tribe."

So _Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ went away to the Rees, and the people knew him no
more; after that he never came down to see them. When the people
learned this, they felt very badly, and were angry at his brother who
would not see him. There was living not long ago, among the Rees, an
old woman, who, when she was a girl, had seen and talked to
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_.

       *       *       *       *       *

Note.--This is a Skidi story. The Rees have a story of what
_Pa-hu-ka´-tawa_ did after he had come to them. The Lower Village
tribes have a story of a hero of this same name, which is quite
different from that of the Skidi.

  [Illustration: LONE CHIEF--SKIDI.]




THE BOY WHO WAS SACRIFICED.


There was a time, far back, when some people thought that it was good
to sacrifice to _Ti-ra´-wa_ whatever they had that was most precious
to them. The sacrifice of the animal, the burnt offering, has always
been made by all the Pawnees; that is one of the things handed down
from the ruler. It is very old. The Skidi have always performed the
sacrifice of the captive. Each one of these is sacred and solemn, but
it is not like giving up something that belongs to you, and that you
love. It is a sacrifice, but it does not cost much.

Many years ago, in the Skidi village on the Loup, there lived a man,
who believed that if he sacrificed his son to _Ti-ra´-wa_, it would be
a blessing to him. He thought that if he did this thing, perhaps
_Ti-ra´-wa_ would speak to him face to face, and that he could talk to
him just as two people would talk to one another, and that in this
way he would learn many things that other people did not understand.
His child was a nice boy about ten years old, strong, growing up well,
and the man loved him. It made him feel badly to think of killing him.
He meditated long about this, but the more he thought about it, the
more he believed that this sacrifice would please _Ti-ra´-wa_. There
were many things that he wanted to understand, and to do; and he
thought if he gave up his son, these good things would come to him. So
he resolved to make the sacrifice.

One morning he started out from the village, and took the boy with
him. They went over to the Platte. When they got to the river, as they
were walking along, the man took his knife from its sheath, and caught
the boy by the shoulder, and stabbed him quickly, and cut him open.
When the boy was dead, he threw the body into the river, and then went
back to the village. When he got there, he went into his lodge and sat
down. After a time he said to his wife, "Where is the boy?" The woman
said, "He went out with you, when you went over to see the horses."
The man answered, "No; I went out to where the horses are feeding, and
looked at them, but he did not go with me."

The man went out, and looked for the boy all through the village, but
he could not find him. At night when the boy did not come home, they
began to get frightened, and for two days they hunted for the boy, and
at last they got the old crier to call out for him from the top of the
lodge, and ask if any one had seen him, but none of the people knew
what had become of the boy. Now the mother was mourning, and the
father pretended to feel very badly. They could not find the boy; and
soon after this the tribe started on the summer hunt, and the father
and mother went with them. The village made a good hunt, killing
plenty of buffalo, and made much dried meat.

After the boy had been thrown into the river, he floated down with the
current, sometimes turning over and over in the swift water, and
sometimes grounding for a little while on a sand bar, and then being
floated off again, and being carried further down. At length he came
near to the place where the whirlpool is, under the bluff at
_Pa-hük´_, where is the lodge of the _Nahu´rac_. There were two
buzzards sitting on the bluff, just above this place, and as they sat
there, one of them stretched out his neck and looked up the river, and
after he had looked, he said to the other, "I see a body." Then both
the buzzards flew down to where the boy was floating in the water, and
got down under him, and raised him on their backs, and lifted him up
out of the water, and flew up to the bluff, carrying the boy on their
backs, and placed him on the ground on top of the bluff over the big
cave, which is the home of the _Nahu´rac_. In this lodge were all
kinds of animals, and all kinds of birds. There were bears, and
mountain lions, and buffalo, and elk, and beaver, and otter, and deer;
all kinds of animals, great and small, and all kinds of birds.

There is a little bird, smaller than a pigeon. Its back is blue, and
its breast white, and its head is spotted. It flies swiftly over the
water, and when it sees a fish, it dives down into the water to catch
it. This bird is a servant or a messenger for the _Nahu´rac_. Such a
bird came flying by just as the buzzards put the body on the ground,
and he stopped and looked at it. When he saw how it was--for he knew
all that had happened--he flew down into the lodge and told the
_Nahu´rac_ about the boy. The bird said, "There is a boy up here on
the hill. He is dead, and he is poor, and I want to have him brought
to life again." Then he told the _Nahu´rac_ all the things that had
happened. When the messenger bird had done speaking, the _Nahu´rac_
earnestly counselled together for a long time to decide what should be
done, and each one made a speech, giving his opinion about the matter,
but they could not make up their minds what ought to be done.

The little bird was coaxing the _Nahu´rac_, and saying, "Come, now, we
want to save his life." But the _Nahu´rac_ could not decide. At last
the chief of the _Nahu´rac_ said, "No, messenger, we cannot decide
this here. You will have to go to the other council lodges, and see
what they say about it." The bird said, "I am going," and flew swiftly
out of the lodge and up the river, till he came to the _Nahu´rac_
lodge near the Lone Tree. When he got there, he told them all about
the boy, and said that the council at _Pa-hük´_ could not decide what
should be done. The _Nahu´rac_ here talked, and at last they said, "We
cannot decide. The council at _Pa-hük´_ must decide." Then the bird
went to the lodge on the Loup, and the _Nahu´rac_ there said that they
could not decide Then he went to _Kitz-a-witz-ük_, and to _Pa-hûr´_;
and at each place the _Nahu´rac_ considered and talked about it, and
then said, "We cannot decide what shall be done. The council at
_Pa-hük´_ must decide for themselves."

At last, after he had visited all the council lodges of the
_Nahu´rac_, the bird flew swiftly back to the lodge at _Pa-hük´_, and
told them there what the animals at the other lodges had said. In the
council of the _Nahu´rac_ at _Pa-hük´_, there were four chiefs, who
sat there as judges to determine such matters as this, after they had
all been talked over, and to decide what should be done. When the
messenger bird came back, and told the _Nahu´rac_ what the other
councils had said, these judges considered for a time, and then spoke
together, and at length the chief of the judges said to the bird,
"Now, messenger, we have concluded that we will not decide this
question ourselves. You decide it, and say what shall be done."

The messenger was not long in deciding. He did not hesitate. He said,
"I want this boy brought back to life." Then all the _Nahu´rac_ stood
up, and went to where the boy lay, and stood around him and prayed,
and at last the boy breathed once, and then after a little while he
breathed again, and at last he came to life and sat up. He looked
about and saw all these animals standing around him, and he wondered.
He said to himself, "Why, my father stabbed me, and killed me, and now
here I am among this great crowd of animals. What does this mean?" He
was surprised.

The _Nahu´rac_ all went back into the lodge, and took the boy with
them. When all were seated in the lodge, the four judges talked to
each other, and the chief one stood up, and said, "Now, my people, we
have brought this boy back to life, but he is poor, and we must do
something for him. Let us teach him all we know, and make him one of
us." Then the _Nahu´rac_ all made a noise. They were glad. Then they
began to sing and they danced. They taught the boy all their secrets,
and all their ways. They taught him how to cut a man open and cure him
again, and how to shoot an arrow through a man and then cure him, and
how to cut a man's tongue out and then to put it back, and how to make
well a broken leg, and many other things. After they had done all
these things, they said to the boy, "Now we have brought you back to
life, and have taught you all these things, so that you are one of us.
Now you must stop with us one season. Your people have gone off on the
summer hunt. You must stay with us until the autumn. Then you can go
back to your people." So the boy stayed with the _Nahu´rac_ in their
lodge.

At length the Skidi had returned from the hunt with plenty of dried
meat. Soon after this, the _Nahu´rac_ said one day to the boy, "Your
people have got back from the hunt. Now you can go back to the
village. Go back and get a lot of nice dried meat, and bring it back
to us here, and we will have a feast."

The boy went home to the village. He got there in the night, and went
to his father's lodge, and went in. There was a little fire burning in
the lodge. It was nearly out, and gave only a little light, but he
knew the place where his mother slept. He went up to her, and put out
his hand and touched her, and pushed her a little. She awoke, and sat
up and looked at him, and he said, "I've come back." When she saw him,
and heard him speak, she was very much surprised, and her heart was
glad to see her boy again. She called to his father, and he woke up.
When he saw the boy he was afraid, for he thought it was a ghost. The
boy told them nothing of what had happened, or where he had been. He
just said, "I have come back again."

In the morning all the people were surprised to hear that he had come
back, and to see him, and they stood around looking at him, and asking
him questions, but he said nothing. The next day the people still
questioned him, and at last the boy said, "I have been all summer with
friends, with people who have been good to me. I should like to take
them a present of some nice dried meat, so that we can have a feast."
The people said that this was good. They picked out four strong
horses, and loaded them with dried meat, the nicest pieces. The boy's
father gave some of it, and all the other people brought pieces and
put them on the horses, until they had big loads. They sent two young
men with the boy, to help him load and drive the horses, and they
started to go to the _Nahu´rac_ lodge at _Pa-hük´_.

When they had come pretty near the place, the boy sent the young men
back to the village, and he went on alone, driving the pack-horses
before him. When he reached the home of the _Nahu´rac_, he unloaded
the horses, and turned them loose, and then went into the lodge. When
he went in, and when the _Nahu´rac_ saw him, they all made a hissing
noise. They were glad to see him. The boy brought into the lodge all
the dried meat, and they had a great feast. After the feast they had a
doctors' dance, and the boy was made a doctor, and again was taught
all that the _Nahu´rac_ knew. After that he could do many wonderful
things. He could sometimes go to a man that had been dead for a day,
and then bring him back to life.

No one ever knew what the father had done, for the boy never told any
one. He knew that he could never have learned all these wonderful
things unless his father had sacrificed him.

  [Illustration: FLESHERS.]




THE SNAKE BROTHER.


One time, long ago, a big party of Pawnees went on the warpath down to
the south. They could find no enemies anywhere, and they went a long
way south. In this party were two brothers, poor boys, and one day as
they were traveling along, apart from the others, in a piece of woods
where it was very thick, they got lost. When they found that they were
lost, they tried to go back to the camp, but they could not find the
others, and at last gave up looking for them and started to go back
north to their home. They had no food with them, and were looking
about for something to kill, so that they might eat. As they were
going along, they came upon a dead buffalo that had been killed some
time, and there was nothing of it left but the bones, so they took
some of the marrow bones, and carried them along with them, until they
made a camp.

Not far beyond here they stopped to rest. There was a tree growing
near where they stopped, and as they looked up into it, they saw a
squirrel run up the tree. One of the brothers caught up his bow and
arrows, and the other said, "Oh, kill him, kill him, quick." The boy
shot and killed it, and they skinned it, and roasted it over the fire.
While they were cooking it the elder brother said, "I wonder if it is
good to eat the marrow and the squirrel together." The younger said,
"No, it is not good to do so. This is not real meat."[10] The elder
thought the two kinds of food would be good together, and they
disputed about this for some time. The elder brother kept coaxing the
younger to eat the squirrel and the marrow together, but the younger
said, "Oh, brother, I do not like to do this. To me it does not seem
good. But if you wish to do it, why don't you?" The elder said, "I
think I will do so;" and he did so, taking a bite of squirrel, and
then a bite of marrow. He said, "It is nice, you had better take
some." But the younger brother would not. He ate only the marrow.
After they had eaten they did not go on further, but slept there.

  [10] Like buffalo meat, or elk or deer.

About the middle of the night, the elder brother felt a noise in his
feet, and he sat up and felt of his legs and feet, and he found that
his feet were stuck together, and were beginning to get round, like a
snake, and had a rattle on the end of them, and that his legs were
round and like the tail of a great big rattlesnake. He reached over,
and put his hands on his brother, and shook him, and said to him, "Get
up. There is something the matter with me." The younger brother woke
up, and felt of his brother, and found how it was; as if he was
changing into a snake, beginning at his feet. When he saw this he felt
very badly. Then the older brother began to talk to the younger, and
to give him good advice, for he felt very sad.

He said, "Now I am going to die, and leave my young brother here alone
on this prairie. He is so young, he will not be able to find his way
home, and he must die, too. Surely this has happened because I ate the
marrow and the squirrel together." While he was talking, the change
had moved up to his waist.

After a little while he got more hopeful, and he said, "Now, brother,
I know that you will get home safely. I will protect you. I know that
I am going to be a snake, and I shall stay right here. You see that
hole," and he pointed to a hole in the bank. "When I have changed
into a snake, take me in your arms, and carry me over to that hole. I
am going to stay there forever. That will be my home, for that is the
house of the snakes. When you go back home, you must tell our father
and mother how it was, and whenever you want to go on the warpath,
take a big party and come down this way, and come right here, to this
very place, and you will see me, for I shall be here. Now, brother,
when you go back home, some time after you have reached home, I want
you to come back all alone; come right here. You know what I told you;
do not be afraid of me. I believe this was to happen to me, and I
could not help it. After you have once come all alone, then the second
time you may bring some others with you, but the first time come
alone." So he talked to his brother, and as he spoke the change kept
going on. While it was moving up his body, until it got to his head,
he was still like a man in his mind, but all his body was like a great
big snake. Then he spoke to his brother, and said, "Now, brother,
cover up my head with the robe, and after a little while take it off
again." The younger brother, did as he was told, and when, after a
while, he took the robe off, there he saw an immense snake's head as
broad as his two hands. The elder brother had completely changed into
a snake.

The young man took the snake in his arms, and carried him over to the
hole, and put him on the ground by it. He felt very sad to go away and
leave his brother here. Before he started, he spoke good words to the
snake, and said, "Now, brother, I am going home, and I ask you to take
pity on me, and to protect me. I do not know the country I am going
through, and you must take care of me. Do not forget the promises you
have made me." After he had spoken he did not wait to see the snake go
into the hole, but started on his journey, and went off toward his
home.

When he reached the village, he told all these things to his father
and his mother. He said to all his relations, "Do not mourn for him.
He is alive and he is well. The only trouble is, that he is in the
shape of a snake." After he had been home ten days, he told his mother
to make for him five pairs of moccasins, that he was going on the
warpath for himself. His mother did so, and he stuffed them full of
parched corn, and took a little sack of pounded buffalo meat on his
back, and started back to see his brother.

It took him seven days fast traveling to get to where he left the
snake. When he had come near the place, he saw there the hole where he
had left his brother. He went up close to the hole and began to speak.
He said, "Brother, I am here. I have come on the warpath, and I am
here to see you. You told me to come, and to come alone. I have done
what you bade me, and am here. Now, brother, remember to keep your
promises. I want to see you this afternoon."

He stood there a little while, and then there began in the hole a
rattling and a rustling and scraping noise, and presently dust began
to roll out, and then out of the hole came this great big snake, which
was his brother. First came out this great snake, and after him many
other large ones came out, and crept all about, but the great snake,
his brother, lay just outside the hole. The boy went up to the big
snake and took it in his arms, and hugged it, and spoke to it, and the
snake put out its tongue, as if it were kissing him. Then the boy put
it down on the ground, and all the other snakes came back, and went in
the hole, and after them all, last, the big snake went in the hole.

Then the boy left this place, and went on a little further, and about
sunset he came to a little creek, and here he lay down and slept. In
the night he dreamed of his brother, who spoke to him and said, "Now,
brother, I am glad that you have come down to see me, as I told you
to. And now I say to you, be brave. Have courage. To-morrow morning
when you awake, dress yourself up as if you were going to fight. Paint
your face, put feathers in your head, make yourself ready to fight."

The next morning the boy woke up, and as the snake had told him in the
dream, so he did. He painted his face and tied feathers in his head,
and dressed himself up for the fight. Then he started on. Pretty soon
he came to a little hill, and as he looked over it, he saw people
coming toward him; people and many horses. He thought they were Sioux,
and when he saw them, he went back a little, to find a place where he
could hide. He went back to the little creek where he had slept, and
there he sat down in the brush. When he had hidden himself in the
brush, he waited; and the people came straight toward where he had
hidden himself, and camped just below where he was. After a little
while he raised himself up and looked at them, and saw only two
persons, and presently he saw that one of them was a woman. He
watched for a long time, looking about to see if there were any more,
but he could see only these two. Then he considered what he should do.
While he was thinking, it came to him what the snake brother had said
to him in the night, and then he knew what to do.

He crept slowly along through the brush toward their camp, and when he
got close to them, about twenty yards distant, he raised up his head
and looked. He saw the woman cooking, and there were hanging on a
little tree the man's bow and arrows and shield and spear, but the man
he could not see. He was lying down asleep somewhere near by. The boy
waited and watched. He was excited, and his heart was pounding against
his ribs. After a little while, the woman left the fire and walked
away toward the horses. Perhaps her husband had said to her, "The
horses are going off, you had better go and turn them back." When she
went toward the horses, the boy was going to run up to the man and
kill him, but before doing so he changed his mind; for he thought, "If
I kill him, perhaps the woman will get on a horse, and ride away,
driving the other horses with her." So he waited until the woman had
come back. When she had returned to the fire, he ran up toward her,
and she heard him coming, and ran to wake her husband; but just as she
got to him, the boy was by her side. He shot two arrows into the man
and killed him and counted _coup_ on him, and captured the woman. He
took the whole scalp of his enemy's head.

Then he took the woman and went down to where the horses were, and
they got on two of them, and rode back to where his brother, the
snake, lived, driving the horses before them. Just before they got to
the hole, the boy took his lariat and caught a nice spotted horse and
a mule, and tied them up to the tree, and called up the woman, and
tied her up against the tree as tight as he could tie her. When he had
done this, he went up to the hole and began to talk. He said, "Oh, my
brother, I see now that what you have promised me comes true. I did
what you told me. Now here are these two animals and the woman; I give
them to you for being good to me. They are yours. I am glad for what
you have done for me this day." When he had finished saying this he
spoke again, saying, "Now, brother, I want to see you once more. I am
going off, and I want to see you before I go." After a little while he
heard again the rattling sound in the hole, and saw the dust coming
out of it, and then his brother came out of the hole, and then
afterward the smaller snakes; and these all went down to the tree and
climbed up into it. The tree was thick with them. Then the boy did as
he had done before. He went close to the hole, and took his brother up
in his arms and hugged him, and the great snake thrust out his tongue,
as if kissing him. Then the boy spoke again and said, "Now, brother, I
am going away, and I give you these two animals and this woman to
keep. They are yours." Then he started for his home, and after a long
time he arrived at the village.

After a time, he determined to start off again on the warpath, and
this time he took a party with him. He had told the whole tribe what
had happened, and how his brother had protected and helped him; and he
said to those warriors who were going with him, "Let each one of you
take a present with you for my brother; some beads or eagle feathers
or some tobacco as an offering, so that he may help you." They started
south to go to the place where his brother lived. When they got there,
the young man said to the others, "Now you must, each one of you, give
something to my brother. Call him by his kin name, and ask him to help
you, and to make you successful; and leave the things before the
hole." They did as he said, and when they had made their presents,
they went by. They saw nothing, for the brother did not call out the
great snake.

Two or three days after they had passed the place, they found a camp
of Sioux, and took a lot of horses and killed some of the enemy. Then
they went back, and when they came to the snake's home, they took a
horse and led it up near the hole and killed it, and gave it to him,
and left the scalps at the mouth of the hole as presents to him. When
they reached the village, there was great joy and a good time. They
had all kinds of dances, for they were glad that the war party had
killed some Sioux.

After that another war party started out, and the brother said to
them, "Go straight to my brother, and make him a present, and ask him
to give you good luck, and you will be successful." And it happened as
he had said.

The brother was always fortunate in war. He became a chief and was
very rich, having many horses. Ever after that time, when he took the
lead of a war party, all the poor men would come and say, "I want to
go with you." They knew that his brother was a snake, and would give
him good luck.




O´RE-KA-RAHR.


A long time ago, as the tribe were on their summer hunt, a man and his
wife got to quarreling. They had a child, a boy about ten months old.
It was while they were traveling along, going from one camp to
another, that they began to quarrel. At length the wife became very
angry, and threw the baby to the man, saying, "You take that baby. It
belongs to you, for it is a man child. I am not going to nurse it for
you any longer." Then she went away.

The man took the child and carried it along with him. He felt very
badly, both on his own account and on account of his child. He was so
unhappy that he almost wanted to kill himself. He was so poor-minded
because it was a disgrace that he, being a man, should be obliged to
take care of his child until it was grown up, and he had no female
relatives to whom he could turn it over to be reared. So he was very
unhappy, and determined to leave the tribe and wander off alone, far
from his people.

He did so. He carried the child on his back, as a woman does. When it
cried for its mother's milk, he had none to give it. He could only cry
with it. He hated to kill the child, or to leave it behind to die on
the prairie. He wandered off to the south. He traveled on for a time,
until he came near to where the buffalo were. By this time, the child
had changed from a very fat baby to a very thin one, because it had
not been nursed. When he got to the buffalo, he killed a cow, and took
its udder, and while it was fresh he let the child suck it, until it
became sour. Then he killed another cow, and did the same thing. In
every way he did the best he could to nourish the child. Sometimes he
would get a slice of meat, and half cook it, and let the child suck
the juice. The child began to improve, and to get a little stronger.
In this way he supported it for quite a long time, and it did pretty
well, and at last it got used to this food, and became strong and
well. By this time he had gone a long way.

At length he found that the child could sit up alone. Then he began
to give it all sorts of playthings, so that it could amuse itself.
First he made for it a little bow and some arrows, and taught it how
to use them. He made other things for the child to play with, and at
last it got to be contented playing alone. Then the father would leave
the child for a few minutes, and go off a little way, perhaps to the
top of a hill near by, to look off over the country, but he would look
back at the child every few steps to see that it was all right. When
he would come back he would find the child safe, playing, well
contented. After a while he got so that he would leave it for about an
hour, and when he came back, find it safe and contented, playing. By
this time the child had begun to walk. Finally the father went off
once for half a day, and when he came back, he found the child playing
about safe. It did not seem to mind much about the father being
absent. About this time he killed a buffalo cow, and made some dried
meat, and put it in a certain place, and told the child when it was
hungry to go there and get a a piece.

He now went off and was gone a whole day, and when he came back at
night the child was safe. Finally he made his preparations and went
off to stay over night, and be gone two days. He did so, and when he
came back, the boy was asleep. A second time he went away and was
absent for two days, going quite a long distance. When he came back he
found that the child was painted with white clay. The father thought
this was strange. He said to himself, "Something must have come and
talked to my child, and is taking care of him while I am gone."

When he came back the third time after a two days' journey, he found
that the child had about his neck a string of _pa´hut_.[11] The fourth
long journey he took lasted three days, and when he returned, he found
his boy still wearing this same string of beads, and with a feather
tied in his head. Now his father knew that something was looking after
his child while he was away, and when he went off, he would pray for
the child. He would say, "_No´-a_, whatever it is that is taking pity
on my child, also take pity on me."

  [11] Wild currants strung like beads.

The child had now grown so large that it could talk with him, and one
day it said, "Father, you go away, and you be gone for four days; I
will be all right here. When you come back you will find me safe."

The man went. He started to go way down south, to be gone for four
days. After he had been gone two days and two nights, he saw a signal
smoke and went toward it. As he raised up his head and peeped over a
hill before crossing it, he saw, far off, a lot of people and horses
coming toward the river which lay between him and them. He lay on the
hill a long time, watching to see where they would camp. When they had
made camp, he went into a ravine, and crept down close to the camp,
until he could see that it was just one lodge, and that about it were
a whole herd of horses. He waited until evening, and then went over to
the lodge. It was after dark when he went. The lodge was all
surrounded by horses; everywhere nothing but horses, there were so
many. He crept close to the lodge, and looked in through an opening by
the door, and saw lying down opposite the door a great big man, and on
either side a woman; only three persons in all. As he looked at these
persons, he thought he recognized one of the women. He kept looking at
her, and at last he remembered who she was, and that she had been
captured long ago from the Pawnees. Her people were still living. The
man was a Comanche.

While the Pawnee was watching, the man inside the lodge asked for
something, and the captive woman stood up to go out of the lodge, and
the Pawnee stepped to one side, out of sight. The woman came out into
the darkness, and went out among the horses. The Pawnee stepped up
behind her very softly, and put his hand on her shoulder, and said to
her in Pawnee, "Friend, do you belong to my tribe?" The woman started
to scream, but he put his hand on her mouth, and said to her, "Be
quiet. Keep still. Do not call out." She answered him, "Yes, I belong
to your tribe." Then she said in a very low voice that shook, for she
was afraid, "Do you belong to my tribe?" The man said, "Yes." Then he
asked her, "Who is that other woman that I see in the lodge?" She
answered him, "She also belongs to our tribe, and is a prisoner." Then
the man said, "You just wait and keep still. I am going to kill that
man." The woman said, "That is good. That is good. This man is the
biggest man of all the Comanches. He has come first to this place, and
all the rest of the Comanches are coming here to meet him. I am glad
that my people are living, and that I am going back to see them once
more. Do not fail to kill him. I will tell the other woman to be
ready, that our friend is here, and we will wait and watch."

When the woman went into the lodge, she whispered to the other woman,
and said, "Be ready. A friend who belongs to our tribe is here. Take
your hatchet, and be prepared to help to kill our husband."

The two women waited, and the Pawnee made ready to shoot the Comanche
with his bow and arrow. The woman had said to him, "Push aside the
door a little and be ready." He made a little bit of an opening by the
door, just big enough to let an arrow pass through, and when the time
came he let it go. _U´-ra-rîsh!_ the arrow flew straight, and pierced
the Comanche through the heart. So he died, and the Pawnee counted
_coup_ on him and took his scalp.

The women felt so glad to meet a friend that they put their arms
around the man and patted him. They were going back home to see their
relations. They asked him, "How many of you are here?" He answered, "I
am alone." They were surprised.

They took down the lodge, and packed everything on the horses, and
drove off the herd, leaving the dead body of the enemy in the camp.
All night they traveled, and all the next day; and as they were
going, he told them how it came about that he was alone. They told him
that there were about three hundred head of horses in the herd that
they had with them. When they had come pretty close to where he had
left the child, he told them about the boy being there all alone; and
the women just ran their horses to get to the boy; whichever got there
first, he should be hers. When they came to the boy, they took him in
their arms and petted him, and took him as their own.

Now the father was no longer sad. He had recovered two captured women,
had killed his enemy, and had taken a lot of horses.

They went on, and traveled far, and at length, one night, they came to
the Pawnee tribe, and camped with them. The horses just surrounded the
lodge, you could just see the top of it over their backs. The next
morning all the people wondered who these strangers could be. They
found out that the man and child, who were lost, had returned, and
with them two women, captured long ago by the Comanches. So there was
great joy in the tribe. Then the man gave his relations many horses.
In those days the Pawnees had not many horses, and it seems that this
man brought good luck in horses to the tribe. Ever since that time
they have had many horses. The mother of the child came to see it, she
was so glad it was alive, but she was whipped out of the lodge.

The child grew to be a man, and was wealthy. After he had grown up, he
told his father that ever since he could remember anything, a buck
deer had talked to him, and taken care of him; that it had saved them,
and brought them good fortune. In order that the _O´re-ka-rahr_ might
be remembered, he established a dance, called the deer dance, which
has been kept up to this day.

Many wonderful things happened to this same young man. Once he went on
a war party against the Cheyennes, and stole some horses from them.
The Cheyennes followed and overtook them, and they had a great fight.
The first man killed was this young man. He was very brave, and the
Cheyennes cut him up into small pieces, but that night it lightened
and thundered and rained, and soon after the storm was over, the young
man came walking into camp alive. He was all scarred over, where he
had been cut up, but he had come to life because the deer had looked
after him. He lived long to show the scars of the battles he had been
through.




THE GHOST BRIDE.


In a place where we used to have a village, a young woman died just
before the tribe started on the hunt. When she died they dressed her
up in her finest clothes, and buried her, and soon after this the
tribe started on the hunt.

A party of young men had gone off to visit another tribe, and they did
not get back until after this girl had died and the tribe had left the
village. Most of this party did not go back to the village, but met
the tribe and went with them on the hunt. Among the young men who had
been away was one who had loved this girl who had died. He went back
alone to the village. It was empty and silent, but before he reached
it, he could see, far off, some one sitting on top of a lodge. When he
came near, he saw that it was the girl he loved. He did not know that
she had died, and he wondered to see her there alone, for the time was
coming when he would be her husband and she his wife. When she saw him
coming, she came down from the top of the lodge and went inside. When
he came close to her, he spoke and said, "Why are you here alone in
the village?" She answered him, "They have gone off on the hunt. I was
sulky with my relations, and they went off and left me behind." The
man wanted her now to be his wife, but the girl said to him, "No, not
yet, but later we will be married." She said to him, "You must not be
afraid. To-night there will be dances here; the ghosts will dance."
This is an old custom of the Pawnees. When they danced they used to go
from one lodge to another, singing, dancing and hallooing. So now,
when the tribe had gone and the village was deserted, the ghosts did
this. He could hear them coming along the empty streets, and going
from one lodge to another. They came into the lodge where he was, and
danced about, and whooped and sang, and sometimes they almost touched
him, and he came pretty near being scared.

The next day, the young man persuaded the girl to go on with him, and
follow the tribe, to join it on the hunt. They started to travel
together, and she promised him that she would surely be his wife, but
not until the time came. They overtook the tribe; but before they got
to the camp, the girl stopped. She said, "Now we have arrived, but you
must go first to the village, and prepare a place for me. Where I
sleep, let it be behind a curtain. For four days and four nights I
must remain behind this curtain. Do not speak of me. Do not mention my
name to any one."

The young man left her there and went into the camp. When he got to
his lodge, he told a woman, one of his relations, to go out to a
certain place and bring in a woman, who was waiting there for him. His
relative asked him, "Who is the woman?" And to avoid speaking her
name, he told who were her father and mother. His relation, in
surprise, said, "It cannot be that girl, for she died some days before
we started on the hunt."

When the woman went to look for the girl she could not find her. The
girl had disappeared. The young man had disobeyed her, and had told
who she was. She had told him that she must stay behind a curtain for
four days, and that no one must know who she was. Instead of doing
what she had said, he told who she was, and the girl disappeared
because she was a ghost. If he had obeyed the girl, she would have
lived a second time upon earth. That same night this young man died in
sleep.

Then the people were convinced that there must be a life after this
one.

  [Illustration: INTERIOR OF DIRT LODGE.]




THE BOY WHO SAW A-TI´-US.


Many years ago the Pawnees started on their winter hunt. The buffalo
were scarce, and the people could get hardly any meat. It was very
cold, and the snow lay deep on the ground. The tribe traveled
southward, and crossed the Republican, but still found no buffalo.
They had eaten all the dried meat, and all the corn that they had
brought with them, and now they were starving. The sufferings of the
people were great, and the little ones began to die of hunger. Now
they began to eat their robes, and _parfleches_, and moccasins.

There was in the tribe a boy about sixteen years old, who was all
alone, and was very poor. He had no relations who could take care of
him, and he lived with a woman whose husband had been killed by the
Sioux. She had two children, a boy and a girl; and she had a good
heart, and was sorry for the poor boy. In this time of famine, these
people had scarcely anything to eat, and whenever the boy got hold of
any food, he gave it to the woman, who divided it among them all.

The tribe kept traveling southward looking for buffalo, but they had
to go very slowly, because they were all so weak. Still they found no
buffalo, and each day the young men that were sent out to look for
them climbed the highest hills, and came back at night, and reported
that they could only see the white prairie covered with snow. All this
time little ones were dying of hunger, and the men and women were
growing weaker every day.

The poor boy suffered with the rest, and at last he became so weak
that he hardly could keep up with the camp, even though it moved very
slowly. One morning he was hardly able to help the old woman pack the
lodge, and after it had been packed, he went back to the fire, and sat
down beside it, and watched the camp move slowly off across the
valley, and up over the bluffs. He thought to himself, "Why should I
go on? I can't keep up for more than a day or two longer anyhow. I may
as well stay here and die." So he gathered together the ends of the
sticks that lay by the fire, and put them on the coals, and spread his
hands over the blaze, and rubbed them together, and got warm, and then
lay down by the fire, and pretty soon he went to sleep.

When he came to himself, it was about the middle of the day, and as he
looked toward the sky he saw two spots there between him and the sun,
and he wondered what they were. As he looked at them they became
larger and larger, and at last he could see that they were birds; and
by and by, as they came still nearer, he saw that they were two swans.
The swans kept coming lower and lower, and at last they alighted on
the ground right by the fire, and walked up to where the boy lay. He
was so weak he could not get up, and they came to him, one on each
side, and stooped down, and pushed their shoulders under him, and
raised him up and put him on their backs, and then spread their broad
wings, and flew away upward. Then the boy went to sleep again.

When he awoke he was lying on the ground before a very big lodge. It
was large and high, and on it were painted pictures of many strange
animals, in beautiful colors. The boy had never seen such a fine
lodge. The air was warm here, and he felt stronger than before. He
tried to raise himself up, and after trying once or twice he got on
his feet, and walked to the door of the lodge, and went in. Opposite
the door sat _A-ti´-us_. He was very large and very handsome, and his
face was kind and gentle. He was dressed in beautiful clothes, and
wore a white buffalo robe. Behind him, from the lodge poles, hung many
strange weapons. Around the lodge on each side sat many chiefs, and
doctors, and warriors. They all wore fine clothes of white buckskin,
embroidered with beautifully colored quills. Their robes were all of
beaver skin, very beautiful.

When the boy entered the lodge, _A-ti´-us_ said to him, "_Looah,
pi-rau´, we-tüs sûks-pit_--Welcome, my son, and sit down." And he said
to one of the warriors, "Give him something to eat." The warrior took
down a beautifully painted sack of _parfleche_, and took his knife
from its sheath, and cut off a piece of dried meat about as big as
one's two fingers, and a piece of fat about the same size, and gave
them to the boy. The boy, who was so hungry, thought that this was not
very much to give to one who was starving, but took it, and began to
eat. He put the fat on the lean, and cut the pieces off, and ate for
a long time. But after he had eaten for a long time, the pieces of
meat remained the same size; and he ate all that he wanted, and then
put the pieces down, still the same size.

After the boy had finished eating, _A-ti´-us_ spoke to him. He told
him that he had seen the sufferings of his people, and had been sorry
for them; and then he told the boy what to do. So he kept the boy
there for a little while longer, and gave him some fine new clothing
and weapons, and then he told one of the warriors to send the boy
back; and the warrior led him out of the lodge to where the swans were
standing near the entrance, and the boy got on to their backs. Then
the warrior put his hand on his face, and pressed his eyelids
together, and the boy went to sleep. And by and by the boy awoke, and
found himself alone by the fire. The fire had gone out, but the ground
was still covered with snow, and it was very cold.

Now the boy felt strong, and he stood up, and started, running along
the trail which the camp had taken. That night after dark he overtook
the camp, for they traveled very slowly, and he walked through the
village till he came to the lodge where the woman was, and went in.
She was surprised to see him in his new clothes, and looking so well
and strong, and told him to sit down. There was a little fire in the
lodge, and the boy could see that the woman was cutting up something
into small pieces with her knife.

The boy said to her, "What are you doing?"

She answered, "I am going to boil our last piece of robe. After we
have eaten this there will be nothing left, and we can then only die."

The boy said nothing, but watched her for a little while, and then
stood up and went out of the lodge. The door had hardly fallen behind
him, when the woman heard a buffalo coughing, and then the breaking of
the crisp snow, as if a heavy weight was settling on it. In a moment
the boy lifted the lodge door, and came in, and sat down by the fire,
and said to the woman, "Go out and bring in some meat." The woman
looked at him, for she was astonished, but he said nothing, so she
went out, and there in the snow by the side of the lodge was a fat
buffalo cow. Then the woman's heart was glad. She skinned the cow, and
brought some of the meat into the lodge and cooked it, and they all
ate and were satisfied. The woman was good, so she sent her son to
the lodges of all her relations, and all her friends, and told them
all to come next morning to her lodge to a feast, "for," she said, "I
have plenty of meat."

So the next morning all her relations and all her friends came, so
many that they could not all get into the lodge, but some had to stand
outside, and they ate with her, and she cooked the meat of the cow for
them, and they ate until it was all gone, and they were satisfied. And
after they had done eating, they lighted their pipes and prayed,
saying, "_A-ti´-us, we´-tüs kit-tah-we_--Father, you are the ruler."

While they were smoking the poor boy called the woman's son to him,
and pointed to a high hill near the camp, and said, "_Looah,
sûks-kus-sis-pah ti-rah hah-tûr_--Run hard to the top of that hill,
and tell me what you see." So the boy threw off his robe, and smoothed
back his hair, and started, and ran as hard as he could over the snow
to the top of the hill. When he got there he shaded his eyes with his
hand, for the sun shone bright on the snow and blinded him, and he
looked east, and west, and north, and south, but he could see nothing
but the shining white snow on the prairie. After he had looked all
ways, he ran back as hard as he could to the village. When he came to
the lodge, he went to the poor boy, and said to him, "I don't see
anything but the snow." The poor boy said, "You don't look good. Go
again." So the boy started again, and ran as hard as he could to the
hilltop, and when he got there, panting, he looked all ways, long and
carefully, but still he could see nothing but the snow. So he turned
and ran back to the village, and told the poor boy again that he saw
nothing. The boy said, "You don't look good." Then he took his bow in
his hand, and put his quiver on his back, and drew his robe up under
his arm so that he could run well, and started, himself, and ran as
hard as he could to the top of the hill, and when he got there he
looked off to the south, and there, as far as he could see, the plain
was black with buffalo struggling in the deep snow. And he turned to
the village, and signaled them with his robe that buffalo were in
sight. In a few minutes all the Pawnees had seized their bows and
arrows, and were running toward him, and the women fixed the
_travois_, and took their knives, and followed. The boy waited on the
hilltop until the warriors came up, and then they went down to the
buffalo, running on the snow. The buffalo could not get away on
account of the deep snow, and the Pawnees made a great killing.
Plenty of fat meat they got, enough to last them until the summer
hunt, and plenty of warm winter robes. They did not have to move any
further, but stayed right here, killing meat and drying it until they
were all fat and strong again.

And the poor boy became a great doctor in the tribe, and got rich.

Before this the Pawnees had always had a woman chief, but when the
woman who was chief died, she named the poor boy as her successor, and
the people made him head chief of the tribe.

  [Illustration: FIRE-STICK.]




HOW THE DEER LOST HIS GALL.


A long time ago, the deer and the antelope met upon the prairie. At
that time both of them had dew-claws, and both had galls. After they
had talked for a little while, each one of them began to boast about
how fast he could run. Each one, the deer and the antelope, claimed
that he could run faster than any other animal, and at length they
became very angry in their dispute, and determined that they would
have a race.

They staked their galls on the race, and it was run on the prairie.
The antelope ran the faster, and won, and took the deer's gall. The
deer felt very badly that he had lost it, and he seemed so miserable
that the antelope felt sorry for him, and to cheer him up, he took off
his dew-claws and gave them to him.

Since that time the deer has had no gall, and the antelope no
dew-claws.

       *       *       *       *       *

Note.--A story somewhat similar to this is current among the Blackfeet
tribes of the northern country. In this tale the antelope won the
deer's gall, as in the Pawnee story. Then the deer said, "You have
won, but that race was not a fair one, for it was over the prairie
alone. We ought to run another race in the timber to decide which is
really the faster." They agreed to run this second race, and on it
they bet their dew-claws. The deer ran the faster through the thick
timber and over the logs, and beat the antelope, and took his
dew-claws. Since then the antelope has had no dew-claws, and the deer
no gall.

  [Illustration: BOW AND ARROWS.]




YELLOW FOX.


A long time ago, while the Pawnees were on their winter hunt, a young
boy, _Kiwuk-u lah´-kahta_ (Yellow Fox), went out alone to hunt, to see
if he could kill a deer. When he left the camp in the morning, it was
warm and pleasant, but in the middle of the day a great storm of wind
and snow came up, and the flying snow hid everything, and it grew very
cold. By and by the ground was covered with snow, and the whole look
of the prairie was changed, and the boy became lost, and did not know
where he was, nor what way to go to get to the camp. All day he
walked, but he saw nothing of the camp, nor of any trail and as it
became colder and colder, he thought that he would surely freeze to
death. He thought that he must die, and that there was no hope of his
ever seeing his people again. As he was wandering along, numbed and
stiffened by the cold, and stumbling through the deep snow, he heard
behind him a curious singing sound, and in time with the singing was
the noise made by some heavy animal, running. The sounds came nearer,
and at last, close by the boy, ran a great big buffalo bull. And as he
ran near the boy, he sang a song, and as he sang, the sound of his
hoofs on the ground kept time to the measure of the song. This is what
he sang:

    _A-ti-us   ti-wa-ko  Ru-ru!  Teh-wah-hwa´-ko,_
    My Father    says,   Go on!  He keeps saying,

    _Ru-ru-hwa´-hwa´,     Wi-ruh-rê._
     Keep going on.    It will be well.

The boy's heart became strong when he heard that the Father had sent
the bull, and he followed him, and the bull led him straight to the
camp.




_NOTES ON THE PAWNEES._




NOTE.


The notes on the origin, customs and character of the Pawnees, which
follow, have been gathered during twenty years' acquaintance with this
people. They are what they profess to be; not a history of the people,
but a series of notes bearing on their mode of life in the old wild
days, an attempt to give some clues to their habits of thought, and
thus to indicate the character of the people. Such notes may be of use
to some future historian who shall have the time and the inclination
to trace out more fully the history of the Pawnees, and to tell, as it
ought to be told, the story of a people who once were great. I could
wish that it might be my privilege to undertake this congenial task,
but the constantly increasing pressure of other duties forbids me to
hope that I shall be able to do so. I feel satisfaction, however, in
being able to record the observations here set down.

In the collection of this material I had for years the assistance and
coöperation of the late Major Frank North, who always placed at my
disposal his great store of Pawnee lore. Luther H. North, his brother,
has given me a vast deal of assistance, and last spring accompanied me
to the Pawnee reservation. Without his aid this book would never have
been written. Mr. John B. Dunbar has been most kind in reading over
the chapter on the Pawnees, and has aided me with many suggestions,
besides giving me help on certain linguistic points.

Nothing is said in this volume about the Pawnee language--a subject
which is sufficiently important to deserve a volume by itself.

To every intelligent student of North American aborigines it must be a
matter of keen regret that nothing is known of the language of this
people. That a distinct linguistic stock like the Pawnee should pass
away unrecorded would be a serious misfortune, and the Bureau of
Ethnology of the Smithsonian Institution ought certainly to take some
steps to preserve a record of the Pawnee language.

Major Frank North was undoubtedly more conversant with the spoken
Pawnee tongue than any other white man has ever been. Since his death,
there is no one who is so familiar with the language as Mr. John B.
Dunbar, who has devoted much time to its study, and has made himself
acquainted not only with its vocabulary, but also with its grammar.
Born and reared among the Pawnees, familiar with them until early
manhood, a frequent visitor to the tribe in later years, he is well
fitted by interest and association to undertake the task of recording
in permanent form the unwritten speech of this people. Add to this a
long training as a student of language and history and a keen logical
mind, and we have in Mr. Dunbar the man more than all others best
fitted to undertake this difficult but most delightful task. The
Director of the Bureau of Ethnology could not easily perform a greater
service to aboriginal linguistics than to intrust to Mr. Dunbar the
labor of preparing an extended work on the Pawnee language.




THE PAWNEES.


I. RELATIONSHIPS.

Until within a few years the home of the Pawnees was in southern
Nebraska and northern Kansas. This group of tribes may be called the
main stock of the family; from them it took its name; they are its
best and longest known members. In the earlier accounts of this
people, the Pawnee Picts or Wichitas are often confounded with their
more northern relatives.

The Pawnees proper consisted at one time of three bands or tribes,
federated under a single head chief. These bands, in the order of
their importance, were: The Chau-i, the Kit-ke-hahk´-i and the
Pita-hau-erat. To these three was subsequently added--after the
northern migration of the tribes, and their settlement in northern
Kansas and Nebraska, but probably long anterior to the advent of the
whites, and by conquest--the large, powerful and intelligent allied
tribe, known as the Skidi or Pawnee Loups. These four have always been
known in the writings of the earlier explorers in the West as
respectively the Grand, the Republican, the Tapage and the Wolf
Pawnees, and they constituted the Pawnee Nation.

The three tribes first named have always been together, and their
Pawnee names, according to Major North, denoted the relative
situations of the three villages. Thus Kit-ke-hahk´-i means "on a
hill;" Chau-i, "in the middle;" Pita-hau-erat, "down the stream," or
east; and in the olden times these were the relative positions of the
different villages when the three bands were camping together. The
Kit-ke-hahk´-i village was always the westernmost of the three, the
Chau-i were next to them, and the Pita-hau-erat were furthest east.
After the incorporation of the Skidi with the Pawnees, the village of
that tribe was always placed furthest to the west, and it was spoken
of as the Upper Village, while the other bands were termed the Lower
Village Tribes.

  [Illustration: GOOD CHIEF--KIT-KE-HAHK´-I.]

Of the three original bands, the Chau-i has always been first in
importance, and the head chief has been chosen from it. The
Kit-ke-hahk´-i band in numbers, importance and intelligence appear to
rank about with the Chau-i, while, on the other hand, the
Pita-hau-erat are regarded as less intelligent, responsible and worthy
than the other bands.

The Skidi are usually looked upon as more intelligent than the
Pawnees, and also as fiercer in their nature, and as making better
soldiers. The Skidi traditions, though such testimony, of course, is
not of much value, speak rather contemptuously of the prowess of the
other bands in war, and the superiority of the Skidi is grudgingly
acknowledged by the others. This is contrary to the view held by Mr.
J. B. Dunbar, who speaks of the Skidi as more intelligent than the
other bands, but as not being so good as warriors.

Besides this main group of tribes, the members of the Pawnee family,
as given by Mr. Dunbar, are the Arickaras, known also as the
Arickarees, Ricarees or Rees, the Caddos, the Huecos or Wacos, the
Keechies, the Tawaconies, and the Wichitas or Pawnee Picts. To these
may be added with some confidence the Tonkaways and the Lipans. The
Caddos, Huecos, Keechies and Tawaconies are regarded by the Pawnees as
closely connected with the Wichitas. They had but one name,
_Kiri-ku´ruks_, for all these tribes, and knew no distinction between
them. There is no doubt that the Arickaras were recently--perhaps
within a century--either a band of the Skidi tribe, or at least allied
to them as closely as the Chau-i have always been to the
Kit-ke-hahk´-i and the Pita-hau-erat. The relationship of the
Tonkaways and the Lipans has only recently been discovered, and has
come to light through the removal of the Pawnees from their home in
Nebraska to their present reservation in the Indian Territory.

In a note appended to his article on the Pawnees, published in the
_Magazine of American History_ for November, 1880, Mr. Dunbar says, "A
friend, who has had much experience with the Indians of the Southwest,
informs me that he is inclined to believe that the Lipans of Mexico
are of Pawnee stock. They have, in times past, exchanged frequent
hospitalities with the Wichitas, or Pawnee Picts, and the two
understand each other's dialects readily. The name Lipans he explains
as _li'panis_, that is, _the_ Pawnees." While this suggestion is very
interesting, so far as it goes, it scarcely furnishes sufficient
ground on which to base a genetic connection of the Lipans with the
Pawnee family. I have recently secured additional and more
satisfactory evidence of such a connection.

It is generally believed by the Pawnees, especially by those who are
most intelligent, and have had most intercourse with the southern
tribes, that the Lipans are allied to them, and that this relationship
is traceable through the Wichitas and the Tonkaways. The evidence
consists of (1) statements by the Wichitas and Tonkaways, (2) an
alleged similarity of language and personal names, and (3) a
similarity in the songs of the tribes. A Pawnee Indian, who has lived
for seven seasons with the Wichitas, gave me the following story which
he had gathered from that people. They say that long ago they did not
know the Tonkaways, but that when the tribes met they found that they
could understand each other's speech. Their languages were not the
same, but they were not more unlike than were the tongues spoken by
the Skidi and the three other Pawnee bands long ago; in other words,
they were dialects of the same language. After that meeting, the
Tonkaways and the Wichitas lived together for a time. But the
Tonkaways had bad ways. They would eat human flesh. When they could
find a Wichita boy out away from the camp, they would capture him, and
strangle and eat him. Sometimes they would kill a man of the
Wichitas, if they could catch him away off on the prairie. Therefore
the Wichitas drove the Tonkaways off south, and soon afterward moved
up across the Arkansas River, and into southern Kansas. Since then the
Wichitas and the Tonkaways have never lived together. A Tonkaway chief
named Charlie told Ralph J. Weeks, an educated Pawnee, "I have heard
that my people are Pawnees, but that we separated long ago." I am
informed that the personal names of the Tonkaways are the same as
those of the Pawnees, and are readily comprehended by the latter.
Ralph Weeks, while in a Tonkaway lodge, heard a man call out to a
girl, addressing her as _Tsi-sah-ru-rah-ka´-ri-ku_, which means "Woman
Chief's House." Ralph inquired about this name, and found that it was
the same in sound as Pawnee, and had the same meaning. The Tonkaways
say that some of the Pawnee words are the same as those used by their
relations to the south, the Lipans and others. The songs of the
Tonkaways are the same as those of the Pawnees, and the latter at once
recognize them. The old songs of the Lipans are the same as those of
the Pawnees, according to both Pawnee and Tonkaway testimony. Finally,
the Tonkaways and Lipans claim close relationship. They speak
different dialects of the same language.

The Pawnees, however, say that they never knew of the existence of the
Tonkaways until they came down into the Indian Territory, and, of
course, never met them until after that time. Neither did they know
the Caddos. As the Pawnees knew nothing of the Caddos and Tonkaways,
so the Wichitas knew nothing of the Arickaras until recently, and were
greatly surprised to learn that far to the north there was another
tribe which spoke their language.

The Wichitas claim that they and the Caddos are one people. Their
languages are said to differ somewhat, but only dialectically.

The southern members of the Pawnee family appear always to have lived
on excellent terms with the other wild tribes which inhabited their
country. They were allies of the Kiowas, Comanches, and Cheyennes,
tribes with which the northern Pawnees were long at war.


II. ORIGIN AND MIGRATIONS.

The Pawnees came from the south. All the information bearing on their
origin, which has as yet been secured, points to the conclusion that
the primitive home of this family was in the south.

Although Mr. Dunbar has carefully traced out the later history of
several of the members of this group, his researches carry us back
scarcely further than the beginning of the present century, and we
have no actual knowledge of the origin and early history of the
Pawnees. Except the Arickaras, none of the tribes belonging to this
family have ever dwelt much north of the Platte River, and in this we
have an indication of their southern origin. The traditions of the
tribe confirm this suggestion, and Mr. Dunbar has given other reasons,
derived from his study of this people, which abundantly justify us in
regarding them as migrants from the south.

There are still current among the Pawnees two traditions as to the
region from which they came, but both of these are vague, and so
lacking in detail as to be of little value except as suggestions which
need confirmation before being accepted as having any solid basis of
fact. The first of these traditions, now half forgotten, is known
only to the very oldest men. It is to the effect that long ago they
came from the far southwest, where they used to live in stone houses.
This might point to an original home for the Pawnees in Old Mexico,
and even suggests a possible connection with the so-called Pueblo
tribes, who still live in houses made of stone, and entered from
above.

Secret Pipe Chief, a very old Chau-i, the High Priest of the tribe,
gave me the history of their wanderings in these words: "Long ago," he
said, "very far back, all of one color were together, but something
mysterious happened so that they came to speak different languages.
They were all together, and determined that they would separate into
different parties to go and get sinew. They could not all go in
company, there were too many of them. They were so numerous that when
they traveled, the rocks where their lodge poles dragged were worn
into deep grooves. Then they were far off in the southwest, and came
from beyond two ranges of mountains. When they scattered out, each
party became a tribe. At that time the Pawnees and the Wichitas were
together. We made that journey, and went so far east that at last we
came to the Missouri River, and stopped there for a time. When the
season came round, we made out of the shoulder blade of a buffalo an
implement to cultivate the ground. There we made our fields."

Another very old man, Bear Chief, a Skidi, said, "Long ago we were far
in the southwest, away beyond the Rio Grande. We came north, and
settled near the Wichita Mountains. One summer there we planted our
corn. So we came from the south. After we left the Wichita Mountains,
that summer we came north as far as the Arkansas River, and made our
fields, and raised corn. Afterward we went to the Mississippi River
where the Missouri runs into it. My father was born while we lived on
the Mississippi." As Bear Chief must be nearly or quite eighty years
old, it would seem likely that the Skidi, or some village of that
tribe, may have been established on the Mississippi one hundred years
ago, but this was not a permanent location.

The second of these traditions tells of a migration from the
southeast. It states that the tribe originally came from somewhere in
the southeast, that is from what is now Missouri or Arkansas. They
started north after sinew--to hunt buffalo--and followed up the game,
until they reached the northern country--the region of the Republican
and the Platte rivers. They found this a pleasant country, abounding
in game, and they liked it, and remained there. The Wichitas
accompanied them part way on their journey, but turned aside when they
had reached southern Kansas, and went south again.

All the traditions agree that up to the time of the journey which
brought the Pawnees to their homes on the Solomon, Republican, Platte
and Loup rivers, the Wichitas were considered a part of the Pawnee
tribe. They agree also that after this separation, the two divisions
of the tribe lost sight of each other for a very long time, and that
each was entirely ignorant as to what had become of the other. We know
that for a long time they were at war, and the difference of the
dialects spoken by these two divisions of the family shows that the
period of separation was a long one.

The tradition of the migration of the Pawnees from the southwest is
evidently much older than the one which tells of their coming from the
southeast. Most of the younger men know the latter; but for the
account of the journey over the mountains from the southwest and
across the Rio Grande, it is necessary to go to the very old men. It
is quite possible that both stories are founded on fact; and, if this
is the case, the migration from the southeast may have taken place
only a few generations ago. Such a supposition would in part explain
its general currency at the present time.

In the existing state of our knowledge of this people, we have no
facts to go on, nothing in the nature of evidence as to their early
history, and we can only speculate as to the probabilities in regard
to their wanderings. It may be conjectured that the Pawnees came from
somewhere in Old Mexico, and, either as a number of related tribes, or
as a single tribe made up of different bands, they crossed the
mountains and the Rio Grande in a body, and wandered eastward across
what is now Texas. From this body it seems probable that the ancestors
of the Lipans and the Tonkaways were the first to separate themselves.
The main tribe perhaps gradually drifted further and further to the
east until it had crossed Texas and reached northwestern Louisiana,
and perhaps even the neighborhood of the Mississippi River. During
this long journey, which must have occupied many years--perhaps many
generations--we may imagine that the Huecos and possibly the Keechies
dropped behind, and remained on the plains.

How long the Pawnees sojourned in Louisiana no one can say. They now
found themselves in a country, which in climate, productions, and
topography, differed widely from anything they had before known. Up to
this time, these people had always inhabited the high, dry tablelands
of Mexico, or the almost equally arid plains of Texas, and now they
had come to a country having a heavy rainfall, abounding in swamps,
and overgrown with deciduous timber. The traditions of both Skidi and
Pawnees speak of a time when they lived in a country where grows the
cane which the white men use for fishing poles. We may imagine that
this forest country was a barrier to their further progress eastward,
and that it turned their steps in a new direction.

When the Pawnees left Louisiana, the Caddos certainly, and perhaps the
Keechies and the Tawaconies, were left behind, and for a very long
time lived in and near what is now Caddo Parish, Louisiana, where they
were at the time of the Louisiana Purchase. Geographical names in this
region indicate that their residence there was a long one, and Caddo
Lake, Caddo Fork, Caddo Gap and a town named Keatchie, still bear
testimony of the former occupants of the soil. From there the Caddos
moved up to the Brazos River in Texas. They have always kept up a
close intimacy with the Wichitas.

Perhaps it was during the sojourn of the Pawnees on the western
borders of Louisiana and Arkansas, though it may have been much
earlier, that the Skidi and the Arickaras, either as a single tribe,
or as already divided into two separate bands, left the Pawnees and
moved north and northwest. There appears to be reason for supposing
that for a while this section of the tribe lived on the Red River, the
Canadian and the Arkansas, and it is quite certain that sometimes they
went as far east as the banks of the Mississippi near where St. Louis
now is; but their permanent home, since they have been known to the
whites, was on the Platte and the Loup rivers in Nebraska.

The Pawnees with the Wichitas moved northwest into what is now the
Indian Territory and southern Kansas, where they separated, the latter
turning off to the south, and living at various times on the Canadian
and Red rivers and near the Wichita Mountains, while the Pawnees
proper slowly continued their march northward and westward, residing
for a time on the Arkansas and Solomon, the Republican and Platte
rivers. Here they again met the Skidi.

It is impossible to conjecture when this settlement in the northern
country took place, but it was certainly long ago. Mr. Dunbar has
pointed out that "_O-küt-ut_ and _oku´-kat´_ signify strictly above and
below (of a stream) respectively. Now their villages have usually been
situated upon the banks of the Platte, the general course of which is
from west to east. Hence each of these words has acquired a new
meaning, _i. e._, west and east." In the same way _Pük-tïs´-tu_--toward
the Omahas, has come to mean north; and _Ki´ri-ku´ruks-tu_--toward the
Wichitas, to mean south. The coining of such words points to a long
sojourn by the Pawnees in the region of the Platte. It is interesting
to note that the Omahas have never in historic times lived north of the
Pawnees, but always east of them, though we know that long ago they did
live to the north.

These remarks on the movements of the Pawnees are, to be sure, very
largely speculative, but speculation guided by the hints gathered from
conversations with the older men. It is a surmise as to what may have
been the wanderings of these people. If it were possible to talk with
all the different tribes of the family, something more definite might
be reached, but at this late day this seems hopeless. A study of the
Lipans, and an investigation of their relationships with other
southwestern tribes, might furnish us clues of the utmost importance
in tracing the origin of the Pawnee family.


III. THE SKIDI.

Ranking high among the Pawnee bands, for their intelligence, energy
and courage, stand the Skidi. Their past history is obscure, and we
know little about it beyond the fact that it was different from that
of the other bands. Although the relationship between them is
perfectly well established, still both Pawnee and Skidi traditions
agree that the two tribes were originally distinct, and that their
first meeting took place long ago, but after the migration of the
Pawnees to the northern country. We know, too, that the Arickaras were
close neighbors and near relatives of the Skidi, and it is probable
that they constituted a band, village, or division of that tribe.

It is believed by those who should be well informed, that the
northward migration of the Rees took place not more than a century
ago. One tradition of the separation runs in this way: The Skidi
started out on a hunt, a part going ahead and the others following
later. The first party were killing buffalo, when they were attacked
by a large war party of Sioux. These got between the two parties of
the Skidi, driving one of them back to the village, while the other
retreated northward. This retreat continued until they had been driven
some distance up the Missouri River, where their enemies left them.
They remained there through the winter, and planted their corn in the
spring, nor did they apparently for some time make any attempt to
rejoin their tribe. After some years, however, the two bands came
together on the Loup, and for a time lived together. The Rees even
went further south, to the neighborhood of the Wichita Mountains,
where the Pawnees at that time were living, but soon afterward they
went north again, and rejoined the Skidi on the Loup, and lived near
them there, and on the Platte near Scott's Bluffs. It was not long,
however, before a disagreement arose between the Rees and the Skidi,
and the Rees again moved off north. It is probable that this quarrel
may have originated in the fact that the Rees wished to make war on
the whites, but there is some reason to believe that there was also
jealousy about the head chieftainship of the two bands.

The testimony of men still living indicates that about one hundred
years ago some of the Skidi lived on the Mississippi River, near the
present site of St. Louis, and it is said that it was only the coming
in of the white settlers in considerable numbers that caused them to
move further westward. I am inclined to regard this location as only a
temporary one, and to believe that their real home, prior to this, had
been to the west, on the Platte and Loup rivers.

It is, of course, impossible to fix, even approximately, the time when
the Pawnees and the Skidi came together, but it probably was soon
after the Pawnees had settled on the Republican in their northward
migration. It is said that their first meeting was friendly, and that
they made a treaty, and smoked together. But no peace between two such
warlike tribes could last very long, and there were frequent
collisions and disagreements. There was a sharp rivalry between the
Chau-i and the Skidi, and their disputes finally culminated in an
unprovoked attack by the Skidi upon some Pawnees, while they were
hunting buffalo, in which about one hundred of the latter were killed.
The Pawnees made ready to avenge this injury, and marshaled all their
forces. They made a night march to the vicinity of the Skidi village,
which is said to have been on the north side of the Loup, distant from
their own only about twenty miles, and just at daylight sent out about
one hundred warriors, all mounted on dark colored horses, to decoy the
Skidi from the village. These men, lying down on their horses, and
covering themselves with their robes, represented buffalo, and rode
over the hill in sight of the Skidi village. The ruse was successful.
The Skidi at once started out to kill the buffalo, leaving their
village unprotected. The disguised warriors fled, leading the Skidi
further away, while the Pawnees who were in reserve rushed into the
defenseless village, and captured it, almost without striking a blow.
They took all the inhabitants back with them to their own village. The
Skidi were forced to sue for peace; and for their breach of faith were
heavily fined by the victorious Pawnees. They were incorporated into
the tribe, and since that time have lived as a part of the Pawnee
nation. This event was probably the culminating point of a series of
petty fights and skirmishes, which must have been annoying to the
Pawnees. This fighting went on within the memory of men now living,
though there are but few who are old enough to remember it.

Curly Chief, who is about 65 years old, can remember a man who took part
in these wars, and whose name was "The-Skidi-wounded-him-in-the-leg."
Bear Chief, a very old and decrepit Skidi, and Secret Pipe Chief, an old
Chau-i, have both told me that they can remember one or more fights
between the Skidi and the other bands.

A rather interesting evidence of the feeling once existing between the
Skidi and the other bands, and even now surviving among some of the
oldest men, is the statement by Bear Chief that the three other bands
were known as "Big Shields," the implication being that as they hid
themselves behind these big shields they were not so brave as those
who used smaller ones. The existence of such a feeling at the present
day indicates that the final conquest of the Skidi and their
incorporation into the Pawnee tribe took place not very long ago.

Mr. Dunbar sums up the traditions of the meeting of the tribes, their
wars and subsequent union, in the following language: "The historic
basis of this may be somewhat as follows: In the migration of the
Pawnees from the south, the Skidi preceded the other bands perhaps by
nearly a century. With them were the Arickaras. These two bands
together possessed themselves of the region of the Loup. When the
other bands arrived they were regarded as intruders, and hence arose
open hostilities. The result of the struggle was that the two bands
were forced to admit the new comers, and aid in reducing the
surrounding territory. Subsequently the Arickaras seem to have
wandered, or more probably, to have been driven from the confederacy,
and to have passed up the Missouri. Later the Skidi, in consequence of
some real or fancied provocation, attempted to retrieve their losses,
but were sorely punished, and henceforth obliged to content themselves
with a subordinate position in the tribe."

It is said that in the olden time the Skidi were very powerful. The
tribe was made up of four bands or villages, each of which numbered
5,000 people, or 20,000 for the whole tribe. This estimate, which is
founded merely on the statements of old men now living, is probably
excessive. There is no doubt, however, that they were a large and
powerful tribe, while their warlike habits and fierce natures caused
them to be feared and hated by all their neighbors.

The four divisions of the Skidi tribe exist now only in name, and the
origin of these names is almost forgotten. As the result of much
effort and inquiry, I have secured the following list:

    _Names of the Skidi Bands._

    1. _Tuhk-pah-huks-taht_--Pumpkin vine village. This name is
    said to have come from the fact that once, after planting
    time, this band went off on the summer hunt, and while they
    were away, the pumpkin vines grew so luxuriantly that they
    climbed up over the lodges, covering and hiding them.

    2. _Skidi rah´ru_--Wolves in the pools (of water). The name
    originated in this way: Long ago one band of the Skidi were
    camped on the Loup River. It was winter, and the buffalo came
    to them in great numbers. They killed many and prepared great
    quantities of dried meat. The buffalo kept coming, and at
    length they had so much meat that they had room for no more.
    When they could no longer store dried meat, they stopped
    taking the flesh of the buffalo and took only the hides. The
    buffalo continued to come and to cross the river just below
    the camp, and the men on foot would chase the buffalo on the
    ice, where the great animals would slip and sprawl, so that
    the Skidi could run up close, and stab them. They would skin
    them there and leave the carcasses on the ice. From far and
    near great numbers of wolves gathered to feed on the
    carcasses, and as it was toward spring, and the weather was
    growing milder, the ice began to melt on top, and little pools
    of water stood on it. About this time, there came to this
    village a Skidi from another band who were half starving, for
    they could find no buffalo at all. When the man saw that this
    village had so much meat, he wondered at the plenty, and asked
    how it was. They took him out from the village down to where
    the dead buffalo lay on the ice, and pointed them out to him,
    and he saw the wolves standing in the water and feeding on the
    carcasses. Then they took him back to the village, gave him
    all the dried meat he could carry, and sent him away to his
    home, heavily loaded. When he reached his own village he told
    the people there how those in the other camp had plenty, and
    when they asked him where it was, he told them, and said that
    it was _Skidi rah´ru_--where the wolves stand in the pools of
    water.

    3. _Tuh-wa-hok´-a-sha_--Village on a ridge. _Tuh_--village,
    _wa_--the central roach on the head of a man whose hair has
    been shaved on both sides, _hok´-a-sha_--curving over. This
    village was on a ridge, reaching over on both sides of it.

    4. _Tu-hi´ts-pi-yet_--Village on a point or peninsula.
    _Tuh_--village, camp, or band; _hits-pi-yu_--a point.

There are yet to be seen on the Loup Fork, in Nebraska, innumerable
remains of Skidi villages, some of which are very ancient.


IV. NAME AND EMBLEM.

It is probable that the name Pawnee, as Mr. Dunbar has remarked, is an
abbreviated form of the word _pa-ri´-ki_, which means a horn, and
referred to the peculiar erect scalp lock which may once have been
worn by this tribe. As Mr. Dunbar says, the name probably once
embraced the Pawnee Picts or Wichitas, among whom this fashion of
wearing the hair seems to have persisted long after it had been
abandoned by the Pawnees. The same writer gives the name Arickara as
from "_ür´-ik-i_, a horn; with a verbal or plural suffix, being thus
simply a later and exact equivalent of _Pa´-ni_ itself."

The name Pawnee Picts, so commonly applied to the Wichitas, appears to
mean Pawnee Picked, or tattooed Pawnees; and refers to the markings
upon the faces and breasts of these people, which are picked in with
a sharp instrument. The northern Indians speak of the Pawnees as
_Pa-na´-na_, while the southern tribes call them _Pi-ta´-da_, and the
Dakotas call the Arickaras _Pa-da´-ni_. All these appear to be merely
attempts to reproduce the name by which the Pawnees call themselves,
_Pa´-ni_.

The English names of the four bands of the Pawnees are, as has been
already stated, for the Skidi, the Wolf; for the Chau-i, the Grand;
for the Kit-ke-hahk´-i, the Republican, and for the Pita-hau-erat, the
Tapaje, Pawnees.

An old French trader, who has known these people for many years,
states that the Skidi are called Wolf Pawnees from the river Loup, on
which they lived; that Grand is an abbreviation for _Grand-pas_,
because the Chau-i were mostly tall men and took long steps; that the
Kit-ke-hahk´-i were called Republican from the river of that name, and
the Pita-hau-erat _Tapaje_ (Fr. noisy), because they are noisy and
restless, and are continually moving about from place to place. This
explanation of these English names is not altogether satisfactory. Mr.
Dunbar informs me that he believes that the Chau-i were called Grand
from the appellation given them by the Spaniards, who called them
_Los Grandes_, referring to their physical stature.

In the chapter on the Skidi the names of the four bands of that tribe
have been given, and their origin and derivation. The other tribes
were divided into bands, or gentes, but these divisions have almost
been forgotten. Of the Chau-i there is now said to be only one band;
of the Kit-ke-hahk´-i three; the Great Kit-ke-hahk´-i, Little
Kit-ke-hahk´-i, and Blackhead Kit-ke-hahk´-i; while of the
Pita-hau-erat there were two bands, the Pita-hau-erat proper and the
Ka-wa-ra´-kish. This last-named division appears to have had some
customs peculiar to itself, and quite different from anything known to
the other Pawnees.

The Pawnees call the Wichitas and the other related southern tribes
_Kiri-kur´uks_--Bear's-eyes. The reason for this appellation is
obscure. The only explanation of it that I have been able to obtain,
is that when the Pawnees first saw the Wichitas they thought they had
eyes like a bear. As Mr. Dunbar has suggested to me, the allusion may
have been to the ring sometimes painted or tattooed about the eyes of
the Wichitas.

It is generally supposed that an Indian receives his personal name
from some peculiarly memorable act that he has performed, or from
some incident that has happened to him. This is not now commonly the
case in the tribes with which I am best acquainted. Personal names
formerly originated in this way among the Indians, but at the present
day I question much if they are often given for such reasons. Most of
the names borne by the warriors have been long known in the tribe, and
I believe the coining of new names to fit a special set of
circumstances to be now quite unusual. Children were named soon after
they were born, and retained their childish names until well grown.
_Ta´-ka_--white, was a common boy's name, as was _Ka-tit_--black;
_Ki-ri´ki_--bright eyes, was often given to little girls. Nicknames
referring to personal peculiarities were common.

Here is a list which will give some notion of the general character of
the Pawnee names: Lucky Hawk, Good Fox, Turn-your-robe-hair-out, Chief
of Men, Pipe Chief, Lone Chief, Leader, Brave Chief, Leading Fox,
Still Hawk, Hunting Chief, Yellow Fox, Charging-the-camp, Angry Chief,
Little Warrior, Good Bear, Eagle Chief, Sun Chief, White Horse,
He-gives-away-many-horses-and-others-ride-them, Riding-up, Good Sky,
Walking Bear, Proud Eagle, Seven Stars, Sitting Bull, Big Mountain,
Fancy Horse, Fox Chief, Good Sun, Curly Hair, Blue Hawk, Mad Wolf,
White Elk, Young Hawk, War Chief, Good Chief, Curly Chief, Sitting
Eagle, Running Eagle, Mad Bear, Walking Sun, See-the-eagle-flying,
etc.

Mr. Dunbar states that "the tribal mark of the Pawnees in their
pictographic or historic painting was the scalp lock dressed to stand
nearly erect, or curving slightly backward something like a horn." I
have never met a Pawnee who knew of this manner of dressing the hair
in his own tribe, but all unite in stating that the Wichitas used to
wear the lock in this manner. If this is the case, no doubt in ancient
times it was common to the Pawnees as well, but with them it has
become obsolete, and is now forgotten.

In books the sign for "Pawnee" is sometimes given as the forefinger of
the right hand held at the back of the crown of the head, and pointing
upward to represent this erect scalp lock, but I conceive that this
sign is really that of the Pawnee Picts or Wichitas, who have been so
constantly confused with the true or northern Pawnees.

  [Illustration: SIGN FOR PAWNEE.]

The only sign for "Pawnee" that I have ever seen employed among
Indians in the West is that for "wolf," which is the name under which
the Pawnees are, or at least were formerly, known to most other
tribes. This sign is made in two ways, (1) by holding the two hands,
palm forward, the first and middle fingers extended close together
upward and a little forward, thumb and other fingers closed, close to
the head, about opposite the temple; (2) the right hand alone may be
held palm forward at the height of, and just in front of, the
shoulder, the first and middle fingers extended, separated and
pointing upward, the thumb and others closed; the hand is then moved
forward and downward from the wrist, so that the extended fingers
point almost to the front. Both these signs represent the pricked ears
of a wolf, and, so far as my experience goes, are universally
understood to mean "Pawnee." The one last described is now much the
more common of the two. The first of these signs is shown in the
frontispiece, which is copied from an engraving in the First Annual
Report of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The Pawnees have always been called by their neighbors to the south
"Wolves." It has been suggested that this term was applied to them by
their enemies in contempt, but there seems no reason for believing
this to have been the case, since it may be doubted that an Indian
feels contempt for a wolf any more than he does for a fox, a rabbit,
or an elk.

An Indian going into an enemy's country is often called a wolf, and
the sign for "a scout" is made up of the signs "wolf" and "look." The
Pawnees were most adroit scouts, warriors and stealers of horses; and
it seems perfectly natural that they should have received from the
neighboring tribes, who had such frequent evidences of their skill as
scouts and horse takers, the appellation Wolf. The Pawnees themselves
believe that the term was applied to them because of their great
endurance, as well as of their skill in imitating wolves so as to
escape detection by the enemy either by day or night. The Cheyennes,
Wichitas and Comanches all testify that they call the Pawnees Wolves
because they prowl like wolves; because, too, they have the endurance
of wolves, and can travel all day, and dance all night, and can make
long journeys, living on the carcasses they find on their way, or on
no food at all.

The Pawnees, when they went on the warpath, were always prepared to
simulate wolves. This was one of their regular practices, and this no
doubt was one reason for their remarkable success in taking horses,
for it enabled them to escape observation and to reconnoitre at close
quarters without danger of discovery. Wolves on the prairie were too
common to excite remark, and at night they would approach close to the
Indian camps, and often venture into them. The Pawnee who was
disguised as a wolf could trot up close to the village of his enemy,
see where the horses were tied, and perhaps even hear what was being
said, and lay his plans accordingly. The Pawnee starting off on the
warpath usually carried a robe made of wolf skins, or in later times a
white blanket or a white sheet; and, at night, wrapping himself in
this, and getting down on his hands and knees, he walked or trotted
here and there like a wolf, having thus transformed himself into a
common object of the landscape. This disguise was employed by day as
well. To escape observation when traveling in daylight, the Pawnee war
party always chose the ravines and lower ground to march in.
Sometimes, especially in a country where there was danger of coming
unexpectedly on the enemy, it was important that a reconnoissance
should be made from some commanding point. A man walking up to the top
of a hill might be seen, and recognized as a suspicious object, a long
way off, but no one would look a second time at a wolf. While the
party remained hidden in some ravine or hollow, therefore, the man who
was to ascend the hill would put his white robe over him and gallop to
the top on all fours, and would sit there on his haunches looking all
over the country, and any one at a distance who saw him, would take
him for a wolf. It was acknowledged on all hands that the Pawnees
could imitate wolves best. In one of the stories already given, an
instance is mentioned in which two Pawnees in the United States
service made use of this device to recover captured animals.

The name "Wolf," as given to the Pawnees, is probably merely a
translation of the word _Skiri´ki_, meaning wolf, from which the name
of the Skidi band may be supposed to be derived. Mr. Dunbar says: "The
emblem probably originated from the Skidi band. They being in advance
of the other bands in the northern migration, became known to the
tribes about them as wolves; and as the other bands arrived the sign
was naturally made to include them also, and in this enlarged use was
at length accepted by the Pawnees themselves."

  [Illustration: BUFFALO HORN LADLE AND SPOON.]




PAWNEE CUSTOMS.


I. EARLY DAYS.

Pawnee history goes back to a time when the tribe knew nothing of
horses. In those early days they went on foot, and depended for animal
food on their bows and arrows. At that time their bows did not differ
from those recently in use, but the heads of their arrows were made of
stone, and their knives were of flint. With this simple equipment they
set out on the hunt.

Choosing a still day, they would surround a small bunch of buffalo,
stretching out in a long line whose extremities would gradually draw
together, as the hunters, perhaps disguised as wolves, stole from hill
to hill, around the unconscious prey. When the circle was complete,
some one man would shout and startle the buffalo, and then as they
turned to run, another man would show himself before them, and call
out, and turn them, and whichever way they ran, some one would appear
before them, and turn them back. The buffalo, becoming each moment
more frightened, would run now this way, now that, and gradually the
Pawnees would close in on them, but would still keep the buffalo from
breaking through the line by yelling, and by tossing their robes in
the air. As the prey became more and more terror-stricken and
confused, they would run here and there, and round and round within
the ring of men; and as they grew more tired, the men would close in
on them still more, and first one, and then another, would shoot an
arrow, until at last the arrows were flying fast, and some of the
great beasts were down, and others were staggering along with the
blood pouring from their mouths; and soon the buffalo were so worn out
that they could run no longer, and it was an easy matter for the
Indians to dispatch them. Even those which were only slightly wounded
were secured, for it is said that when the animals were hit by the
arrows, even if it were only in the leg, they would soon swell up and
die. This statement refers to a belief, which I find quite widespread
among plains Indians, that the ancient stone arrow heads were
peculiarly deadly, and possessed this property, that even a slight
touch with them made a wound which was likely to be fatal. The
Blackfeet Indians have often told me the same thing about the stone
arrow heads which they used in early times.

Game, which inhabited the underbrush or the forest, was captured by a
method similar to that employed to secure the buffalo. If the Pawnees
discovered that deer or elk were in a piece of timber, they would
surround it, and then alarm the game, and keep them from breaking
through the line of men. The animals, frightened and confused, would
run round and round in a circle until exhausted, when the Pawnees
would close in, and kill them with their arrows.

It must be remembered in this connection, that in those days game
animals were enormously abundant and comparatively tame, and also,
that the Pawnees, from the necessities of their lives, were
tremendously active, very swift runners, and as tireless as the wolves
from which they took their name. Their endurance was something
astonishing. In their long journeys on the warpath they often
traversed on foot six or eight hundred miles of country, carrying,
during a part of the time, very heavy loads. Instances are not
uncommon where runners have traveled one hundred miles in twenty-four
hours. I myself know of a case where two men ran over seventy miles in
eleven hours. We may imagine that in the old days when the Pawnees
made all their journeys on foot, and were thus constantly exercising,
their speed and activity were greater, and their powers of endurance
still more remarkable.

Although their ancient arrows were usually headed with flint, they
sometimes used bone or the sharpened tine of a deer's horn. No one now
alive can remember when these were in common use, but there are men
who have heard their fathers and their grandfathers tell of them, and
who say that these arrows were good for war and for the chase. "You
could drive them through a thick shield," said Bear Chief. As soon as
they began to trade with the whites, arrow heads of sheet-iron came
into use. They say that, so long as the Pawnees used flint for making
arrow heads, they used to find plenty of these stones lying on the
prairie, but that when the whites brought them iron, _Ti-ra´-wa_ said
to himself, "The Pawnees no longer need these flint stones; I will
make no more of them." This shows an odd confusion of ideas, for, of
course, the reason that they did not find the stones was that they no
longer looked for them, their use having been abandoned.

Although these stone arrow heads must have passed out of general use
toward the end of the last century, yet some of them were preserved
much later, and it is possible that there may even now be some among
the Pawnees, hidden away in the sacred bundles. After they ceased to
be used for general purposes, they took on a sacred character and were
employed to slay the sacrifices; among the Skidi to kill the captive,
and in the Lower Village tribes the buffalo and deer, for sacrifice.
There was a time when it was deemed essential that the animals to be
sacrificed to _Ti-ra´-wa_, should be killed by one of these
ancient--and so sacred--arrows.

In the early days the Pawnees did not depend for food wholly--perhaps
not even largely--on the flesh of the animals which they killed by
hunting. They have always been an agricultural people, cultivating the
ground, and raising corn, beans, pumpkins, and squashes. They also dug
up many edible roots, and collected and dried various berries and
other fruits. Besides this, they captured birds and smaller mammals by
means of snares and traps. It is said that before they obtained
horses, they killed but few buffalo, only enough to provide
themselves with clothing and with sinew for sewing, backing bows, and
other uses.

The Pawnees aver that they have cultivated the corn as far back as
they can remember. They say also that this is their corn, that it is
not the corn of the whites, but is different from it--which is
true--and that they did not get it from the whites. It is their own.
On this they insist strenuously. I have found it impossible to obtain
any clue as to where the corn came from or how they obtained it. To
all inquiries on this point, they reply that it must have been "handed
down from above;" that it was given them by "the Ruler." Various
stories are told about it, but none of them are very pointed or
satisfactory.

They call the corn _a-ti´ra_, "mother." It has a sacred character, and
plays an important part in many of their religious ceremonies. This
name which they give it, the mother corn, no doubt refers to the fact
that it nourishes and supports them; that by it they are made strong.
I have also heard it said that it is called mother because it produces
others; it has young ones like a woman; "you put it in the ground and
it brings forth others."

The Pawnees cultivated their fields with hoes made from the shoulder
blade of the buffalo. Taking the ligament from the back of a buffalo's
neck, they lashed a stick firmly to the articulation of the shoulder
blade, nearly at right angles to the plane of the bone and to its
length. Then, dipping the joint into hot water, the ligament would
shrink, and bind the bone and the handle together as firmly as iron.

Years ago, on the sites of abandoned Pawnee villages, on the Loup Fork
and on the Platte, fragments of pottery used to be found among the
débris of the fallen lodges. The manufacture of this pottery was no
doubt abandoned long ago, and has probably not been practiced to any
considerable extent since they met the whites. A man about fifty years
of age stated to me that he had never seen these pots in use, but that
his grandmother had told him that in her days they made and used them.
He said that they were accustomed to smooth off the end of a tree for
a mould. A hot fire was then built, in which stones were roasted,
which were afterward pounded into fine powder or sand. This pounded
stone they mixed with fine clay, and when the material was of the
proper consistency, they smeared it over the rounded mould, which was
perhaps first well greased with buffalo tallow. After the clay had
been made of even thickness throughout, and smooth on the outside,
they took a small, sharp stone, and made marks on the outside to
ornament it. When the material was sufficiently dry, they lifted it
from the mould and burned it in the fire, and while it was baking,
"put corn in the pot and stirred it about, and this made it hard as
iron." This may mean that it gave the pot a glaze on the inside. In
these pots they boiled food of all kinds. Mr. Dunbar informs me that
these pots were also made in later times within a frame-work of willow
twigs. The clay, made very stiff, was smeared on this frame, the
inside being repeatedly smoothed with the moistened hand, and but
little attention being given to the appearance of the outside. After
they had been sun-dried, such pots were baked without removing the
frame, which burned away in the fire, leaving the marks of the twigs
visible on the outside of the pot.

Corn was, and is still, crushed in wooden mortars, hollowed out by
fire, and the pestle is also of wood, about four feet long, with an
enlargement at the upper end to give added weight.

Dishes and bowls were made of wood, or of large gourds; spoons and
ladles were fashioned from the horns of the buffalo; mats were woven
of rushes, ropes of buffalo hair, and lariats of rawhide.

Fire in the early days was obtained by means of fire sticks, the point
of one being twirled on a hollow in the other, until the charred dust
at first smoked and then ignited. It is said that sometimes it would
take four men to make a fire, one relieving another as they grew
tired. It was hard, slow work, but sometimes one man, if he was stout,
could make a fire alone. The use of fire sticks on war parties has
continued till within a short time, perhaps within twenty years.

As their clothing was manufactured wholly from skins, sewing occupied
a considerable part of the time of the women. This was done by means
of a bone needle--often the metacarpal or metatarsal bone supporting
the accessory hooflets on the deer--and a thread twisted of sinews.
Such sewing was extremely durable.

The other implements and utensils of the Pawnees did not differ
materially from those of other plains Indians.

It is a long time since they first began to use articles and
implements manufactured by the whites. Curly Chief related to me the
story of what was perhaps the first official visits from the whites
ever received by the Pawnees. He said:

"I heard that long ago there was a time when there were no people in
this country except Indians. After that the people began to hear of
men that had white skins; they had been seen far to the east. Before I
was born they came out to our country and visited us. The man who came
was from the Government. He wanted to make a treaty with us, and to
give us presents, blankets and guns, and flint and steel, and knives.

"The Head Chief told him that we needed none of these things. He said,
'We have our buffalo and our corn. These things the Ruler gave to us,
and they are all that we need. See this robe. This keeps me warm in
winter. I need no blanket.'

"The white men had with them some cattle, and the Pawnee Chief said,
'Lead out a heifer here on the prairie.' They led her out, and the
Chief, stepping up to her, shot her through behind the shoulder with
his arrow, and she fell down and died. Then the Chief said, 'Will not
my arrow kill? I do not need your guns.' Then he took his stone knife
and skinned the heifer, and cut off a piece of fat meat. When he had
done this he said, 'Why should I take your knives? The Ruler has
given me something to cut with.'

"Then taking the fire sticks, he kindled a fire to roast the meat, and
while it was cooking, he spoke again and said, 'You see, my brother,
that the Ruler has given us all that we need; the buffalo for food and
clothing; the corn to eat with our dried meat; bows, arrows, knives
and hoes; all the implements which we need for killing meat, or for
cultivating the ground. Now go back to the country from whence you
came. We do not want your presents, and we do not want you to come
into our country.'

"Afterward, however, a treaty was made. The first treaties were not to
purchase land. The Government made presents, and bought the right to
pass through the country. Roads were made up the Republican, the
Platte and the Solomon rivers."


II. EVERY-DAY LIFE.

In these hasty remarks upon the ways of the Pawnees, which are in fact
no more than a series of rough notes supplementary to Mr. Dunbar's
fuller history of this people, I shall not attempt to give any
general account of their habits. These can be learned by reference to
the papers, so often quoted. My object is to give a picture of the
Pawnee ways of thought rather than of their material life.

Their government was semi-republican. They were ruled by a head chief,
in later times always the head chief of the Chau-i band; and this
title was hereditary, but the chief, if he had not the requisite
strength of character, might lose all his influence, and his position
be practically, though not in name, held by a sub-chief or even
warrior of his own or another band. As has been well said, "The office
itself was hereditary, but authority could be gained only by
acknowledged personal accomplishments." Each band was ruled as to its
own affairs by four chiefs--a head chief, second chief, third and
fourth chiefs--but often some warrior who held no office, and bore no
title, might wield more power and influence than any of these. In
minor matters, the chief gave his orders without consultation with any
one, but more important affairs were usually discussed in council by
chiefs, head men and warriors, and the opinion of the assemblage
prevailed, even if it were opposed to the opinion of the chief. Among
the Pawnees, as elsewhere, a man's personal character determined the
position he should occupy and the influence he should wield. Bravery,
wisdom, and personal popularity were the important factors in
acquiring and retaining influence and authority.

Mr. Dunbar alludes to one matter which is little understood in
general; that is the existence among the Pawnees of a class of
servants. These were for the most part young men, or boys growing up,
who had not yet acquired any special standing. They lived in the
family of men of position and influence, from whom they received
support, and for whom they performed many offices, which were almost
menial. The relation which they held to the head of the family was not
altogether unlike that of a page or a squire to his knight in mediæval
times. These young men drove in and saddled the horses, made the
fires, ran errands, and carried messages for the leaders whom they
followed. The same menial offices were often performed by other, older
men, who were too lazy and too worthless to make positions for
themselves, and who were willing to continue to serve for their
support. This relation of servant persisted even among the Pawnee
Scouts after their enlistment, and, while among the privates in this
body all were of course equal in name, it was yet common, as the camp
prepared to start in the morning, to see the younger men saddling up
the horses, and performing other duties for the chiefs and the proved
warriors, whose military standing was no higher than those who were
serving them.

The dress of the old-time Pawnee male consisted of a breech clout,
leggings, fringed at the side, and reaching from ankle to thigh, and
moccasins. Over all this, when the weather demanded it, was worn the
buffalo robe, the hair side being turned in. The dress of the women
consisted of a sort of sleeveless shirt, and a skirt of dressed
buffalo cow skin, reaching to below the knee, with leggings of cloth
or buckskin, laced above the knee, and moccasins. They also wore the
robe or blanket. No head covering was used, though in war and on great
occasions the men wore bonnets or chaplets of eagle feathers, and
sometimes both men and women wove wreaths out of cottonwood or willow
twigs, with the green leaves left on, to shade their eyes from the
fierce rays of the sun. The children were at first scantily clad. The
boy, after he was released from his board, went naked, except perhaps
for a string of beads around his neck, until he was ten or twelve
years old, though usually he assumed the breech clout before that
age. Girls were clad in a shirt or smock almost as soon as they could
walk.

At the present time but few of the Pawnees wear their hair cut in the
ancient fashion, but twenty years ago a large proportion of the older
men had the whole head shaved, except a narrow roach which ran from
the forehead to the back of the head. This roach, on which the hair
was usually left less than an inch long, was sometimes stiffened at
the sides with grease and paint to make it stand up well. From this
roach the scalp lock fell back in its natural position. At the present
day many of the men cut their hair short, like the whites. The women
usually wore their hair in two braids, one on each side, falling
behind the ears, and the younger ones were careful in tending it.

All hair upon the face and on other parts of the body was usually
plucked out, but I have seen a Pawnee with a heavy beard under his
chin.

Paint was freely used in ornamentation, especially on the face and
breast. Black, as is the case with most tribes, was the color for war.
Red, white and yellow, were used merely for ornament.

As already indicated, the arms of the Pawnees were the bow and arrow,
the lance, the club, and the hatchet. The bow was almost invariably
made of the _bois d'arc_, and was backed with sinew, and had a string
of the same material. The arrows were made with the greatest labor,
care and exactness, and those manufactured by each individual were so
marked that they could at once be distinguished from those of every
other maker. It is well known that the arrows of each Indian tribe
differed from those of every other tribe, but besides this, each man's
arrows bore his private mark. The manufacture of the bow and arrows
was a long, slow process, and after they had been completed they were
carefully guarded and protected from injury. Although the Pawnees have
long been accustomed to use firearms in war, yet the use of the bow
and arrow in hunting persisted up to quite recent times, in fact up to
the date of the disappearance of the buffalo. A reason for this is
readily found in the fact that an arrow cost only time to manufacture,
and the Indian has an abundance of time. For cartridges, or for powder
and lead, he must pay money, or trade some of his possessions. An
arrow, too, may be used over and over again, and may thus account for
many head of game, whereas a cartridge can be used but once. In their
secret war expeditions, too, the bow was a favorite weapon, because
it was noiseless. An enemy found at a little distance from his camp,
could be stealthily approached and silently shot down, without
necessarily alarming persons in the neighborhood, when a rifle shot,
ringing over the prairie and echoing among the bluffs, would call out
every warrior in the village, to learn whence it came. I have been
told, by warriors, that on their war parties, they left their rifles
at home and carried only their bows, so that they might not be tempted
by the sight of an enemy to fire a shot, which might bring themselves
and their companions into danger.

The Pawnees were superb horsemen and owned many ponies. I can learn
nothing definite as to when they first obtained these animals, nor
from what source. A tradition exists, that up to the time of the
tribe's advent into the northern country, their only beast of burden
was the dog, which then carried their packs and hauled their
_travois_. The story goes that the Pawnees obtained their first horses
soon after their separation from the Wichitas. The three bands were
traveling north together, when the scouts who had been sent ahead to
overlook the country, hastened back and announced to the chiefs that
they had discovered a camp of Indians. A council was at once held to
determine whether they should attack this unknown village as enemies,
or should approach them as friends. The majority declared for an
attack, and it was so decided. Approaching under cover as near as
possible, the horde of dusky footmen poured over the hills and down
into the valley where stood the doomed village. The attack was sudden,
fierce, and successful. They killed and captured many of the enemy,
and took the camp, while the survivors fled in hopeless confusion.
Among the plunder taken were a lot of horses; strange beasts then to
the rude Pawnees, and at which they wondered greatly. A captive woman
explained to the conquerors that these creatures were good to ride,
and useful to pack on. Old men still tell, with a smile, of the
ludicrous first attempts of the warriors to ride the horses. This
occurrence is said to have taken place on the Smoky Hill River, in
what is now Kansas, and the Indians from whom the horses were
captured, are understood to have been Cheyennes.

  [Illustration: COW SKIN LODGE.]

The permanent habitations of the Pawnees were dirt or sod houses,
often of very considerable size. The remains of the old medicine lodge
of the Skidi, on the Loup, show it to have been two hundred and ten
feet in diameter. The lodges were circular in form, with walls seven
or eight feet high, and the roof rose from these walls to the apex
above the center of the lodge, where was the hole for the escape of
smoke from the fire, which burned on the floor below. A covered
passageway led to the entrance. Around the walls the inmates slept,
the beds being partitioned off, and protected in front as well, by a
curtain which might be a skin, or a mat woven of reeds or coarse
grass. The cooking was all done over the fire in the middle of the
lodge. Possessions were stowed away behind the beds, or hung up on the
posts which supported the roof.

On their hunts or when traveling, the Pawnees used the ordinary cow
skin lodge of the plains Indians. This was composed of neatly dressed
buffalo hides, from which the hair had been removed, set up over a
frame-work, made up, usually, of sixteen long slender poles. An
opening at the top gave exit to the smoke; and wings, projecting at
either side of the smoke hole, and so arranged that their positions
could be changed by moving two additional poles on the outside of the
lodge, served to regulate the draft, and keep the lodge free from
smoke. The inmates slept close to the walls, and the fire, with the
inevitable pot hanging over it, burned in the middle. These lodges
were warm, and usually dry, and made good shelters. They were occupied
for the greater part of the year, for the Pawnees, after the spring
planting was fairly over, usually started at once on their summer
hunt, from which they only returned in time to harvest their crops. At
the beginning of winter, when the robes were at their best, they made
the winter hunt, from which they did not return until toward spring.
The planting over, they set out again on the hunt.

In their personal intercourse with each other, and with strangers, the
Pawnees were kindly and accommodating. I have had little kindnesses
unostentatiously done me by Pawnee men, such as I should never expect
to receive from white persons not connected with me by ties of blood.
In the village, the well-to-do gave freely to those who were poor, and
all were very hospitable. They were a light-hearted, merry race,
keenly alive to the ridiculous, and very fond of a joke. They were
great chatterers, and had about them nothing of the supposed
taciturnity of the Indian. Of modesty or delicacy in conversation, as
we know it, they had none. Both sexes spoke freely to each other of
matters which are never mentioned in civilized society, and much of
their conversation, as well as many of their stories, could not well
be printed.


III. A SUMMER HUNT.

It was in the month of July, 1872. The Pawnees were preparing to start
on their semi-annual buffalo hunt, and only the last religious rites
remained to be performed before the nation should leave the village
for the buffalo range.

"_Eh, idadi, whoop_," came from without the lodge; and as I replied,
"_Ehya, whoop_," the sturdy figure of _Le-ta-kats-ta´-ka_ appeared in
the doorway.

"_Lau, idad, tüt-tû-ta-rik ti-rah-rêk_--Come, brother, they are going
to dance," he said, and then he turned and went out.

I rose from the pile of robes on which I had been dozing, and, after
rolling them up, strolled out after him. The village seemed deserted,
but off toward the medicine lodge, which stood upon its outskirts, I
could see a throng of Indians; and a low murmur of voices and of
footsteps, the hum which always accompanies any large assemblage, was
borne to my ears on the evening breeze. The ceremonies, which
comprised the consecration of the buffalo staves and the buffalo
dance, were about to begin. The great dirt lodge was crowded. I pushed
my way through the throng of women and boys, who made up the outer
circle of spectators, and soon found myself among the men, who made
way for me, until I reached a position from which I could see all that
was going on within the circle about which they stood.

For several days the priests and the doctors had been preparing for
this solemn religious ceremonial. They had fasted long; earnest
prayers had been made to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and sacrifices had been offered.
Now the twelve buffalo skulls had been arranged on the ground in a
half-circle, and near them stood the chiefs and doctors, reverently
holding in their hands the buffalo staves and sacred bows and arrows,
and other implements of the chase. For a little while they stood
silent, with bowed heads, but presently one and then another began to
murmur their petitions to _A-ti-us Ti-ra´-wa_, the Spirit Father. At
first their voices were low and mumbling, but gradually they became
more earnest and lifted their eyes toward heaven. It was impossible to
distinguish what each one said, but now and then disjointed sentences
reached me. "Father, you are the Ruler--We are poor--Take pity on
us--Send us plenty of buffalo, plenty of fat cows--Father, we are your
children--help the people--send us plenty of meat, so that we may be
strong, and our bodies may increase and our flesh grow hard--Father,
you see us, listen." As they prayed they moved their hands backward
and forward over the implements which they held, and at length
reverently deposited them on the ground within the line of buffalo
skulls, and then stepped back, still continuing their prayers.

It was a touching sight to witness these men calling upon their God
for help. All of them had passed middle life, and some were
gray-haired, blind and tottering; but they prayed with a fervor and
earnestness that compelled respect. They threw their souls into their
prayers, and as a son might entreat his earthly father for some great
gift, so they plead with _Ti-ra´-wa_. Their bodies quivered with
emotion, and great drops of sweat stood upon their brows. They were
thoroughly sincere.

After the last of the articles had been placed upon the ground, their
voices grew lower and at length died away. A moment later a drum
sounded, and a dozen or twenty young warriors sprang into the circle
and began the buffalo dance. This was kept up without intermission for
three days, and as soon as it was over, the tribe moved out of the
village on the hunt.

From the village on the Loup, we traveled southward; for in those days
the region between the Platte and the Smoky rivers swarmed with
buffalo. With the Pawnees were a few Poncas, Omahas and Otoes, so that
there were about four thousand Indians in the camp. It was the summer
hunt of the tribe. Twice each year the agent permitted them to visit
the buffalo range. The meat which they killed and dried on these
hunts, the corn and squashes which they grew on their farms, and the
small annuities received from the Government, were all they had to
subsist on from season to season. Thus the occasion was one of
importance to the Indians. Perhaps only the older heads among them
fully appreciated its economic interest; but for all it was a holiday
time; a temporary escape from confinement. Life on the reservation was
monotonous. There was nothing to do except to sit in the sun and
smoke, and tell stories of the former glories of the nation; of
successful fights with the Sioux and Cheyennes, and of horse stealing
expeditions, from which the heroes had returned with great herds of
ponies and much glory. Now, for a little while, they returned to the
old free life of earlier years, when the land had been all their own,
and they had wandered at will over the broad expanse of the rolling
prairie. Now, for a time, it was as it had been before the cornfields
of the white man had begun to dot their river bottoms, before the
sound of his rifle had made wild their game, before the locomotive's
whistle had shrieked through the still, hot summer air. Half a year's
provision was now to be secured. The comfort--almost the existence--of
the tribe for the next six months depended on the accumulation of an
abundant supply of dried buffalo meat, and no precaution was omitted
to make the hunt successful. It would not do to permit each individual
to hunt independently. Indiscriminate buffalo running by six or eight
hundred men scattered over the prairie, each one working for himself
alone, would result in the killing of some few buffalo, but would
terrify and drive away all the others in the neighborhood. This matter
was too important to be trusted to chance. The hunting was
systematized.

The government of the hunt was intrusted to the Pawnee soldiers. These
were twenty-four warriors of mature age, not so old as to be unfitted
for active work, yet with the fires of early youth somewhat tempered
by years of experience; men whose judgment and discretion could at all
times be relied on. These soldiers acted under the chiefs, but the
practical guidance of the hunt was wholly in their hands. They
determined the direction and length of each day's march, and the spot
for camping. They selected the young men who should act as scouts, and
arranged all the details of the approach and the charge when a herd of
buffalo was discovered large enough to call for a general surround.
All the men were under their control, and amenable to their
discipline. They did not hesitate to exercise their authority, nor to
severely punish any one who committed an act by which the success of
the hunt might be imperilled.

The scouts sent out by the soldiers were chosen from among the younger
men. They acted merely as spies, their office was to find the buffalo.
They moved rapidly along, far in advance of the marching column, and
from the tops of the highest hills carefully scanned the country
before them in search of buffalo. If a herd was discerned, they were
not to show themselves, nor in any way to alarm it. Having found the
game, their duty was to observe its movement, learn where it was
likely to be for the next few hours, and then to report as quickly as
possible to the camp. The soldiers then determined what action should
be taken. If the news was received late in the day, and the buffalo
were at some distance, the camp would probably be moved as near as
practicable to where the herd was feeding, and the chase would take
place in the early morning. If, on the other hand, the scouts found
the herd in the morning, the men would start off at once for the
surround, leaving the women to follow, and make camp as near as
possible to where the dead buffalo lay.

Day after day we traveled southward, crossing the Platte River, and
then the Republican about due south of the present flourishing town of
Kearney. South of the Platte a few scattering buffalo were found, but
no large herds had been met with--nothing that called for a surround.
At length we camped one night on the Beaver, a small affluent of the
Republican, emptying into it from the south.

With the gray dawn of morning, the camp, as usual, is astir. By the
time our little party have turned out of our blankets, some of the
Indians have already finished eating, and are catching up their
horses and preparing to ride off over the bluffs, leaving the squaws
to take down the lodges, pack the ponies, and pursue the designated
line of march. Before we are ready to "pull out," most of the ponies
have been packed, and a long, irregular line of Indians is creeping
across the level valley, and beginning to wind up the face of the
bluffs. The procession moves slowly, proceeding at a walk. Most of
those who remain with the column are on foot, the squaws leading the
ponies, and many of the men, wrapped in their blankets, and with only
their bows and arrows on their backs, walking briskly over the
prairie, a little to one side. These last are the poorer
Indians--those who have but few horses. They travel on foot, letting
their horses run without burdens, so that they may be fresh and
strong, whenever they shall be needed for running the buffalo.

Side by side, at the head of the column, walk eight men who carry the
buffalo staves. These are slender spruce poles, like a short
lodge-pole, wrapped with blue and red cloth, and elaborately
ornamented with bead work, and with the feathers of hawks, and of the
war eagle. These sticks are carried by men selected by the chiefs and
doctors in private council, and are religiously guarded. Upon the
care of these emblems, and the respect paid to them, depends, in a
great measure, the success of the hunt. While borne before the moving
column, no one is permitted to cross the line of march in front of
them.

Close behind the staff bearers follow a number of the principal men of
the tribe; the head chief, old _Pi´ta Le-shar_, and a dozen or fifteen
sub-chiefs or head men, all mounted on superb horses. Behind them
comes the camp at large, a fantastically mingled multitude, marching
without any appearance of order. Here most of the individuals are
women, young girls and children, for the men who accompany the camp
usually march singly, or by twos and threes, a little apart from the
mob. Most of those rich enough in horses to be able to ride at all
times, are scattered over the prairie for miles in every direction,
picking up the small bands of buffalo, which have been passed by the
scouts as not large enough to call for a general surround. The hunters
are careful, however, not to follow too close upon the advance line,
whose movements they can readily observe upon the bare bluffs far
ahead of them.

At the time of which I am writing, the Pawnees had no wagons, all
their possessions being transported on pack horses. The Indian pack
pony is apt to be old and sedate, requiring no special guidance nor
control. A strip of rawhide, knotted about the lower jaw, serves as a
bridle, and is either tied up to the saddle or held in the rider's
hand. In packing the animals a bundle of lodge-poles is tied on either
side of the saddle, one end projecting forward toward the horse's
head, the other dragging on the ground behind. This is the _travois_.
Cross poles are often tied between these two dragging bundles, and on
these are carried packages of meat and robes. Often, too, on a robe
stretched between them, a sick or wounded Indian, unable to ride, is
transported. The lodge-poles having been fastened to the saddle, the
lodge is folded up and placed on it between them, and blankets, robes,
and other articles are piled on top of this, until the horse has on
its back what appears to be about as much as it can carry. The pack is
then lashed firmly in position, and pots, buckets and other utensils
are tied about it wherever there is room.

On top of the load so arranged one or two women, or three or four
children, clamber and settle themselves comfortably there, and the old
horse is turned loose. Each rider carries in her hand a whip, with
which she strikes the horse at every step, not cruelly at all, but
just from force of habit. If the pack is low, so that her feet reach
down to the animal's sides, she keeps up also a constant drumming on
his ribs with her heels. The old horse pays not the slightest
attention to any of these demonstrations of impatience, but plods
steadily along at a quiet walk, his eyes half closed and his ears
nodding at each step. If the riders are women, each one holds a child
or two in her arms, or on her back, or perhaps the baby board is hung
over the end of a lodge-pole, and swings free. If the living load
consists of children, they have in their arms a lot of puppies; for
puppies occupy with relation to the small Indian girls the place which
dolls hold among the white children. Many of the pack animals are
mares with young colts, and these last, instead of following quietly
at their mothers' heels, range here and there, sometimes before and
sometimes behind, their dams. They are thus constantly getting lost in
the crowd, and then they charge backward and forward in wild affright,
neighing shrilly, until they have again found their proper place in
the line of march. Many of the yearling colts have very small and
light packs tied on their backs, while the two-year-olds are often
ridden by the tiniest of Indian boys, who are now giving them their
first lesson in weight-carrying. Loose horses of all ages roam about
at will, and their continual cries mingle with the barking of dogs,
the calls of women and the yells of boys, and make an unceasing noise.

The boys are boiling over with animal spirits, and, like their
civilized brothers of the same age, are continually running about,
chasing each other, wrestling, shooting arrows and playing games, of
which the familiar stick game seems the favorite.

Whenever the column draws near any cover, which may shelter game, such
as a few bushes in a ravine, or the fringe of low willows along some
little watercourse, the younger men and boys scatter out and surround
it. They beat it in the most thorough manner, and any game which it
contains is driven out on the prairie, surrounded and killed. The
appearance even of a jackass rabbit throws the boys into a fever of
excitement, and causes them to shriek and yell as if in a frenzy.

All the morning I rode with the Indians, either at the head of the
column, chatting as best I could with _Pi´ta Le-shar_ and other
chiefs, or falling back and riding among the women and children, whom
I never tired of watching. Frequently during the day I saw at a
distance, on the prairie, small bunches of buffalo in full flight,
hotly pursued by dark-skinned riders, and occasionally two or three
men would ride up to the marching columns with heavy loads of
freshly-killed meat. The quick-heaving, wet flanks of the ponies told
a story of sharp, rapid chases, and their tossing heads and eager,
excited looks showed how much interest they took in the hunt.

The report of firearms was seldom heard. Most of the Indians hunted
with the primitive weapon of their forefathers--the bow and arrow. For
buffalo running an arrow is nearly as effective as lead. The power of
the bow in expert hands is tremendous. Riding within half a dozen
yards of the victim's side, the practiced bowman will drive the dart
so far through the body of the buffalo that its shaft may project a
foot or more from the opposite side--sometimes indeed may pass quite
through. Besides, the bow can be used very rapidly and accurately. I
have seen an Indian take a sheaf of six arrows in his hand, and
discharge them at a mark more rapidly and with more certainty of
hitting his target than I could fire the six barrels of a revolver.

It was nearly noon, and I was riding along at the head of the column.
I had but one horse, and did not care to wear him out by chasing
around over the prairie, preferring to save him for some great effort.
We were traveling along a smooth divide between two sets of ravines,
which ran off, one to the east and the other to the west. _Pi´ta
Le-shar_ had just informed me by signs that we should make camp about
two miles further on, by a stream whose course we could trace from
where we then were. Suddenly, without the slightest warning, the huge
dark bodies of half a dozen buffalo sprang into view, rising out of a
ravine on our left not a hundred yards distant. When they saw the
multitude before them, they stopped and stared at us.

They were too close for me to resist the temptation to pursue. As I
lifted the reins from my pony's neck and bent forward, the little
animal sprang into a sharp gallop toward the game, and as he did so I
saw half a dozen Indians shoot out from the column and follow me. The
buffalo wheeled, and in an instant were out of sight, but when I
reached the edge of the bank down which they had plunged, I could see
through the cloud of dust, which they left behind them, their uncouth
forms dashing down the ravine. My nimble pony, as eager for the race
as his rider, hurled himself down the steep pitch, and sped along the
narrow broken bed of the gully. I could feel that sometimes he would
lengthen his stride to leap wide ditches, where the water from some
side ravine had cut away the ground, but I never knew of these until
they were passed. My eyes were fixed on the fleeing herd; my ears were
intent on the pursuing horsemen. Close behind me I could hear the
quick pounding of many hoofs, and could feel that one of the horses,
nearer than the rest, was steadily drawing up to me--but I was gaining
on the buffalo. Already the confused rumble of their hoof-beats almost
drowned those of the horses behind me, and the air was full of the
dust and small pebbles thrown up by their hurrying feet. But they were
still ahead of me, and the gulch was so narrow that I could not shoot.
The leading horseman drew nearer and nearer, and was now almost at my
side. I could see the lean head and long, slim neck of his pony under
my right arm, and could hear the rider speak to his horse and urge him
forward in the race. My horse did his best, but the other had the most
speed. He shot by me, and a moment later was alongside the last
buffalo.

As he passed me the young Indian made a laughing gesture of triumph,
slipped an arrow on his bowstring, and drew it to its head; but just
as he was about to let it fly, his horse, which was but a colt, took
fright at the huge animal which it had overtaken, and shied violently
to the right, almost unseating its rider. At the same moment the
buffalo swerved a little to the left, and thus lost a few feet. Truly,
the race is not always to the swift. As I passed the Indian, I could
not restrain a little whoop of satisfaction, and then swinging my
rifle around, I fired. The buffalo fell in its stride, tossing up a
mighty cloud of the soft yellow earth, and my pony ran by him fifty
yards before he could be checked. Then I turned and rode back to look
at the game. The other Indians had passed me like a whirlwind, and,
close at the heels of the herd, had swept around a point of bluff and
out of sight. Only my rival remained, and he was excitedly arguing
with his horse. The logic of a whip-handle, applied with vigor about
the creature's ears, convinced it that it must approach the dead
buffalo; and then the rider dismounting, and passing his lariat about
the animal's horns, drew the pony's head to within a few feet of the
terrifying mass, and fastened the rope. When he had accomplished this,
he grinned pleasantly at me, and I responded in kind, and in dumb
show transferred to him all my right and title in the dead buffalo. At
this he smiled still more cheerfully, and set to work "butchering."

The animal was a superb specimen, just entering his prime, and was
fat, round and sleek. His horns were symmetrically curved and
beautifully polished. Not a scratch marred their shining surfaces, nor
a splinter was frayed from their sharp points. The sweeping black
beard was long and full, and the thick curls upon his hump and massive
shoulders were soft and deep, while the short hair of his sides and
hips was smooth as the coat of a horse. His size was enormous. It
seemed that he would have turned the scale at quite two thousand
pounds. Certainly his weight exceeded that of both the fifteen-hand
ponies that stood beside him.

A few moments later, I was again in the saddle, and riding on along
the course taken by the remaining buffalo, for I was anxious to see
what had become of them. On rounding the point of the bluff, where I
had last seen them, my curiosity was satisfied. The valley here
widened out until it was perhaps sixty yards across, and on either
side rose vertical bluffs of yellow chalk to a height of forty feet.
Scattered about over the little plain, lay half a dozen buffalo, over
each of which bent one or two Indians busily plying the knife. At the
foot of the bluff at one side of the valley stood four or five others,
looking at a cow, perched on a narrow shelf ten feet below the top. I
shall never understand how that animal reached the position it
occupied. There was evidently no way of getting to it except by
jumping up from below, which was obviously impossible--or down from
above, which seemed out of the question. The shelf was so short that
the animal could move neither backward nor forward, and was just wide
enough for it to stand on. As I rode up and joined the little group
below it, the head and shoulders of a middle-aged Indian appeared over
the top of the bluff, above the cow. He lay down flat on his breast,
and holding in both hands an old-fashioned muzzle-loading pistol,
attempted to shoot the cow from above, but his old arm would not go
off. He snapped it half a dozen times, and then, discouraged, called
out something to us below. One of the boys turned to me, and said very
slowly and distinctly, "He say, you shoot." I therefore dismounted,
and fired at the cow, which responded by shaking her head angrily, and
whisking her short tail. Another call came from the old fellow on top
of the bluff, and the young man said to me, "He say, you hit her;
right spot." A moment later, the cow bent forward and fell on her
knees, and the Indian above dropped down on her back.

Turning my horse's head in the direction from which I had come, I rode
up through a side ravine on to the high prairie. A mile away I could
see the column of marching Indians, plodding along at their old slow
pace. Here and there, over the rolling hills, dark forms were visible,
some of them in rapid motion, others apparently stationary. Often it
was impossible to determine whether these figures were horsemen or
buffalo, but sometimes, far away, I could see a mimic chase in which
pursuer and pursued appeared no larger than ants.

As I came up with the Indians, they were just descending into the
stream bottom, where camp was to be made. The small boys had, as
usual, dispersed themselves over the valley and among the underbrush.
Many of the squaws, leaving the ponies and packs to their sister-wives
or children, were hurrying up or down the stream to gather wood.
Already the leading ponies were being relieved of their loads.
Suddenly, from the mouth of a little ravine coming down into the
stream bottom, rose a chorus of shrill yelps and shrieks from childish
throats, and a gang of wild turkeys were seen, running rapidly through
the high grass toward the hills. A moment later, with a loud
_quit-quit_ of alarm, they took wing, but not before several of their
number had fallen before the missiles of the boys. Most of them went
up or down the creek, but one inexperienced bird took its course
directly over our heads.

Those who have seen the Indian only on dress parade, talk of his
stolidity, impassiveness, and his marvelous control over his
countenance and his emotions. This demeanor he can and does assume,
and when he is with white men, or among strangers, he is usually all
that he has been pictured; but take him by himself, and he expresses
his feelings with as little restraint as a child. So it was now. No
grave chief, nor battle-scarred warrior, nor mighty worker of
_ti-war´-uks-ti_ (magic) was too dignified to express his interest at
the appearance of this great bird sailing laboriously along, thirty or
forty feet above him. It was as if the turkey had flown over a great
company of schoolboys, and the utter abandonment of the excited
multitude, the entire absence of restraint, the perfect naturalness of
the expression of feeling, had in them something very delightful and
infectious. Every Indian, who held in his hand anything that was light
enough to throw, hurled it at the bird, and a cloud of whips, sticks,
hatchets, fleshers, and arrows, rose to meet it as it passed along.
One missile knocked from its tail a few long feathers, which drifted
slowly down on the heads of the people. It kept on, but before it had
passed beyond the long line of Indians extending back over the plain,
its strength became exhausted, it came to the ground, and was at once
dispatched by those nearest to it.

Almost before the turkey's fate had been decided, many of the lodges
had been pitched, and now the slender gray columns from a hundred
camp-fires began to climb up through the still air toward the blue
above. The women were hard at work cooking, or spreading out freshly
killed robes, or putting up drying scaffolds, while the men lounged in
the shade and smoked or chatted. Our wagon was halted at one side of
the camp, and the tired horses and mules stripped of saddles and
harness, and picketed near at hand. The Indian pack ponies were
collected and driven off on the upland in charge of several boys.

We had invitations to eat meat at several lodges that day. Usually we
did not accept these freely proffered hospitalities, because we had no
means of returning them, but one of these invitations came from a
particular friend, and to-day we broke through our rule. We feasted on
roast ribs, _ka´wis_, and dried meat, and really had a delightful
time. It was about three o'clock when we finished the meal, and we
were lounging about the lodge, smoking and chatting, in lazy
after-dinner fashion, when we were startled by a series of yells and
shouts, among which I distinguished the words "_Cha´-ra-rat
wa-ta´_--The Sioux are coming." Our Indian companions snatched up
their arms, and rushed out of the lodge, and we were not slow in
following. "_Sûks-e-kitta-wit wïs-kûts_--Get on your horses quick,"
shouted our host. The camp was in a state of wild excitement. Naked
men were running to their horses, and jerking their lariats from the
picket pins, sprang on their backs and rode hard for the hills; while
women and boys rushed about, catching horses, and bringing them in
among the lodges, where they were securely fastened. Less than a mile
away, we saw the horse herd dashing along at top speed, and a little
to one side of it a horseman riding in circles, and waving his
blanket before him. It was evident that the Sioux were trying to run
off the herd. We ran as hard as we could to the wagon, caught up
rifles and cartridge belts, and buckling on the latter as we ran, kept
on to the horses. There was no time to saddle up. We looped the ropes
around their jaws, sprang on their naked backs, and were off. As we
rode up on the prairie, the herd of ponies thundered by, and swept
down the bluffs to the camp. The rolling expanse before us was dotted
with Indians, each one urging forward his horse to its utmost speed.
Many of them were already a long way in advance, and were passing over
the furthest high bluff, which seemed to rise up and meet the sky.
Hard as we might push our ponies, there was little hope that we would
be in time to have any hand in the encounter--if one took
place--between the Pawnees and their hereditary foes.

We kept on until we reached the crest of the high bluff. From here we
could see far off over the plain, dozens of black dots strung out
after one another. Nearer at hand, other Indians, whose steeds, like
ours, had proved too slow for the swift pursuit, were riding back
toward us, showing in their faces the disappointment which they felt
at being left behind. With these we turned about, and rode toward the
camp. Among them was one of the herd boys, for the moment a hero, who
had to repeat his story again and again. He had been sitting on top of
a hill, not far from the horses, when he discovered several Sioux
stealing toward them through a ravine. Signaling his comrades, they
succeeded in getting the herd in motion before the robbers had
approached very close to them. Eight of the slowest horses had dropped
behind during the flight, and had no doubt fallen into the hands of
the enemy.

One by one, the Indians came straggling back to camp during the
afternoon and evening, but it was not until late that night that the
main body of the pursuers came in. They had ten extra horses, two of
which they had taken in turn from the Sioux. They had no scalps,
however, for they had been unable to overtake the enemy.

Long we sat that night by the fire in _Pi´ta Le-shar's_ lodge, talking
over the exciting event of the afternoon; and as we rose to go to our
wagons, and said good night, the old man, who had been silently gazing
into the coals for some time, looked up at me and smiled, saying,
"_Wa-ti-hes ti-kôt-it ti-ra-hah_--To-morrow we will kill buffalo."

When we turned out of our blankets the next morning, a heavy mist
hung over the prairie. This was unfortunate, for so long as the fog
lasted it would be impossible for the scouts to see far enough to
discover the buffalo. The first few hours of the march were
uneventful. Once or twice the huge bodies of a small band of buffalo
loomed up through the white mist about us, their size and shape
greatly exaggerated and distorted by its deceptive effect. As the sun
climbed toward the zenith, the air grew brighter, and by mid-day the
fog had risen from the ground, and though still clinging in white
cottony wreaths about the tops of the higher bluffs near us, we now
could see for quite a long distance over the prairie. A little later
the sun burst forth, and the sky became clear. Soon after noon we went
into camp.

We had but just begun our dinner, when a runner was seen coming at
full gallop down the bluffs. It was one of the scouts. He dashed
through the village, and did not check his pony's speed until he had
reached old _Pi´ta Le-shar's_ lodge. Here he stopped, and bending from
his horse spoke a few words very earnestly, gesticulating and pointing
back over the prairie in the direction whence he had come. As he rode
on and past us, he called out, "_Te-co´di tüt-tu-ta-rik ti-ra-hah_--I
saw many buffalo," and we shouted back to him, "_Tû-ra-heh_--It is
good."

At once the women began to take down the lodges and pack the ponies.
Buffalo had been discovered about fifteen miles to the southwest, and
orders had been issued to move the village to the creek on which they
were feeding, while the men should go on at once and make the
surround. Our teamster, to whom the Indians had already, from his
occupation, given the name "Jackass Chief," was directed to move with
the camp; and leaving everything save guns and ammunition belts in the
wagons, we joined the crowd of men who were riding out of the village.

The scene that we now beheld was such as might have been witnessed
here a hundred years ago. It is one that can never be seen again. Here
were eight hundred warriors, stark naked, and mounted on naked
animals. A strip of rawhide, or a lariat, knotted about the lower jaw,
was all their horses' furniture. Among all these men there was not a
gun nor a pistol, nor any indication that they had ever met with the
white men. For the moment they had put aside whatever they had learned
of civilization. Their bows and arrows they held in their hands.
Armed with these ancestral weapons, they had become once more the
simple children of the plains, about to slay the wild cattle that
_Ti-ra´-wa_ had given them for food. Here was barbarism pure and
simple. Here was nature.

A brief halt was made on the upper prairie, until all the riders had
come up, and then, at a moderate gallop, we set off. A few yards in
advance rode the twenty-four soldiers, at first curbing in their
spirited little steeds, till the horses' chins almost touched their
chests, and occasionally, by a simple motion of the hand, waving back
some impetuous boy, who pressed too close upon them. Many of the
Indians led a spare horse, still riding the one that had carried them
through the day. Often two men would be seen mounted on the same
animal, the one behind having the lariats of two led horses wound
about his arm. Here and there a man, with his arm over the horse's
neck, would run along on foot by the side of the animal which was to
serve him in the charge.

As we proceeded, the pace became gradually a little more rapid. The
horses went along easily and without effort. Each naked Indian seemed
a part of his steed, and rose and fell with it in the rhythmic swing
of its stride. The plain was peopled with Centaurs. Out over each
horse's croup floated the long black hair of his rider, spread out on
the wings of the breeze. Gradually the slow gallop became a fast one.
The flanks of the horses showed here and there patches of wet, which
glistened in the slanting rays of the westering sun. Eight, ten, a
dozen miles had been left behind us, and we were approaching the top
of a high bluff, when the signal was given to halt. In a moment every
man was off his horse, but not a pony of them all showed any sign of
distress, nor gave any evidence of the work he had done, except by his
wet flanks and his slightly accelerated breathing. Two or three of the
soldiers rode up nearly to the top of the hill, dismounted and then
peered over, and a moment later, at another signal, all mounted and
the swift gallop began again. Over the ridge we passed, down the
smooth slope, and across a wide level plain, where the prairie dogs
and the owls and the rattlesnakes had their home. Through the dog town
we hurried on thundering hoofs, no doubt amazing the dogs, and perhaps
even arousing some slight interest in the sluggish, stupid snakes. Bad
places these to ride through at such a pace, for a little carelessness
on your horse's part might cost him a broken leg and you an ugly
tumble. But no one took much thought of dog town or horse or possible
accident, for the minds of all were upon the next high ridge, behind
which we felt sure that the buffalo would be found.

And so it proved. Just before reaching it we were again halted. Two of
the soldiers reconnoitered, and then signaled that the buffalo were in
sight. The tired horses were now turned loose and the extra ones
mounted. As we rode slowly up over the ridge, we saw spread out before
us a wide valley black with buffalo. Two miles away, on the other
side, rose steep ragged bluffs, up which the clumsy buffalo would make
but slow progress, while the ponies could run there nearly as fast as
on level ground. It was the very place that would have been chosen for
a surround.

At least a thousand buffalo were lying down in the midst of this
amphitheater. Here and there, away from the main herd on the lower
hills, were old bulls, singly and by twos and threes, some of them
quietly chewing the cud, others sullenly pawing up the dust, or
grinding their battered horns into the yellow dirt of the hillsides.
Not the slightest notice was taken of us as we rode down the slope at
a pace that was almost a run, but still held in check by the
soldiers. The orders for the charge had not yet been given. Our line
was now much more extended than it had been; each man pressing as far
forward as he dared, and those on either flank being so far ahead of
the center that they were almost on a line with the soldiers. We had
covered perhaps half the distance between the hilltop and the buffalo,
when some of the outlying bulls seemed to observe us, and after
looking for a moment or two, these started in rapid flight. This
attracted the attention of the herd, and when we were yet half a mile
from them, they took the alarm. At once all were on their feet. For a
moment they gazed bewildered at the dark line that was sweeping toward
them, and then, down went every huge head and up flew every little
tail, and the herd was off in a headlong stampede for the opposite
hills. As they sprang to their feet, the oldest man of the soldiers,
who was riding in the center of the line, turned back toward us, and
uttered a shrill _Loo´-ah!_ It was the word we had waited for.

Like an arrow from a bow each horse darted forward. Now all restraint
was removed, and each man might do his best. What had been only a wild
gallop became a mad race. Each rider hoped to be the first to reach
the top of the opposite ridge, and to turn the buffalo back into the
valley, so that the surround might be completely successful. How swift
those little ponies were, and how admirably the Indians managed to get
out of them all their speed! I had not gone much more than half-way
across the valley when I saw the leading Indians pass the head of the
herd, and begin to turn the buffalo. This was the first object of the
chase, for in a stampede, the cows and young are always in the lead,
the bulls bringing up the rear. This position is not taken from
chivalric motives on the part of the males, but simply because they
cannot run so fast as their wives and children. Bulls are never killed
when cows and heifers can be had.

Back came the herd, and I soon found myself in the midst of a throng
of buffalo, horses and Indians. There was no yelling nor shouting on
the part of the men, but their stern set faces, and the fierce gleam
of their eyes, told of the fires of excitement that were burning
within them. Three or four times my rifle spoke out, and to some
purpose; and one shot, placed too far back, drew on me a quick savage
charge from a vicious young cow. My pony, while a good cattle horse,
was new at buffalo running, and his deliberation in the matter of
dodging caused me an anxious second or two, as I saw the cow's head
sweep close to his flank. It was far more interesting to watch the
scene than to take part in it, and I soon rode to a little knoll from
which I could overlook the whole plain. Many brown bodies lay
stretched upon the ground, and many more were dashing here and there,
closely attended by relentless pursuers. It was sad to see so much
death, but the people must have food, and none of this meat would be
wasted.

Before I turned my horse's head toward the camp, the broad disk of the
setting sun had rested on the tops of the western bluffs, and tipped
their crests with fire. His horizontal beams lit up with a picturesque
redness the dusky forms which moved about over the valley. Up the
ravines and over the hills were stringing long lines of squaws,
leading patient ponies, whose backs were piled high with dark dripping
meat, and with soft shaggy skins. Late into the night the work
continued and the loads kept coming into the camp. About the
flickering fires in and before the lodges there was feasting and
merriment. Marrow bones were tossed among the red embers, calf's head
was baked in the hot earth, fat ribs were roasted, _ka´wis_ boiled,
and _boudins_ eaten raw. With laughter and singing and story telling
and dance the night wore away.

Over the plain where the buffalo had fallen, the gray wolf was
prowling, and, with the coyote, the fox and the badger, tore at the
bones of the slain. When day came, the golden eagle and the buzzard
perched upon the naked red skeletons, and took their toll. And far
away to the southward, a few frightened buffalo, some of which had
arrows sticking in their sore sides, were cropping the short grass of
the prairie.

  [Illustration: {GRAZING BUFFALO.}]




THE PAWNEE IN WAR.


I. ENEMIES AND METHODS OF WARFARE.

The Pawnees were a race of warriors. War was their pleasure and their
business. By war they gained credit, respect, fame. By war they
acquired wealth.

On their long journey from their primitive home in the far southwest,
they must have met, fought with and conquered many tribes. By
conquest--so says tradition--they obtained their first horses,
captured no one knows how long ago, in an attack on a Cheyenne
village.

They were brave men, but brave after their own peculiar fashion. Their
courage was not displayed in the same way as that of the white man.
They thought it folly to expose themselves unnecessarily. An enemy was
to be surprised, and killed, while asleep if possible, or shot
through by an arrow from behind. To meet him in what we call fair
fight, when there was a chance to kill him from an ambush, would have
seemed an insane or desperate proceeding. And yet, as has been shown
by some of the stories already narrated, they often faced death with a
calmness and an indifference which indicated the highest physical
courage.

It has been very well said that the purpose of the Indian in his
warfare was to inflict the greatest amount of injury on his enemy with
the least possible risk to himself.

In the old time wars, the participants exercised the greatest prudence
and caution. They took no risks, where risks could be avoided. It was
more glorious for a war party to kill a single enemy without receiving
a wound, than to kill a dozen, if thereby they lost a man. The
warrior, who led out a war party, and brought it back without loss,
received credit. His skill as a leader was praised, and his influence
grew. A leader, who lost men, lost also prestige; the chiefs withdrew
their confidence from him, the young men might decline after that to
join his party.

When the Pawnees came into the northern country they found it
occupied by the Poncas, the Omahas and the Otoes. According to their
custom, they attacked these tribes, and, after a resistance more or
less prolonged, conquered them. The Poncas appear to have made the
most stubborn fight against the invaders, and it is related that they
made an alliance with the Sioux against their common enemy. From time
to time there would be a cessation of hostilities, and peace would be
made, but this never endured long.

There still exists among the Pawnees a triumph song, composed after a
treacherous attack on the Pawnees by the Poncas during a time of
peace. Mr. Dunbar's remarks on this song are so interesting that I
quote them in full. He says, "The Pawnee has a song, constituting the
finest satirical production in the language, relating to an attempt
that the Poncas are said to have once made to recover their
independence. Their warriors in a body, so the account states, made a
pretended visit of peace to the village of Chau-i, at that time the
head band of the Pawnees. After lulling to rest, as they supposed, the
suspicions of the Chau-i, according to a preconcerted plan, they made
an attack on them, but were signally discomfited. In commemoration of
the victory then achieved, the Pawnees composed this song, and the
presumption is that such a remarkable production would not have
originated and maintained its position permanently in their minds
without a good historic basis." This is the song:

     _A,   Li-hit!         Ku´s-ke-har-u,          Kür-ü-u-ras,_
    Aha, you Ponca!  It was (pretended) peace.     Did you find

         _id-i, tüs-ku-ra-wüsk-u?        Laü-i-lük-u-ru-tüs._
    What you were laughing at me about?    You meant fight.

"The keen satire of the interrogation is exquisite. It conceives of
the Poncas as quietly laughing in their sleeves, during their
ostensibly amicable visit, in anticipation of the summary retribution
that they expected to inflict upon their oppressors."

At last the Poncas, Omahas and Otoes were effectively subjugated, and
were permitted to live on the borders of the Pawnee territory, and
under the quasi-protection of that tribe.

In the old days before the coming of the whites the Pawnees had no
enemies near at hand. They had conquered all surrounding nations, and
claimed and held the country from the Missouri River to the Rocky
Mountains, and from the Niobrara, south to the Arkansas River or to
the Canadian. Then, when they wished to go to war, they were forced to
journey either to the Rocky Mountains to fight the Utes, or up the
Missouri to attack the Crows, or down into Mexico to plunder the
Spaniards, or into Texas to steal horses from the Comanches, the
Wichitas and other southern tribes. Then the war parties were great
bodies--sometimes one thousand men--and all on foot. Afterward, as
settlements approached them and other tribes were driven into their
country, and the different Pawnee bands were crowded together, their
campaigns diminished in importance, the war parties became smaller and
smaller, until at last only half a dozen men would start out, and
sometimes a single individual would go off by himself to steal horses.

The Pawnees were true Ishmaelites. They had no friends upon the
prairies save those whom they had conquered and held by fear. Foes
swarmed about them. To the north were the different bands of the
Dakotas and the Crows; to the west the Utes, with the Arapahoes, the
Kiowas and the Cheyennes; and to the south the Comanches, Cheyennes,
Kiowas, Kansas, Osages, and their relations the Wichitas. With these
last they were long at war; for the Pawnees and Wichitas had forgotten
each other's existence, or rather each tribe was wholly ignorant as
to what had become of the other. Only a tradition of the old
relationship still remained. The kinship was rediscovered within the
last thirty years, when some Kaws came north on a visit to the Pawnee
village, and brought with them a Wichita, who had been visiting at the
Kaw agency. The Pawnees found that this man spoke a language nearly
like their own, and at length discovered that the Wichitas were a part
of their own people. Attempts were made to establish a peace, and to
renew their old friendly relations, but the fact that the Wichitas
were so closely allied to the Comanches, Kiowas and Cheyennes made it
very difficult for the tribes to come together on a friendly footing.
Hostilities still continued therefore, nor was a lasting peace made
until the visit of _Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi_, already described.

As a result of this well nigh universal hostility, the Pawnees were
constantly being attacked, and were constantly losing men, women and
children. Mr. Dunbar, who has taken pains to collect some facts
bearing on this point, says:

"Probably, not a year in this century has been without losses from
this source (warfare), though only occasionally have they been marked
with considerable disasters. In 1832 the Skidi band suffered a severe
defeat on the Arkansas from the Comanches. In 1847 a Dakota war party,
numbering over seven hundred, attacked a village occupied by two
hundred and sixteen Pawnees, and succeeded in killing eighty-three. In
1854 a party of one hundred and thirteen were cut off by an
overwhelming body of Cheyennes and Kiowas, and killed almost to a man.
In 1873 a hunting party of about four hundred, two hundred and
thirteen of whom were men, on the Republican, while in the act of
killing a herd of buffalo, were attacked by nearly six hundred Dakota
warriors, and eighty-six were killed. But the usual policy of their
enemies has been to cut off individual or small scattered parties,
while engaged in the chase or in tilling isolated corn patches. Losses
of this kind, trifling when taken singly, have in the aggregate borne
heavily on the tribe. It would seem that such losses, annually
recurring, should have taught them to be more on their guard. But let
it be remembered that the struggle has not been in one direction
against one enemy. The Dakotas, Crows, Kiowas, Cheyennes, Arapahoes,
Comanches, Osages and Kansas have faithfully aided each other, though
undesignedly in the main, in this crusade of extermination against the
Pawnee. It has been in the most emphatic sense, a struggle of the one
against the many. With the possible exception of the Dakotas, there is
much reason to believe that the animosity of these tribes has been
exacerbated by the galling tradition of disastrous defeats which
Pawnee prowess had inflicted upon themselves in past generations. To
them the last seventy years have been a carnival of revenge."

Mr. Dunbar regards the constant warfare against their many enemies as
one principal cause of the rapid diminution in numbers of the Pawnees,
and, no doubt, it was a cause; but a far more important one was the
sapping of the tribe's vitality by contact with the whites. Their
villages lay almost directly in the path of trans-continental
emigration, and it was the introduction of spirits and the special
diseases contracted from the whites which weakened the tribe, and made
the tough and sinewy Pawnee a ready prey to sickness and death.

Although so ferocious to people of their own color, the Pawnees have
ever been at peace with the whites. Bad men among them have, no doubt,
sometimes stolen horses, but the tribe has never carried on an
organized war against the Government. While they have often been
provoked by wanton outrages inflicted on them, yet they have always
borne themselves peaceably and mildly, and sought redress by legal or
persuasive, rather than by hostile measures.

There is one instance on record which, while it shows their ferocity,
exemplifies also their natural justice, and deserves to be repeated.
This is the story of the Rawhide.

In the year 1852, among a small party of emigrants, who were crossing
the plains on their way to California, was a man who had frequently
asserted that he would kill the first Indian he saw. While the train
was camped on a small creek flowing into the Elkhorn, a young squaw
was seen, who belonged to the neighboring Pita-hau-erat village. Some
accounts say that she came to the camp to beg, others, that she was
going to the stream for a bucket of water. At all events, she was seen
by the emigrants, who bantered the young man to carry out his boast
that he would kill the first Indian he saw. He shot and killed the
woman. The train moved on during the night. On the following day the
tribe learned of this wanton butchery. They pursued the train, and
surrounding it, demanded the murderer. He was at once given up, and a
council was held, at which his fate was decided. The train was
ordered back to the scene of the murder, and there, in the presence
of his horrified companions, the Pawnees proceeded to flay the
murderer alive. After this had been done, the emigrants were permitted
to proceed on their journey. The stream on whose banks this act of
grim justice took place is still known as Rawhide Creek.

Not only have the Pawnees never been at war with the whites, but, for
the past twenty-five years, they have been their allies in every
serious Indian war which has taken place east of the Rocky Mountains.

The Pawnee was taught to deal in ambuscades and surprises, yet he
could fight in the open, too, if necessity demanded. Sometimes they
had pitched battles with their foes, but their weapons were very
primitive, and such combats were--in view of the numbers engaged on
either side--comparatively bloodless. Between the years 1860 and 1870
such battles frequently took place near the Pawnee village, when the
Sioux, who were far more numerous than the Pawnees, would come down
from the north to try to destroy the village. Many a time I have heard
from the lips of grizzled warriors the stories of these battles.
Sometimes the enemy would come down in small parties, and steal
horses, or kill squaws who were working in the corn patches, but at
other times large bodies of warriors would approach the village
without any attempt at concealment.

About sunrise the Sioux would ride up over the hills in a line
fronting toward the village. They appeared mounted on their best
ponies, clad in their most elaborate war costume, and wearing long war
bonnets of the feathers of the war eagle, which almost swept the
ground as their horses curveted along to the music of the monotonous
but thrilling war chant. At the instant of their appearance the Pawnee
village would begin to stir like a disturbed ant hill. The shouts of
command by the men, the piercing calls from women, the alarmed and
excited shrieks of the children, the neighing and heavy hoof-beats of
the horses, the barking and howling of the dogs, as they were kicked
out of the way, made a very Babel of sounds. The men snatched their
arms, and springing on their horses rode out on to the plain to meet
the enemy, while the women and children, after the horses had been
secured, mounted to the tops of the dirt lodges to watch the fight.
The Sioux, when they had come into full view, stopped, and sat there
on their horses, proud of their brave attire, and courting
admiration. The Pawnees, too, if time permitted, would don their
finest war dresses, though often they fought naked, and elaborately
paint themselves and their horses. As the Pawnees rode toward their
enemy, the Sioux slowly advanced toward them, both with extended
front. Each party chanted its songs of war, and uttered yells of
defiance. While they were still six or seven hundred yards apart they
halted, and stood facing each other. After a short wait, a warrior
from one side or the other rode out before the line and addressed his
party. He opened his speech with some remarks derogatory to the foe,
and in praise of his own people. From these generalities, he passed to
a consideration of his own excellent qualities, told of what he had
done in the past, and what he now intended doing, and when he had
finished speaking, he bent low over his horse's neck, and rode
furiously toward one end of the enemy's line. When he had come within
easy bowshot, he usually turned his horse's head, and rode as hard as
he could down along the line, leaning down, half hidden by his horse,
and discharging arrow after arrow at the enemy. They also shot at him,
as he flew by, and as he rode along, those whom he had passed dashed
out in pursuit, until the whole party were riding after him as hard
as they could go. If he passed along the line without injury, he
turned his horse toward his own party, and rode back, his pursuers
following him but a short distance. If, however, he was wounded by the
arrows shot at him, and fell from his horse, or if his horse was hit
and disabled, or if, on account of the greater speed of their ponies,
it seemed likely that the enemy would overtake him, the whole body of
his tribe made a headlong charge to rescue and bring him off. The
enemy were as eager to take his scalp as his own people were to save
it, and the opposing warriors came together in a hot melee.

There was little twanging of bow strings, and not much thrusting of
lances; for the most part the fighting was at quarters too close for
this, and the combatants pounded at each other's heads with hatchets,
war clubs, whip handles, bows and _coup_ sticks. Bruises were given
and received, sometimes a few men were gashed with hatchets and
lances, and occasionally a man was killed. If the man about whom the
struggle was taking place was scalped, his party at once drew off,
leaving his body, which had now ceased to have any interest for them,
in the hands of the enemy. If, however, he escaped scalping, his
friends and foes soon separated and withdrew to their former
positions. Then, after a breathing spell, a man of the other party
rode forward, and made his speech, and the charge and general attack
might be repeated.

Occasionally a very daring or desperate man, instead of riding down
the opposing line, would charge through it, and as he reached it would
let fly an arrow at some particular man, and count _coup_ on, and
scalp him as he dashed by. He would at once be surrounded by foes, who
did their best to kill him, while his own tribesmen would charge upon
them, and for a short time the struggle would be very fierce. A brave
man, killed and scalped, was mutilated in all conceivable ways by the
enemy, and was often cut up into small pieces.

In this way the battle might go on for the greater part of a day with
varying fortunes, but without the loss on either side of more than a
man or two, until at last one party or the other would become
discouraged, and would break and run.

The Sioux in their attacks on the Pawnee village were never the
victors. They were always defeated and driven back, and often, in the
pursuit, two or three times as many men were killed as in the actual
battle. It was but natural that the Pawnees should have been
successful in this defense of their village, for in such fights they
felt that they must conquer. Defeat to them there meant the loss of
all that they possessed, the slaughter of their women and children,
and the destruction of their village. Besides, if defeated, they had
no place to retreat to. They would fight to the death.

Their fierce courage and their fighting qualities were well shown on
one famous occasion. The tribe had gone off south on the buffalo hunt,
and there were left in the village only some of the sick, the old men,
and a few boys, women and children. Among the sick who remained was
_Ska-di´ks_ (Crooked Hand), a Skidi brave, recognized as a leader in
battle, and one of the bravest warriors in the tribe. The Sioux had
learned of the departure of the Pawnees with all the fighting men, and
had planned to come down, kill all the people left at home, and
destroy the village.

One morning, to the dismay of those who had been left behind, six
hundred of the very best of the Sioux warriors rode slowly into view
over the hills, and down on to the plain above the village. They made
no charge, for it was unnecessary to hurry about killing the few
women, the old men and the sick who were to be their unresisting
victims. They wished to prolong the agony of these wretched Pawnees,
whose scalps were already theirs, and whose village would soon be only
a few heaps of smoking ruins. As they rode slowly down the hill there
was no clink of steel nor rattle of harness, only the soft rustling of
the prairie grass under the unshod hoofs of their spirited war ponies,
but this sound was drowned by the ominous music of their triumphant
war song, which, now loud, now low, was faintly borne on the breeze to
the fated village. Very deliberately they came on, singing as they
marched, proudly, like conquerors, while the sun glittered on polished
lance-head and gleaming hair plate, and the wind blew out the fringes
of their white war shirts, or gaily tossed the streaming plumes of
their superb war bonnets.

The news of their appearance was brought to Crooked Hand, where he lay
sick in his lodge. At once he threw aside the robe in which he was
wrapped, and as he rose to his feet, he cast away from him by the same
motion his sickness. His orders were quickly issued, and as promptly
obeyed. The village must fight. Tottering old men, whose sinews were
now too feeble to bend the bow, seized their long disused arms and
clambered on their horses. Boys too young to hunt, whose bodies had
never been toughened by the long journeys of the warpath, whose hearts
had not been made strong by the first fast, grasped the weapons that
they had as yet used only on rabbits and ground squirrels, flung
themselves on their ponies, and rode with the old men. Even squaws,
taking what weapons they could--axes, hoes, mauls, pestles--mounted
horses, and marshaled themselves for battle.

The force for the defense numbered two hundred; superannuated old men,
boys and women. Among them all were not, perhaps, ten active warriors,
and these had just risen from sick beds to take their place in the
line of battle. But then this little force had a leader. Crooked Hand,
mounted on a superb war pony, was as cool and unconcerned as if he
were about to ride out to a band of buffalo, instead of leading a
force of old men and children against six hundred of the best warriors
that the Sioux could muster.

At that time the Pawnee village was encompassed by a high sod wall,
and some of Crooked Hand's people wished to await the charge of the
Sioux behind this shelter, but their leader would not permit this. He
said to them, "We can conquer the Sioux anywhere." So _Ska-di´ks_ led
his forces out to meet the attack in fair open combat on the plain, on
the same ground where so many times the Pawnees had routed their
enemies. As the Pawnees passed out of the village on to the plain, the
Sioux saw for the first time the force they had to meet. They laughed
in derision, calling out bitter jibes, and telling what they would do
when they had made the charge; and, as Crooked Hand heard their
laughter, he smiled, too, but not mirthfully. He knew what perhaps the
Sioux had forgotten, that his people were single-minded, and that they
would fight until they died. Their strokes would be for their homes
and lives.

The battle began. It seemed like an unequal fight. Surely one charge
would be enough to overthrow this motley Pawnee throng, who had
ventured out to try to oppose the triumphal march of the Sioux. But it
was not ended so quickly. The fight began about the middle of the
morning, and, to the amazement of the Sioux, these old men with
shrunken shanks and piping voices, these children with their small
white teeth and soft round limbs, these women clad in skirts, and
armed with hoes, held the invaders where they were; they could make no
advance. A little latter it became evident that the Pawnees were
driving the Sioux back. Presently this backward movement became a
retreat, the retreat a rout, the rout a wild panic. Then, indeed, the
Pawnees made a great killing of their enemies. Many an old man, whose
feeble legs had long refused to bear him on the warpath, again
quavered his war cry, again counted _coup_ upon his enemy. Many a boy,
who had never shed the blood of any creature larger than a prairie
chicken, that day struck his enemy, and with shrill childish voice
shouted his whoop of triumph, as he tore away the reeking scalp. More
than one woman, used only to pounding corn and dressing robes, that
day counted her _coup_, and when the tribe returned, told what she had
done, and changed her name like a warrior.

To the Pawnees that day was like the day of Thermopylæ to the Greeks.

Crooked Hand, preëminent among the heroes of that fight, with his own
hand killed six of the Sioux, and had three horses shot under him. His
wounds were many, but he laughed at them. He was content; he had saved
the village.

The same indomitable spirit here shown has characterized the Pawnees
always. For generations they fought as their fathers had fought, in
their own way, with their native enemies, but when they were enlisted
in the Government service, and trained in the white man's ways of war,
they adapted themselves readily to their new conditions.

A body of men braver than the Pawnee Scouts, under Major Frank North
and his brother Luther, never rode on horses. They were far better
than any white soldiers that ever fought on the plains; for, besides
their natural courage, they had at their finger ends all the wonderful
wisdom of the savage. They could tell, as it seemed by instinct, where
a trail would lead, where the enemy that they were pursuing would
camp, what were his plans. They had the endurance of their prototype,
the wolf. No labor was too severe, no journey too long, if its end was
a battle with their foes. Their courage, their discipline, their
knowledge of the plains, their acquaintance with the habits of their
enemies, their endurance, made them superb soldiers; but, perhaps,
more than all this, and yet a part of all this, was the absorbing
devotion and trust which they felt for _Pa´-ni Le-shar_, their white
leader. Through all the years that they followed him, he never led
them but to victory; through all these years he never lost a man in
battle, and the belief of the Pawnees in his ability and his success
was like the devotion felt by the _Grande Armée_ for Napoleon.


II. PA´-NI LE-SHAR AND HIS SCOUTS.

No account of the Pawnees' warfare would give any just impression of
their prowess if it omitted to mention _Pa´-ni Le-shar_ and the forces
which he commanded. The Pawnee Scouts, under the gallant and able
leadership of Frank North, did splendid service against hostile
Indians. They saved hundreds of lives and millions of dollars' worth
of property, and in their campaigns wiped out in blood the memory of
many an injury done to their race by the Sioux, the Cheyennes, the
Arapahoes and the Kiowas.

Frank North was born in Ohio, March 10, 1840. When about fifteen years
of age he accompanied his family westward to Council Bluffs, and a
little later across the Missouri River into Nebraska. At about this
time, his father, who was a surveyor, was lost in a snow storm, and
the responsibility of caring for his family fell in large measure on
the boy. Soon after this he obtained employment as clerk in the
trader's store at the Pawnee agency, and thus made the acquaintance of
the tribe. His strong character early brought him to the notice of
their principal men, and almost before attaining manhood he had become
a person of influence in the councils of the Pawnee Nation.

In the year 1864 Frank North was authorized to enlist a company of
Pawnee scouts to be employed against the bands of hostile Indians,
whose depredations were at that time becoming very troublesome. The
command was organized that autumn, and did some service along the old
emigrant trail. It was not until the summer of 1865, however, that it
saw any serious fighting. In that year General Connor of California
commanded a large expedition to the Powder River country, and the
Pawnee scouts accompanied him and rendered brilliant service.

Later, during the building of the Union Pacific Railway, the
depredations of the hostile Sioux, Cheyennes and Arapahoes became so
serious along the line of the road that the Government authorized Mr.
North to enlist a battalion of scouts from the Pawnee Nation, and
offered him the command with the rank of major. Several companies of
these scouts were so enlisted, and for years the battalion did good
service on the plains and in the mountains in Nebraska, Kansas and
Wyoming, serving under Generals Auger, Emory, Carr, Royal, Mackenzie
and Crook, some of the most successful Indian fighters in that
Department. The Pawnee scouts were everywhere, and at all times brave
men, good soldiers and victorious warriors. The amount of property
saved to the Government, the settlers and the railroad through the
efforts of Major North's command can scarcely be computed. In all his
service of almost constant fighting, extending over a period of more
than ten years, he never lost a man on the battle field, and this
caused him to be regarded by the Pawnees as divinely favored.

It is impossible within the limits of a few pages to give even a
sketch of the services performed by Frank North and his scouts. Two or
three isolated episodes in his career will show something of the
constant danger and hardship of the life he led, and of the courage,
coolness and determination of the leader and his men.

Such an episode, memorable alike for its danger, the completeness of
the victory gained, and the fact that it won for him the title by
which he was ever after known among the Pawnees, marked his first
campaign. It was in the Powder River country, and Captain North had
started with a detachment of his scouts in pursuit of a party of
Indians, whose trail he had found. For some weeks his men had been
hard worked; and at this time their horses were so jaded that although
they had come within sight of the Cheyennes, they were unable to
overtake them and force them to a fight. Captain North, who was
mounted on a fresh horse, rode far ahead of his men, who were
constantly falling further and further behind. At length, realizing
the futility of continuing the pursuit, North dismounted, fired a
parting shot at the Indians, and was about to ride back toward camp,
when the fleeing Cheyennes, about twenty-five in number, turned and
charged him. He then discovered that he had outridden all his men. Not
one of them was in sight. Hastily dismounting, he prepared to receive
the enemy, and firing as they advanced killed one. The rest sheered
off, and rode out of rifle shot, and then formed again for another
charge. Feeling for a cartridge to reload his rifle, North made the
startling discovery that he had but three left, all the others having
been lost during his rapid ride. He found, too, that his horse had
been wounded by a ball from the Cheyennes, and was in no condition for
running; indeed, it could not be ridden. His situation seemed well
nigh hopeless, but he prepared to make the best of it, by retreating
on foot, leading his wounded horse as a shelter, from behind which to
fight. When the Cheyennes charged him he would face about, raise his
gun to his shoulder, as if about to fire, and the Indians, who had
already tasted the quality of his lead, would drop down behind their
horses, and sheer off, never coming so close to him as to make it
necessary for him to use one of his precious cartridges. After a long
weary walk of twelve or fifteen miles, during which his moccasin-shod
feet were cruelly lacerated by the thorns of the cactus, over which he
walked, his pursuers left him, and he reached his command in safety.
No sooner had he arrived at the camp than, taking a fresh horse and
ordering out a well-mounted detachment of his men, he set out in
pursuit of the enemy. All that afternoon they rode hard, and when
night fell, dismounting a couple of Pawnees to follow the trail on
foot, the pursuit was still kept up. Just after daylight, as they rode
out into a little park in the mountains, a tiny column of blue smoke
rising from a clump of cottonwood trees showed where the hostiles were
camped. The Pawnees rode steadily forward in double file in military
fashion; and the Cheyennes, supposing that they were white soldiers,
jumped on their horses and rode out on to the open hillside where they
formed a line of battle to meet the enemy. The Pawnees rode quietly
onward until they were quite near the Cheyennes, and then loud and
clear their ringing war whoop broke out upon the morning air. When the
Cheyennes heard this war-cry, which told them that the attacking party
were Pawnees, their hearts became like water, and they turned and
fled. Already, however, seven of their number had fallen before the
Pawnee bullets, and the fresher horses of the Pawnees easily overtook
the tired ones ridden by the pursued. Of that party of Cheyennes not
one escaped, and with twenty-seven scalps, and all the plunder, the
victorious Pawnees returned that afternoon to their command.

Among the captured property were thirty-five horses and mules, some of
which had been taken from a party of fifteen soldiers, killed to a man
by these Cheyennes but a few days before; there were also the scalps
of these soldiers, and wearing apparel belonging to white women and
children, which justified the belief that they had recently massacred
a party of emigrants.

It was on the occasion of the scalp dance which followed this victory,
and when the Scouts were changing their names, as was the custom after
a successful encounter with the enemy, that the Pawnees gave to Major
North the title _Pa´-ni Le-shar_ (Chief of the Pawnees), a name which
has been borne by only one other white man, General John C. Fremont,
the Pathfinder.

The story of the killing of Tall Bull, and the fight with Turkey Leg's
band of Sioux, illustrate the readiness and the daring of Major North
in battle. Tall Bull was a chief who commanded a large village of
renegade Sioux and Cheyennes, who had given great trouble by their
depredations. Major North, with his Pawnees and some white United
States troops, had been looking for this village for some time, and at
length succeeded in surprising it near Summit Springs. The village was
captured in the charge and many of the hostiles killed. Others fled or
concealed themselves in the ravines and washouts, which seamed the
prairie, and made a desperate fight. The Pawnees were scattered about
in little parties, killing the Indians thus concealed, when Major
North and his brother came riding rapidly along, side by side, over
the open prairie. They had approached within fifty or sixty yards of a
narrow steep-walled ravine, of the existence of which they were
ignorant, when an Indian raised his head above its side and fired. The
ball whistled between the heads of the two riders; Major North threw
up his hands and reeled in the saddle as if about to fall, and the
Indian's head disappeared from sight. Springing from his horse, the
Major handed his bridle rein to his brother and directed him to ride
away at a gallop. The tramp of the two horses sounded more and more
faintly on the hard ground, and the Indian, thinking that the whites
were riding off, raised his head to note the effect of his shot.
North's rifle was already leveled at the spot where the head had
disappeared, and as the black hair came into view the finger pressed
the trigger more and more closely, and as the eyes appeared above the
ground, a ball pierced the brain of Tall Bull. A hundred yards up the
ravine was found his war pony, stabbed to the heart, and by it sat his
squaw, awaiting with Indian patience whatever fate might come to her.

During one of the summer hunts, on which Major North accompanied the
Pawnees, they were one day scattered out over the prairie running
buffalo, when all at once North heard the whistle of rifle balls and
saw the dirt thrown up about his horse by the bullets. He called to a
Pawnee near him to tell those boys to be more careful about shooting.
The Pawnee looked in the direction from which the balls were coming,
and after an instant called back, "They are Sioux, you had better
run." It was a large party of Sioux under the Chief Turkey Leg.

North and the Pawnee rode for the bluffs near at hand, and before
reaching them were joined by C. D. Morse, his brother-in-law, and half
a dozen Pawnees. The little party was surrounded by the Sioux and took
refuge in a shallow washout at the head of a ravine, where they were
somewhat sheltered from the enemy's fire by the sunflower stalks and
the low edges of the bank. Their horses were at once killed, and the
Sioux, who were numerous, became very bold, charging up to the edge of
the washout, and shooting down into it.

They were led by an Indian, apparently of some importance, who was
conspicuous by a large American flag which he carried. This man was
constantly exhorting his men, and would lead them part way on the
charge, turning off, however, before coming within range of the
washout, where North and his brother-in-law, with the seven Pawnees,
were lying concealed. After each charge he would ride to the top of a
hill near at hand, and make a speech to his warriors. It occurred to
Major North that if he could kill the man who carried the flag the
other Sioux might lose some of their courage. As they were retiring
from a charge, therefore, he crept cautiously down the ravine,
concealed by the long grass which grew in its bed, until he had come
within rifle range of the hill from which the leader was making his
speech, and by a careful shot killed him and regained the shelter of
the washout without injury.

Disheartened by the fall of their leader, the Sioux made no further
attempt to kill the besieged company, but after a little desultory
long-range firing drew off, so that North and his little party
regained the main village in safety.

The Pawnee Scouts were last called out in 1876, when General Mackenzie
fought the hostile Cheyennes in the Powder River country; and, led by
Major North and his brother, they made that famous charge on the
village which inflicted on the hostiles the crushing blow from which
they never recovered. How _Pa´-ni Le-shar_ held his men under fire
that day, when the bullets were raining on them from the hillsides,
was told in a letter written to me by a participant in the fight. "For
cool bravery," it ran, "he beats anything that you ever saw. Why, at
one time we were under such hot fire that even our scouts wanted to
run, and to tell you the truth, I felt sort of that way myself; but
Frank just straightened himself up on the old black horse and said,
very quietly, 'The first one of _my_ men that runs I will kill.' They
didn't run."

If the full story of Major North's life were written it would
constitute a history of the Indian wars in Nebraska and Wyoming from
1860 to 1876--a history so complete that there would be little left to
add to it. Wherever the hostile Indians were worst there Frank North
was to be found at the head of his Pawnee Scouts, doing the hardest of
the fighting, and accomplishing work that could have been done by no
other body of men.

From his long service in the army Major North was known to all
officers who have ever been stationed in the field where his
operations were conducted, and by all of them he was admired and
respected. He was closely connected with the growth of the State of
Nebraska. Several times he represented Platte county in the
Legislature, and the strength and uprightness of his character won the
confidence of all who knew him. He died at his home in Columbus,
Nebraska, March 14, 1885, aged forty-five years.

His was a singularly lovable nature. If the stronger manly points of
his character inspired respect and admiration, not less did his
gentleness and consideration for others win the deepest affection. He
was modest almost to diffidence, and it was with difficulty that he
could be induced to speak of his own heroic achievements. And yet his
face told the story of the power within the man.

The secret of Major North's success in commanding the Pawnees, who
loved him as much as they respected him, lay in the unvarying
firmness, justice, patience and kindness with which he treated them.
He never demanded anything unreasonable of them, but when he gave an
order, even though obedience involved great peril, or appeared to mean
certain death, it was a command that must be carried out. He was their
commander, but at the same time their brother and friend. Above all,
he was their leader. In going into battle he never said to them,
"Go," but always "Come on." It is little wonder, then, that the
devotion felt for him by all the Pawnee Nation, and especially by the
men who had served under him in battle, was as steadfast as it was
touching.


III. WAR PARTIES.

It has already been said that the highest ambition of the Pawnee young
man was to be successful in war. His whole training, all his
surroundings, caused him to believe that this success was the only
thing worth living for. Life at best he regarded as hard enough, and
only the fame to be acquired by the performance of brave deeds could
sweeten it so as to make it endurable. To convey a notion of the way
in which these war parties were originated, and of the manner in which
they were led, I give here stories told me by three brave men who in
the old days led out many war parties. The three stories were taken
down from the lips of the narrators. Only one who is familiar with
scenes in an Indian camp can conceive how much these stories lose by
being put into cold type. As heard from the lips of the Indian, they
have accessories of surroundings, voice and gesticulation, which add
tremendously to their vividness and their interest. Your Indian is a
real actor, and in telling a story he throws himself into his tale,
and helps out his vocal speech with a sign vocabulary which almost
tells the whole story to one who is ignorant of the language.

In the middle of the lodge the fire is burning, and over it hangs the
pot which is ever bubbling. At the back of the lodge, opposite the
doorway, sits the host, and above him to the lodge poles are tied the
sacred bundles, their buckskin coverings black with the smoke and wear
of years, perhaps of centuries. To the left of the host are the most
important guests, and the other inmates of the lodge are scattered
about here and there, the women being nearest the door. The host hands
the pipe to some young man, who carefully fills it, and soon it is
passing around the circle. Then a few remarks are made by the older
men, and some question is asked which starts discussion. After that
comes a pause, and then a middle-aged warrior begins a story. He is
They-know-that-Leader, and he tells how he took the horses:

"They tell me that my father was a warrior, and in his time led out
many war parties. In my young days I went out with war parties as a
volunteer many times.

"In my trips with warriors I had closely watched their ways and
movements. I had learned from them how to shoot and how to travel so
as to escape discovery. I made three trips as leader. I resolved one
time, just as we were setting out on the summer hunt, that during the
hunt I would lead a party off on the warpath. I made my plans, but I
waited first to make the sacrifice. At that time we did not go far; we
came back to the village because the Sioux were about us on the hunt.

"On a certain day I played all day the stick game
(_Satsa-wi-kah-tûsh_). In the afternoon I had lost everything I had.
Late in the afternoon I called a few of the young men to sit down with
me. When they had come and sat down with me, there were only a few. I
said to them, 'I have called you together to let you know that I am
poor in mind. I want to find out if _Ti-ra´-wa_ will take pity on me
and help me. I intend that you and I shall go off somewhere on the
warpath. Make your preparations to start in two days. Get your
moccasins filled with food, get your awls and sinews, your arrows and
your bows.'

"On the day I had set, in the night, we went out from the village,
having with us the old man who had performed the ceremonies of the
sacred things that I was to have with me. On the outskirts of the
village, we stood in a row, and the old man prayed for our success.
Then we were ready to start.

"Different war parties had gone out before I started, but I considered
to see if there was not some way in which I could beat them. I made a
plan by which I got ahead of them. We traveled fast, and went up to
Grand Island to get some arrows--for my young men had but few
arrows--and also to get some provisions. The next morning we again
started, and went as far as we could that day. At night I performed
ceremonies, as I had been directed. I filled a pipe and smoked to
_Ti-ra´-wa_, as we have always done. That is the first thing we have
to do. Then I told some of my young men to build a fire, and others to
go off to a distance to watch.

"On a war party some one was always taken along who could shoot well.
This time we had no one except myself. The next day I killed an
antelope, but I did not sacrifice then, because those are not animals
which we sacrifice. We had been gone three nights more before I
killed anything more. The fourth day I killed a buck deer, and I
sacrificed it. From that day on I never killed anything.

"After I had been out nine days I stole the horses. It was not always
the same about stealing horses. It was not always done in the same
way. It was daytime when my scouts discovered that there were people
about; they saw signs of a village. They told me afterward that they
had heard reports of guns during the day. They had not come back to
tell me of this, but had gone by. I was coming on behind with the
young men, when all at once I heard the report of a gun. As soon as I
heard it I stopped, and sent two spies out to see what it was, and
whether a camp was near. They wandered about in the timber, and came
back and said that they saw nothing. I told my men that we would go
off to a distance and wait there during the night. We waited there
until morning, and when the sun got up we heard the report of guns in
different directions, and sometimes coming toward us. We went to a
cañon, and hid in the plum brush, and ate plums. Of course we were
afraid, but we ate the plums. We thought that this might be the last
time we would ever have any plums. They were shooting all about us,
and seemed to be coming closer. In the afternoon, the shots stopped,
and they went on to their camp.

"While we were hiding here, many of the party feared that we had been
seen. They wanted to start back as soon as it grew dark, but I
deceived them. I told them that I was very thirsty, and that we would
have to go down to a certain place near the river, and get a drink of
water. After night we started, and as we were going along, we heard a
dog bark. We stopped and sat down, and I told my companions that two
men, whom I called by name, were to go and steal horses. 'But,' I
said, 'I am going with them to look after them.' I told them to pull
off their leggings and moccasins, because the brush was dry and caught
on them, making a noise. We went together to a certain place near the
village, and then these young men told me that they had been there the
day before and had been discovered. Then they turned around and went
back to where the party were hiding, but I went on to the village.

"When I came close to the village everything was still; the people
were asleep. Where I entered the camp, there was a little timber
growing, and here I stopped. While I was considering what I should do,
a girl came out of a lodge, but she went away from me. If she had
come toward me I should have killed her, for she would have discovered
me. After the girl had entered a lodge, I went into the camp to where
there were some horses. I drove them out of the camp. Six went back,
and I drove nine to where I had left my party. The two that I had
ordered to steal horses for me were there. When I came to the place,
and found all my men there, I said to them, 'This is very good. I have
stolen some horses for you. Now I will go back and get the rest of
them for you.' One of the other men persuaded me not to go again, but
to let him go. He did so, and brought the six other horses.

"It was the custom, if it was very difficult or dangerous to go to a
place to steal horses, for the leader himself to go and do the work.

"After two nights on the return journey I divided the horses among the
men. It used to be the custom after a party had been successful and
brought back the horses for them to change their names. After this
trip my name was changed to 'They-know-that-Leader.' It was the custom
among the Pawnees if they brought in horses to make an offering. We
felt that we owed something to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and we gave a horse to the
priest, the old man who had performed the ceremonies. I was gone but
thirteen days, and returned to my tribe."

       *       *       *       *       *

After him follows _A-ka-pa-kish_--Pities-the-Poor. He, too, tells his
story, and explains why one of his war parties was unsuccessful:

"My father told me, if I should ever want to go off on a war party, to
humble myself, and not to let a day pass without praying to
_Ti-ra´-wa_ by my smokes. I must always remember to pray to
_Ti-ra´-wa_ to give me a strong will, and to encourage and bless me in
my worship to him. Even when I was eating I must always remember to
pray to him. This I must do for some time before starting out.

"At one time I felt that I was poor, and I resolved to go off on the
warpath. A warrior, whom I knew, went out and took a lot of horses. He
had been as poor as I. I believed that this man had got his horses
because he had prayed to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and I thought, 'If I pray to
_Ti-ra´-wa_, why may I not do the same.' So I prayed. No one else knew
what I intended. After I had made up my mind, I selected another man,
one whom I could trust, and called him to tell him of my resolve. I
made him sit by me in the lodge, and said to him, 'I want you to sit
by me to-day, and smoke, and learn my intention.' After we had smoked,
I said to him, 'My friend, I want you to know that we are on the
warpath. We are going out to look for some horses.' After he had
smoked, the other man replied, saying, 'Brother, it is well. Let us
ask _Ti-ra´-wa_ to take pity on us, to help us on our war trip, and to
let us bring home many horses.' We two were the leaders.

"Some time after we had talked together, and made up our minds what we
would do, we selected certain young men that we could depend on, and
told them that we were on the warpath. This was done in this way. We
selected a pipe with which to have a sacred smoke, filled it and
smoked. Then we called together into the lodge the others, who did not
know our purpose. After they had assembled, I filled the pipe, and
said, 'We are going on a war party. We have filled this pipe, and must
decide what is to be done.' Then I passed the pipe to the man who sat
next to me. If he wished to join us he smoked, and passed it to the
next man. It was not allowed for any one to smoke unless he would go
with this party. Some might refuse the pipe, saying, 'I have decided
to go with another party.' The smoking of the pipe was a promise that
the leader could depend on the man who smoked.

"They used to have a certain ceremony to follow before starting out on
the warpath. It was something handed down, a special manner of praying
to _Ti-ra´-wa_ that he would bless them in their warfare.

"At last everything was ready for the start. The young men had their
packs made up. They carried cooked pounded corn, and pounded buffalo
meat mixed with tallow; and sometimes the loads were heavy. Some would
carry ten pairs of moccasins, each one stuffed full of corn, or
pounded buffalo meat. They were well fed. The loads were so heavy that
at first we would only make short marches. The leaders had to see that
the young men were not overworked.

"When all was ready, the priest who performed the ceremonies met us.
He brought with him the sacred bundle which we were to take with us.
At night when it was all still, after every one was asleep, the
ceremonies were performed. We smoked and worshiped to the east and
west, and to the north and south, and prayed for success.

"On that night we started, and went as far as we could; and the next
day, toward evening, when we stopped, we dug out a fire-place, like
the one in a lodge, and we two leaders sat by it, facing the east,
while before us were the sacred things. The leader has to be a good
orator, he has to speak to his young men, and advise them well,
encouraging them to be strong-hearted. He would speak to them and say,
'We have but a short time to live, so while we are on this trip let us
determine to be single-minded. Let us all look to _Ti-ra´-wa_, who is
the ruler over all things, and ask him to take pity on us, and bless
our warpath. We must respect the animals that the ruler has made and
not kill any of them; no birds, nor wolves, nor any creeping things.'
Not a night passed but that, after we were seated in a circle, I would
talk to the party, and pray, and hope that _Ti-ra´-wa_ would bless us
and take pity on us, and that we might be the party that would have
good success. On my war parties I had to watch at all times, even when
I was resting, to see that my young men should, before they slept,
pray to _Ti-ra´-wa_ that they might dream something good, and that it
might come to pass.

"The old priest who had performed the ceremonies, and had let me take
the sacred things, had told me to kill a particular kind of animal, a
deer, and sacrifice it. I sent some spies ahead to look over the
country, and a messenger came back from them, saying that they had
seen some animals. He did not describe them, and I ordered the
messenger to have the hunter kill them. I heard the report of a gun.
The hunter with two shots killed three. They were antelope. When the
hunter came to me he told me what he had done, and described the
animals which he had killed. They were not the animals I had been
directed to kill for the sacrifice. I hesitated, for I did not know
what to do. I did not wish to eat these animals before the sacrifice
had been made. To do this is bad. It troubled me. I was troubled,
because if we ate them it would look as if we cared nothing for
_Ti-ra´-wa_. Finally we ate what had been killed, and made no
sacrifice. Afterward we killed two more and ate them, and still made
no sacrifice.

"One night I dreamed that the hunter had shot a buffalo. It fell, but
as we went up to it, it got up and ran off. We went on for eight days,
and had made no sacrifice to _Ti-ra´-wa_. One day my scouts saw a man
sitting on a hill. Some of them wanted to shoot at him, but the others
said 'no.' They came back to tell me about it, and when they had
returned to the place where they had seen him, the man was gone. The
man had seen my spies. Not far off was a village, and the warriors in
it came to look for us, but we ran away. They hunted for us, but we
had got out of their sight. After this we came back home."

       *       *       *       *       *

Curly Chief, second chief of the Kit-ke-hahk´-i band, is the last, and
he tells how he sacrificed a scalp:

"It was in the fall, before the winter buffalo hunt was made, that I
thought I would go on the warpath. Every little while I would call a
few men to sit down with me, and would tell them that I had it in mind
to go on the warpath.

"The people went out on the winter hunt and killed buffalo, and while
they were on their way back to the village, I started on the warpath
with a number of young men. From the camp we went south to the
Arkansas River. When we reached that river, it began to snow, and the
snow fell six feet deep. We stopped in one place eleven days, till the
snow got less deep. From there we went on to the sandhills by the
North Canadian. One day as we were going along, we saw far off three
Indians on foot. They were Kiowas. Probably they had been on the
warpath and had lost their horses. We attacked and killed them. They
did not fight. We killed them like women. Then, indeed, we divided the
scalps, and made many of them. From there we started home, and found
the tribe camped on the Solomon River. When we reached home there was
great joy, and we danced the scalp dance.

  [Illustration: CURLY CHIEF--KIT-KE-HAHK´-I.]

"I sacrificed a scalp to _Ti-ra´-wa_. I felt that he had given me the
victory over my enemies, and for this reason I wanted to give him
something, I wanted to make an acknowledgment of his goodness to me.
He had taken pity on me and helped me. It was a sacrifice greater than
the sacrifice of the buffalo meat. Not many men have made it, but once
in a while you see some one who has been noticed by the Ruler. It is
our aim, after we have been helped, to give thanks."

  [Illustration: PAWNEE DIRT LODGE.]




RELIGION.


I. BELIEFS.

It is generally believed that, among the Indians of North America, the
priests and the shamans, "medicine men," or doctors, are the same.
This is not the case with the Pawnees. Among them the priestly office
was entirely distinct from that of the doctor, and had nothing in
common with it. The priest was in a sense the medium of communication
with _Ti-ra´-wa_; he prayed to the deity more efficaciously than could
a common person, acted, in fact, as an intercessor; he knew the
secrets of the sacred bundles, and when he asked anything good for the
tribe, or for an individual, it was likely to be granted. His
education and the power given him from above brought him into
specially close relations with _Ti-ra´-wa_, who seemed to watch over
him and to listen to him when he interceded for the tribe. He was an
intermediary between _Ti-ra´-wa_ and the people, and held a relation
to the Pawnees and their deity not unlike that occupied by Moses to
Jehovah and the Israelites.

The office of the "medicine man," shaman or doctor, had to do only
with sickness or injury. He was the healer. Disease was caused by bad
spirits, and it was the doctor's part to drive off these evil
influences.

In the lodge or house of every Pawnee of influence, hanging on the
west side, and so opposite the door, is the sacred bundle neatly
wrapped in buckskin, and black with smoke and age. What these bundles
contain we do not know. Sometimes, from the ends, protrude bits of
scalps, and the tips of pipe stems and slender sticks, but the whole
contents of the bundle are known only to the priests and to its
owner--perhaps, not always even to him. The sacred bundles are kept on
the west side of the lodge, because, being thus furthest from the
door, fewer people will pass by them than if they were hung in any
other part of the lodge. Various superstitions attach to these
bundles. In the lodges where certain of them are kept it is forbidden
to put a knife in the fire; in others, a knife may not be thrown; in
others, it is not permitted to enter the lodge with the face painted;
or again, a man cannot go in if he has feathers tied in his head.

On certain sacred occasions the bundles are opened, and their contents
form part of the ceremonial of worship.

No one knows whence the bundles came. Many of them are very old; too
old even to have a history. Their origin is lost in the haze of the
long ago. They say, "The sacred bundles were given us long ago. No one
knows when they came to us." Secret Pipe Chief, one of the very oldest
men in the tribe, and its High Priest, said to me:

"All the sacred bundles are from the far off country in the southwest,
from which we came long ago. They were handed down to the people
before they started on their journey. Then they had never seen
anything like iron, but they had discovered how to make the flint
knives and arrow points. There was nothing that came to us through the
whites. It all came to us through the power of _Ti-ra´-wa_. Through
his power we were taught how to make bows and stone knives and arrow
heads.

"It was through the Ruler of the universe that the sacred bundles
were given to us. We look to them, because, through them and the
buffalo and the corn, we worship _Ti-ra´-wa_. We all, even the chiefs,
respect the sacred bundles. When a man goes on the warpath, and has
led many scouts and brought the scalps, he has done it through the
sacred bundles. There were many different ceremonies that they used to
go through. The high priest performs these ceremonies.

"The high priestship was founded in this way: The black eagle spoke to
a person, and said to him, 'I am one of those nearest to _Ti-ra´-wa_,
and you must look to me to be helped; to the birds and the
animals--look to me, the black eagle, to the white-headed eagle, to
the otter and the buffalo.'

"The black eagle sent the buzzard as a messenger to this person, and
he gave him the corn. The secrets of the high priestship and the other
secrets were handed down at the same time. The buzzard, because he is
bald, stands for the old men who have little hair. The white-headed
eagle also represents the old men, those whose hair is white. These
are the messengers through whom _Ti-ra´-wa_ sends his words to the
people. The Wichitas also had these secrets, and so have the Rees."

The Pawnees believe that they were created by _Ti-ra´-wa_, but that
there had been people on the earth before them. They say, "The first
men who lived on the earth were very large Indians. They were giants;
very big and very strong. The animals that lived then were the same
that we know now, and of the same size. These giants used to hunt the
buffalo on foot. They were so swift and strong that a man could run
down a buffalo, and kill it with a great stone, or a club, or even
with his flint knife. Then, when he had killed it, if it was a big
buffalo bull, he would tie it up, throw it over his back, and carry it
into camp, just as a man to-day would carry in an antelope. When one
killed a yearling, he would push its head up under his belt, and let
its body swing by his side, just as we would carry a rabbit.

"These people did not believe in _Ti-ra´-wa_. When it would thunder
and rain, they would shake their fists at the sky and call out bad
words. In these days all people, wherever they live--all Indians, all
white men, all Mexicans and all black men--when they smoke up, speak
to _A-ti´-us Ti-ra´-wa_, and ask that he will give them the right kind
of a mind, and that he will bless them, so that they may have plenty
to eat, and may be successful in war, and may be made chiefs and head
men. When we smoke toward the earth we say, 'Father of the dead, you
see us.' This means that this is _Ti-ra´-wa's_ ground. It belongs to
him, and we ask him that he will let us walk on it, and will let us be
buried in it. We believe that after we are dead we will live again
with _Ti-ra´-wa_ up in the sky. We fear nothing after death worse than
we know now. All will live again with _Ti-ra´-wa_ and be happy. A
thief, one who steals from others in the camp, one who is bad, dies,
and that is the end of him. He goes into the ground, and does not live
again. One reason why we believe that there is a life after death is
that sometimes, when asleep, we dream and see these things. We see
ourselves living with _Ti-ra´-wa_. Then, too, we often dream of our
people whom we have known, and who have died. We dream of being dead
ourselves, and of meeting these people and talking with them, and
going to war with them.

"Now, these giants did not believe in any of these things. They did
not pray to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and they thought that they were very strong,
and that nothing could overcome them. They grew worse and worse. At
last _Ti-ra´-wa_ got angry, and he made the water rise up level with
the land, and all the ground became soft, and these great people sank
down into the mud and were drowned. The great bones found on the
prairie are the bones of these people, and we have been in deep
cañons, and have seen big bones under ground, which convinces us that
these people did sink into the soft ground.

"After the destruction of the race of giants, _Ti-ra´-wa_ created a
new race of men, small, like those of to-day. He made first a man and
a woman. They lived on the earth and were good. To them was given the
corn. From this man and this woman the Pawnees sprung, and they have
always cultivated the corn from the earliest times."

There can be no doubt as to the belief of the Pawnees in a future
life. The spirits of the dead live after their bodies have become
dust. The stories of the Ghost Bride and the Ghost Wife, already
given, are examples of this belief. Secret Pipe Chief told me of
himself:

"I was dead once. Just as I died, I found my way leading to an Indian
village. I entered it, and went straight to the lodge of my friends
and my relations. I saw them, and when I saw them I knew them again. I
even knew my old relations, whom I had never looked on when I was
alive. I went into a lodge, but I was not offered a seat, and I
thought that I was not welcome. I came out of the lodge, and went out
of the village toward the west. Then I came back to life again. In the
morning I had died, and I came to life in the afternoon. That must be
the reason that I still live, and am getting old. I was not welcome
yet. They did not receive me. From this I am convinced that there is a
life after we are dead."

Sometimes ghosts appear to them, but more often they merely speak to
them; only a voice is heard. They believe that the little whirlwinds
often seen in summer are ghosts. The reason for this is that once a
person shot at a whirlwind with his arrow. The arrow passed through
it, and it all disappeared and came to nothing. Then the man was
convinced that it was a ghost, and that he had killed it.

The different bands of the Pawnees had not all the same beliefs. Thus
the Skidi band offered up the human sacrifice--a captive taken in
war--to the morning star. This is thought to have been a propitiatory
offering to avert the evil influences exerted by that planet. At the
present day the Indians speak of the sacrifice as having been made to
_Ti-ra´-wa_. None of the other tribes had this form of worship, and in
this fact we have another indication that the separation of the Skidi
from the Pawnees had been a long one. The _Ka-wa-ra-kish_ band of the
Pita-hau-erat, are said to have been "the only ones of the Pawnees who
did not worship _Ti-ra´-wa_. They worshiped toward the west."

Mention has been made of the _Nahu´rac_, or animals, which possess
miraculous attributes given them by _Ti-ra´-wa_. The Pawnees know of
five places where these animals meet to hold council--five of these
_Nahu´rac_ lodges. One of these is at _Pa-hük´_, on the south side of
the Platte River, opposite the town of Fremont, in Nebraska. The word
_Pa-hük´_ means "hill island." Another animal home is under an island
in the Platte River, near the town of Central City. It is called by
the Pawnees _La-la-wa-koh-ti-to_, meaning "dark island." The third of
these sacred places is on the Loup Fork, opposite the mouth of the
Cedar River, and under a high, white cut bank. It is called
_Ah-ka-wit-akol_, "white bank." Another is on the Solomon River,
_Kitz-a-witz-ük_, "water on a bank;" it is called _Pa´howa_ sometimes.
This is a mound, shaped like a dirt lodge. At the top of the mound, in
the middle, is a round hole, in which, down below, can be seen water.
At certain times, the people gather there, and throw into this hole
their offerings to _Ti-ra´-wa_, blankets and robes, blue beads,
tobacco, eagle feathers and moccasins. Sometimes, when they are
gathered there, the water rises to the top of the hole, and flows out,
running down the side of the mound into the river. Then the mothers
take their little children and sprinkle the water over them, and pray
to _Ti-ra´-wa_ to bless them. The water running out of the hole often
carries with it the offerings, and the ground is covered with the old
rotten things that have been thrown in. The fifth place is a hard,
smooth, flinty rock, sticking up out of the ground. They call it
_Pa-hûr´_, "hill that points the way." In the side of the hill there
is a great hole, where the _Nahu´rac_ hold councils. This hill is in
Kansas, and can be seen from the Burlington & Missouri River Railroad.
It is known to the whites as Guide Rock.


II. CEREMONIES.

To describe satisfactorily any considerable proportion of the
religious ceremonials of the Pawnees, would require a more extended
space than is here at my command. Several of the special ceremonies,
however, may be mentioned in general terms.

Like some other tribes of the plains Indians, the Pawnees had a
certain special worship at the time of the first thunder in the
spring. This first thunder warned them that winter was at an end and
that the time of the planting was drawing near.

Of this worship a Chau-i said to me: "We all believe in _Ti-ra´-wa_.
We know that there is a power above that moves the universe, and that
he controls all things. In the old days when they had buffalo meat,
they used to make a sacrifice at the time of the first thunder in the
spring. The next day after it had thundered, all the people would go
into the sacred lodge, where the sacred bundles were kept at that
time. When they had all come together, the priest would open the
bundles and take out the sacred things, among which were Indian
tobacco and some little pieces of scalp tied to a stick. Through these
sacred things we worshiped, and the sacrifices were made to the Ruler
above. This seemed to be a help to us, and we used to live, increase
and grow strong. Up north, when we worshiped at the time of the first
thunder, we never had cyclones. Down here, now that this worship has
been given up, we have them."

There is no doubt that the most important of the religious ceremonials
of the Pawnees were the burnt offering of the animal and of the scalp.
These two, though different, had yet the same meaning. In each the
sacrifice was an offering to _Ti-ra´-wa_. Perhaps next in importance
to these were the buffalo dance and the corn dance, which were special
ceremonies to implore a blessing on the hunt and on the harvest.

The first animal killed on the hunt was sacrificed. It was necessary
that this animal should be either a deer or a buffalo; the first one
killed on the hunt of these two kinds. They were not permitted to kill
any other sort of an animal, save only these two, until after the
sacrifice had been made.

When this first animal had been killed, it was brought into the camp,
and taken to the sacred lodge, and there the priests themselves went
through the secret ceremonies. Then they divided the meat, and took a
part of it to the southeast end of the village. There they built a
fire of sticks, and placed the meat on it. As the fire burned the
flesh, the whole tribe marched slowly and reverently by the fire, and
grasped handfuls of the smoke, and rubbed it over their bodies and
arms, and prayed, saying, "Now, you, _Ti-ra´-wa_, the Ruler, look at
your children, and bless them; keep them and have mercy upon them, and
care for them." If any could not understand, such as little children,
their elders, who did understand--their relations--prayed for them.
The sick were carried out to the place, and prayed, and the smoke was
rubbed over them. The young men would run races, starting from a
certain place, and going around the village until they came to the
place where the smoke of the sacrifice rose.

The sacrifice, by burning of the scalp, was a very elaborate
performance, and occupied a whole day. The high priest faced the east
and prayed, and sang twelve times. Descriptions of it given me in
general terms indicate that this ceremony was extremely interesting.
It was rather unusual, but was performed once in 1877.

The sacrifice of the captive has not been practiced by the Skidi for a
long time, perhaps forty or fifty years. Bear Chief told me that he
had witnessed it six times; Eagle Chief, who is, perhaps, between
fifty and sixty years old, says he has seen it once. The old Skidi
described the ceremony as follows:

"The Skidi alone of the Pawnees sacrificed human beings to
_Ti-ra´-wa_. When they had returned home from war successful, bringing
captives with them, they selected one of these for the sacrifice. The
others were adopted into the tribe, but this one, who must be young
and stout, one who would fatten easily, was kept apart, eating by
himself, fed on the best of food and treated with the greatest
kindness. No hint of the fate in store for him was given until the day
of the sacrifice. For four nights before that day the people danced;
and for four days they feasted. Each day after they had got through
feasting, the dishes were taken to their especial place. Each woman,
after she got through eating, rose, and said to the prisoner, 'I have
finished eating, and I hope that I may be blessed from _Ti-ra´-wa_;
that he may take pity on me; that when I put my seed in the ground
they may grow, and that I may have plenty of everything.'

"At the end of the four days two old men went, one to each end of the
village, and called aloud, directing every male person in the village
to make a bow and an arrow, and to be ready for the sacrifice. For
every male child that had been born a bow and an arrow was made; for
the little boys small bows that they could bend and small arrows. The
arrows must be feathered with the feathers of the eagle, or of some
bird of prey, a hawk, an owl or an eagle. They must not cut the
feathers nor burn them to make them low.

"The next day, before daybreak, every one was ready. All of the
warriors, who had led parties on the warpath, took from their sacred
bundles their collars, made from the feathers of the bird they
wore,[12] and put them on their backs and tied them about their necks.
They held their pipes in their left hands, to signify that they were
warriors. Every male carried his bow and arrow. Every woman had a
lance or a stick. Just before daylight they all went out to the west
end of the village, and stood there looking for the prisoner to be
brought. Here two stout posts had been set up, one of ash and the
other of hackberry, and between these had been tied four cross-poles,
the three lower ones to aid in climbing up to the highest of the four.

  [12] The Purple Martin, _Progne subis_.

"As day broke, the people, looking back toward the village, could see
the captive being led toward them, bound hand and foot. Behind him, as
he was led along, followed a warrior carrying the heart and tongue of
a buffalo; after him came another, carrying a blazing stick, then one
with a bow and arrow, and last a warrior with the stuffed skin of an
owl.

"They led the naked captive to the posts, and lifting him up, tied
first the left hand and then the right to the top cross-pole, and
afterward tied the feet below. Every one stood there silent, looking,
waiting; the men holding their weapons and the women their sticks and
lances. On the ground under the sacrifice was laid the wood for a
great fire, which was now lighted. Then the man with the blazing stick
stepped forward, but before he reached the captive, the warrior with
the bow and arrow, he who had taken the captive, ran up close to the
victim and shot him through from side to side, beneath the arms, with
the sacred arrow, whose point was of flint, such as they used in the
olden time. After the blood had run down upon the fire below, the
warrior who carried the buffalo tongue and the heart, placed them on
the fire beneath the body. When this had been done the man who
carried the owl ran up, and seized the burning stick and burned the
body, once under each arm, and once in each groin, in all four times.
Then, at a given signal, the males all ran up, and shot their arrows
into the body. If any male children were not large enough to shoot,
some one shot for them. There were so many arrows that the body was
stuck full of them; it bristled with them.

"A man chosen for this purpose now climbed up, and pulled out all the
arrows from the body, except the one which was first shot through the
side of the sacrifice, and placed them together in a pile on the
ground, where they were left. After pulling out the arrows, this man
took his knife and cut open the breast of the captive, and putting his
hand in the opening, took out a handful of blood, and smeared it over
his face, and then jumped to the ground, and ran away as fast as he
could. Each of the four men, after he had done his part, ran away very
fast, and went down to the river and washed himself. When this had
been done the women came with their sticks and spears and struck the
body and counted _coup_ on it. Even the little children struck it.
After they had done this, they put their sticks together on the
ground in a pile, and left them there. By this time the fire was
burning up high and scorching the body, and it was kept up until the
whole body was consumed. And while the smoke of the blood and the
buffalo meat, and of the burning body, ascended to the sky, all the
people prayed to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and walked by the fire and grasped
handfuls of the smoke, and passed it over their bodies and over those
of their children, and prayed _Ti-ra´-wa_ to take pity on them, and to
give them health, and success in war, and plenteous crops. The man who
had killed the captive fasted and mourned for four days, and asked
_Ti-ra´-wa_ to take pity on him, for he knew that he had taken the
life of a human being.

"This sacrifice always seemed acceptable to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and when the
Skidi made it they always seemed to have good fortune in war, and good
crops, and they were always well.

"After the sacrifice was over, then came the old women to rejoice over
what had been done. They would act as the warriors used to do, when
coming back from a war party. They carried the mother corn. They went
to the body and counted _coup_ on it, and then went back to the
village. Some of them would take the large hollow stalks of the
sunflower, and put dust in them, and then blow it out, pretending to
shoot, the puff of dust standing for the smoke of a shot. They would
go up to the secret lodge, and standing outside of it, would tell the
story of how they came to go on their pretended war party, and what
they did while they were gone, and what enemies they struck--the whole
long story. The people meanwhile would stand about and laugh at them
as they did these things. Imitating the warriors, the old women
changed their names also. One of the leading old women once took the
name 'Mud on the Meat,' another, 'Skunk Skin Tobacco Pouch,' another
'Sitting Fish Old Man,' another 'Old Man Stepping on the Heart.' The
old men standing about would joke with the old women, and these would
joke and make fun of each other."

The different acts of this sacrifice appear to have been typical of
the deeds and necessities of warfare. Thus the feathers of the eagle
used on the arrows shot into the captive represented success in war.
Their use was a prayer to _Ti-ra´-wa_ that, as these birds were fierce
and successful when making an attack, so those who shot might be
fierce in war and always conquerors. The burning of the body of the
captive with the blazing stick, perhaps, typified the lighting of the
sacred pipe, which could only be done by one who had sacrificed a
scalp. The shooting arrows into the body by the males and the striking
it by the women typified the killing of and counting _coup_ on the
enemy. The cutting open the belly was the first act in the sacrifice
of the animal, the burnt offering.

It will be noted that this account differs in many particulars from
that given by Mr. Dunbar in his papers on this people, but I think it
worth recording, as being an independent relation by a very old man,
who, I have no doubt, has been an eye-witness of more than one of
these remarkable sacrifices.

I know of no satisfactory and detailed account of any of the sacred
dances of the Pawnees. There were many of these, among them the corn
dance, the buffalo dance, the wild horse dance, the deer, bear, dog
dances and so on. I give below an account of the corn dance, as
detailed to me by Curly Chief, who said:

"The windy month [March] was the one in which _Ti-ra´-wa_ gave us the
seed to cultivate. The first moon of April is the one during which
they had a special worship about the corn. Until these ceremonies had
been performed no one would clear out the patch where they intended
to plant the crop. Everybody waited for this time.

"The Kit-ke-hahk´-i was the only tribe in which this special ceremony
was handed down. The Chau-i and Pita-hau-erat worshiped with them. The
preparations for this dance are always made by a woman. She has to
think about it a long time before she can make up her mind to
undertake it. In making ready for the dance, she must furnish the
dried meat made from the whole of a buffalo, fat and lean, every part
of it. The sack which holds the heart she dries, and fills it with all
the kinds of corn--the five colors, the blue corn, which represents
the blue sky, the red corn, which stands for the evening sunset, the
yellow corn, which typifies the morning sunrise, the white corn, which
stands for a white cloud, and the spotted corn, which represents the
sky dotted with clouds. All these she puts in the bag, placing in the
sack three grains of each at a time. On the special day which has been
fixed for the dance, she must offer these things to _Ti-ra´-wa_. The
people are all gathered together, the women standing on the outside of
the circle behind, and the men on the inner side of the circle in
front. This is a woman's dance, and yet the men are there in front of
the women. These men are the leading warriors of the tribe. They have
been off on the warpath, and in time of corn have gone to the enemy.
They have been successful in war, and therefore they are with the
women. They stand about the circle holding their pipes in their left
hands, showing that they are leaders of war parties, and each with the
skin of a particular bird[13] tied on top of the head, showing that
they are warriors.

  [13] A Martin, _Progne_.

"The floor of the lodge must be hard, and swept as clean as it can be.
On the left hand side as you look toward the door is a buffalo skull.

"When the day has come all the people are gathered together and are
standing about the lodge. The high priest stands at the back of the
lodge with the sacred bundles of the three bands before him. Then this
leading woman comes forward, and presents to the high priest the dried
meat and the sack of corn, and two ancient, sacred hoes, made from the
shoulder-blade of a buffalo, bound to a handle by the neck ligament.
She places them on the ground before the sacred bundles, the corn in
the middle, and the two hoes on either side. With these things she
also presents a sacred pipe, filled and ready for lighting, taken
from a sacred bundle. Then she steps back.

"The old high priest must well know the ceremonies to be performed. He
prays to _Ti-ra´-wa_ and lights the sacred pipe, blowing smoke to
heaven, to the earth, and to the four points of the compass. While the
ceremonies are going on, the buffalo skull is taken to the sacred
place in this lodge, and put in a particular position. Then the
leading woman steps forward again, followed by two others. She takes
the bag of corn, and the other two women take the hoes, and they stand
in front of the high priest. He sings and prays. The leading woman
stands in a particular position, as directed by the high priest,
holding the bag of corn up to the sky in both her hands; and as he
sings, she raises and lowers it in time to the music of the song.

"After these ceremonies the women come forward, holding their hoes in
their hands, and dance about the lodge one after another in single
file, following the leading woman. Four times they dance about the
lodge. She cannot pass the priest the fifth time. These ceremonies and
the songs and prayers were to ask for a blessing on the hunt and on
the corn, and to learn whether they would be blessed in both. After
the women had danced and gone back to their places, everybody looked
on the floor of the lodge to see whether there were any buffalo hairs
there. If they saw them, they all said, 'Now we are going to be
successful in our hunt and in our corn.' Everybody said, 'We are
blessed.'

"Then when they would go out on the hunt they would find plenty of
buffalo, and the messenger sent back to the village from the hunt
would return to the camp and say, 'We have plenty of corn.' If they
saw a great many buffalo hairs they would get many buffalo; if but few
they would get some buffalo.

"The next day after these ceremonies every one would begin to clear up
their patches and get ready to plant corn. The leading woman who
prepared the dance is respected and highly thought of. After that she
is like a chief.

"This ceremony is the next principal thing we have after the burnt
offering of the animal and of the scalp. We did not invent this. It
came to us from the Ruler, and we worship him through it. He gave us
the corn and blessed us through it. By it we are made strong.

"We are like seed and we worship through the corn."


III. MEDICINE AND MYSTERY.

It has been said that the "medicine men" or doctors among the Pawnees
occupied a position by themselves. Their guild was entirely distinct
from that of the priests. A priest might be a doctor as well, but not
because he was a priest.

The doctors were primarily healers. Their function was to fight
disease. Like many other savage nations, the Pawnees believed that
sickness was caused by evil spirits, which had entered into the
patient and must be driven out if he was to recover. In their
treatment of injuries the doctors were often singularly successful.
Major North has cited for me a number of instances, in which men,
whose hurts had refused to yield to the treatment of the United States
Army surgeons, had been cured by Pawnee doctors. Some of these have
been detailed elsewhere. As might be imagined, however, the Pawnee
treatment of disease was less efficacious. Simple ailments were often
treated with success by means of the familiar sudatory, or "sweat
house;" but in the case of more serious complaints, the dancing and
rattling, which constitute so large a part of the doctor's treatment,
tend to aggravate rather than to check the disease. I have not space
to discuss the very interesting subject of the system of therapeutics
practiced by the Pawnee doctors. Mr. Dunbar has gone into this matter
quite fully, and the reader is referred to his papers for an account
of their practice.

As the doctors had to fight evil spirits, it is not surprising that
they should have summoned magic to their aid; but this magic probably
served its more important purpose in impressing the other Indians with
a belief in the doctors' powers. Some of the performances which took
place at the doctors' dances were very marvellous, and most of them
were quite inexplicable to those who saw what was done. That they
should have imposed on the Indian spectator is perhaps not surprising;
but it is further to be noted that clear-headed, intelligent white
men, whose powers of observation have been highly trained, have
confessed themselves wholly unable to explain these startling
performances, or to hazard a guess as to the means by which they were
accomplished. That these things happened as detailed is well
authenticated by the testimony of many perfectly credible witnesses.

Other masters of mystery are provided with mechanical aids of one kind
or another--some apparatus which assists them in imposing on their
audiences, by concealing certain objects, or certain acts, by means of
which they cause things to appear different from what they really are.
The Pawnee doctors had nothing of this. Their dances were conducted by
naked men in a ring surrounded by spectators. The floor of bare earth,
packed hard and worn smooth by the tread of many feet, afforded no
apparent opportunity for concealment or trickery. Under such
conditions were performed their mysteries, a few of which I will
mention as they appeared to watchful spectators, distant not more than
twenty-five or thirty feet, and often much nearer.

The simplest performances were the swallowing of spears and arrows.
These feats were merely mechanical, and were no doubt really as they
appeared, the arrows and the spears being driven down the gullet to
the distance of a foot or eighteen inches. Instances occurred where
men who had swallowed arrows died from the injuries received in the
operation. Bear Chief, himself a doctor, and tattooed with a bear on
the right side, told me that it was much harder and more painful to
swallow an arrow than a spear.

Among the more remarkable performances witnessed and vouched for by
my friend, Captain L. H. North, are the following:

Several men, representing elk, came into the ring, and trotted about,
so as to be seen by every one, imitating the movements of those
animals. To their heads were tied branches to represent horns, and
each wore an elk skin thrown over his back. A doctor came into the
ring, and handed to the spectators his arrows, which they examined,
and found to be ordinary arrows with the usual sheet-iron points. On
receiving back the arrows from those who had examined them, the doctor
pretended to hunt the elk, and at length shot at them, striking them
in the sides or on the legs. The arrows, instead of penetrating the
flesh, bounded back, some of them flying fifteen or twenty feet in the
air. They appeared to be shot with the full force of the bow, and when
picked up and handed to the onlookers, the sheet-iron points were
found to be doubled back as if they had been shot against a plate of
iron, and the shafts of some of them were split. The elk trotted away
and out of the ring without injury.

A man, representing an enemy, came into the ring on foot. A doctor
followed, armed with a hatchet, which he passed to the spectators for
examination. It was an ordinary hatchet of the tomahawk form. On
receiving back the hatchet, the doctor started in pursuit of the
enemy, who fled. The doctor overtook him, and with a vigorous blow,
sunk the hatchet up to the handle in the enemy's skull, leaving it
there. The wounded man staggered on, passing within five or six feet
of the ring of spectators, who plainly saw the blood from the wound
running down the man's face, and dripping from his hair behind. They
saw also the gray brain-matter oozing from the wound. The wounded man
was taken from the ring into the doctor's lodge. A few days later he
was seen about, and in his usual health.

A small boy, six or eight years of age, was led into the ring quite
naked. He was placed upon the ground, and two men sat upon him, one on
his chest, the other on his legs. With a knife an incision was made in
his belly; one of the doctors inserted his fingers; and, after feeling
about, pulled out of the cut what looked like a portion of the child's
liver. This he cut off and gave to the other man, who ate it. The
remainder of the liver was crowded back into the hole, and the boy was
carried off. Subsequently he was seen about, apparently in good
health.

A man representing a bear came into the ring and was pursued by a
number of Indians, who shot arrows at him for some time, without
appearing to injure him. At length, however, an arrow pierced him
through the bowels, and the wound was plainly seen on each side. The
man fell, and appeared to be dying. He was removed to the lodge, and
in a short time was entirely recovered.

Major North saw one of these bear performances, in which, the
pretended bear having attacked one of his pursuers, the latter slashed
him across the abdomen with a large knife, inflicting a cut from which
the bowels hung down so that they dragged on the ground. The bear was
carried off, and in a short time was healed, and went about as usual.

Major North told me that he saw with his own eyes the doctors make the
corn grow. This was in the medicine lodge. In the middle of the lodge,
the doctor dug up a piece of the hard trodden floor of the lodge,
about as large as a dinner plate, and broke up between his fingers the
hard pieces of soil, until the dirt was soft and friable. The ground
having thus been prepared, and having been moistened with water, a few
kernels of corn were buried in the loose earth. Then the doctor
retired a little from the spot and sang, and as the place where the
corn was buried was watched, the soil was seen to move, and a tiny
green blade came slowly into view. This continued to increase in
height and size, until in the course of twenty minutes or half an hour
from the time of planting, the stalk of corn was a foot or fifteen
inches in height. At this point Major North was obliged to leave the
lodge, to take out a white woman who was fainting from the heat, and
so did not see the maturing of the corn. All the Indians and white men
who remained assured him that the stalks continued to grow until they
were of full height, and that they then tasseled out and put forth one
or more ears of corn, which grew to full size, and that then the
doctor approached the plant, plucked an ear, and passed it to the
spectators.

Similar to this was a feat performed with a cedar berry. The berry was
passed around among the spectators for examination, and was then
planted as the corn had been. Then after a few moments the doctor
approached the spot, put his thumb and forefinger down into the soft
dirt, and seemed to lay hold of something. Very slowly he raised his
hand and was seen to hold on the tips of his fingers the end of a
cedar twig. Slowly his hand was moved from the ground, the twig
growing longer and longer. When nine or ten inches high it began to
have side branches. The doctor still holding the topmost twig of what
was by this time a cedar bush, continued to lift his hand very slowly,
until it was about three feet from the ground, and then let go of the
bush. Then presently he took hold of the stem close to the ground,
and, seeming to exert a good deal of force, pulled up the bush by the
roots; and all the people saw the bush and its bunch of fresh and
growing roots.

Enough has been said of these mystery ceremonies to indicate that they
were very remarkable. The circumstances under which they were
performed would seem to remove them from the more commonplace tricks
of professional jugglers. And I have never found any one who could
even suggest an explanation of them.

As might be inferred, these mysterious doings greatly impressed the
Pawnees; and the older men among them have a vast store of
reminiscences of past dances, which they delight in repeating. In the
course of a long talk with Bear Chief one evening, he recounted a
number of instances which he had seen. He said:

"A man in our tribe was blind; he could not see. He could travel in
the night as well as we can in the day, but when daylight came he
could see nothing. At one time he called together his relations, and
told them that, though blind, he wished to lead out a war party. He
said, 'I know that I, with my party, will kill an enemy.' They started
out, a young man leading him by the hand all day long. After they had
been out several days, he told the young men to be ready, that the
next morning he was going to kill an enemy. The next morning, while
they were traveling along, they saw an enemy, and surrounded and
killed him. They took the scalp and brought it home, and he had great
credit, because, being blind, he had killed an enemy. They were all
surprised that a blind man should have killed an enemy. He sacrificed
the scalp to _Ti-ra´-wa_, and was made a warrior, and went to the
sacred lodge and told the story of his campaign, and was made a
warrior--a blind warrior.

"It was a wonderful thing for a blind person to be able to travel in
the night. This must have come from _Ti-ra´-wa_.

"One of the wonderful things done by this man was at a medicine dance.
Everybody was there. He stood up with his bearskin over him, and was
led out before the people. A cedar branch was given him, and he
sharpened the end where it had been cut off, and stuck it in the
ground. Everybody was now asked to pull up this branch, and many tried
to do so, but the strongest men in the tribe could not move it. He
could pull it up, as if it were stuck in the mud. He thrust the
pointed end in the ground again, and asked the doctors to pull up the
cedar branch. They tried to do so, but could not stir it. The chiefs
also were asked to try to do this. They tried, but could not move it.
Something seemed to hold it in the ground. After everybody had tried
to pull it up, and failed, this blind man went to it, and taking hold
of it, pulled with all his strength, and pulled up with it about six
feet of roots. There lay the tree with all it roots fresh and growing.

"There was, in my young days, a certain brave man in the tribe. His
name was Elk Left Behind. He was so brave that, when the Sioux
surrounded him, he would kill so many that he would scare the rest
away. In one of the doctors' dances he had the skin of a fawn in his
hands. He called out to the people, 'Now, you people, watch me; look
close and see what I shall do, and you will find out what my bravery
is, and that it all comes from this that you see.' In our presence he
shook this fawn skin, and the fawn slipped out of his hands and then
stood before him, a living fawn looking at him. 'That is what I mean,'
said he. 'If the enemies surround me, that is the way I come out of
it. The fawn can run so fast that it can never be caught, nor can it
ever be shot.'

"This man was wonderful. He used to imitate the deer and the elk. He
could never be driven into timber or brush, or where there were
thickets. He said, 'If I am ever wounded, it will be when I go into
timber or brush.' He always wanted to be in the open plain where he
could be surrounded. He never ran to the timber for shelter.

"If they suspected that the Sioux were coming to attack the village,
he would load a gun and shoot it off. If the ball came back to him,
there were no Sioux coming. If it did not, then they would be coming.
When I was present it always came back to him. There were no Sioux
coming.

"At one time in the doctors' dance I saw him driving ten young men,
who pretended that they were deer. He had a gun and loaded it, and
shot the ten men, one after another, through the side. They fell down
wounded, and then got up and limped off half dying. He drove them
around the ring so that the people might see their wounds. After they
had looked at them, he went up to the first and slapped him on the
back, and the ball dropped out of him on to the ground, and the man
straightened up, healed. So he did to all, up to the tenth man, and
they were all healed. This was wonderful.

  [Illustration: SUN CHIEF--KIT-KE-HAHK´-I.]

"At one time he wanted to show the people that he could stand
anything. He and two others were attacked by Sioux. He said, 'I want
to be wounded; let us go to the thickets.' They did so, and a Sioux
shot him through the back, and the other two were wounded, but he
healed them all after they had got away from the Sioux.

"Another man in the doctors' dance had four young men pretend that
they were horses. All had manes and tails, and were painted to imitate
horses. He had a gun, to which was tied a scalp. He loaded the gun,
and while he was doing this the horses ran off, and stood looking back
at the man. He cocked the gun and laid it on the ground pointing
toward the horses, and placed the scalp near the trigger, and walked
some steps away. Then he motioned to the scalp and the gun went off,
and one of the horses went down wounded. It seems that the ghost of
the scalp obeyed his motion, and shot off the gun. He loaded the gun
again, and placed it on the ground as before. The second time he went
way off, and as soon as he waved his hand and said, '_wooh_,' the gun
went off and another horse went down. This was repeated until all the
horses were down. The people examined them and saw that they were
really wounded in the breast. The man went up to them and they seemed
to be dying and vomited blood, and the young man slapped them, and the
balls came out of their mouths, and as soon as the balls came away
from them they were healed.

"There were two people, a brother and sister, children of a man who
had been helped by a bear. One time when we were having a doctors'
dance, the sister and brother came forward, each carrying five cedar
branches about three feet long. They rolled a big rock into the middle
of the lodge, so that all might see what they were going to do. Then
they called ten private men who were not doctors, and told them to
thrust the ends of the branches into the stone as if they had grown
there, and they sang:

    "'See the trees growing in the rock;
    The cedar tree grows in the rock.'

"These cedar branches were cut square off at the butt, and were set on
the stone. They were not big enough to be even and balance, but still
they stood upright, as if grown from the rock. The doctors tried to
blow them down with their fans made of eagle feathers, but they could
not do it. You could not blow them off nor pull them off. At length
the men who put them there were told to take them off. They had hard
work to do it, but at last they succeeded.

"The sister (I saw her do it) put her hands up to the sun, and then
putting them on the ground and scratching and throwing up dust, she
would take up her hands, and have hands like a bear, with hair and
long claws.

"She used to understand how to make plums and other fruits grow on
trees. She supplied the doctors with choke cherries and plums. The
doctors had trees brought in that had no fruit on them. She would make
the plums grow, and shaking the tree, they would fall down, and
everybody would have a taste of them. This was at a doctors' dance."

  [Illustration: A PARFLECHE.]




LATER HISTORY.


I. REMOVAL TO THE INDIAN TERRITORY.

The project of removing the Pawnees from their reservation on the Loup
River in Nebraska appears to have been first heard of in the year
1872. The Pawnee reservation was close to civilization, and the
settlers moving west into Nebraska coveted the Indians' lands. It was
the old story, the same one that has been heard ever since the
rapacious whites first set foot on the shores of this continent.

The Pawnees were strongly attached to their home in Nebraska. They had
always lived there, and were used to it. Their forefathers were buried
there. Up to the winter of 1873-74 they had no idea of moving. But
they were constantly being subjected to annoyances.

Settlers crowded in close to the Pawnee agency, and even located on
it on the south and east, and in the most matter of fact way drove
their teams into the Pawnee timber, and cut and carried off the Pawnee
wood, on which the tribe depended for fuel and for building materials.
This open robbery gave rise to constant disputes and bickerings
between the Indians and the whites, in which the former were
invariably worsted. On the south and east side of the reservation the
crowding and the depredations were continuous. On the north and west
the reservation was exposed to frequent incursions from the different
bands of Sioux. War parties came down from their reservations, stole
the Pawnees' horses, killed their women while at work in the fields,
and sometimes even attacked the village. These attacks, though always
successfully repelled by the Pawnees, were a continual source of
annoyance and irritation to them, while their consistent desire to
obey the rules laid down for their guidance by the Government
prevented them from retaliating in kind upon their enemies.

The first proposition to remove the Pawnees to the Indian Territory
originated with the whites, but there is some reason to think that an
independent movement with the same object in view was made by members
of the Pawnee tribe. As nearly as I can learn from conversation with
Indians who took a leading part in the movement, this project for a
removal of a part of the tribe to the south originated with Lone
Chief, the Kit-ke-hahk´-i; and was taken up and supported by Left
Hand, known also as Spotted Horse, a turbulent spirit, who was killed
a few years ago by an United States marshal; and by Frank White, an
intelligent soldier of the Chau-i band.

In the summer of 1870, Lone Chief led a visiting party, which is said
to have numbered three hundred men, south to the Wichitas. When this
party turned back to go north in the fall, many of them were sick with
chills and fever--a disease unknown to them until that time--and some
died on the way. At this time the notion of the removal had not been
suggested, but it is probable that even then Lone Chief was
considering the advisability of moving south with his own immediate
family, and taking up his residence with the Wichitas. He had not yet
spoken of this project, however, but in the winter of 1871-72 he
announced his intention of doing this, and even started on his
journey, but for some reason turned back.

The next winter--1872-73--while the tribe was absent on the buffalo
hunt, the northern Sioux came down and stole from the Pawnees a number
of horses. This made the Pawnees uneasy, and some war parties started
out. It was at this time that Lone Chief conceived the idea of
increasing the company which should proceed south with him. After some
consideration and consultation, Lone Chief, Spotted Horse and Frank
White planned that a small party should go south, and visit the
different tribes in the Indian Territory, for the purpose of learning
how these tribes would regard a general movement of the Pawnees down
into their country. The plan was not fully developed until this small
party, of which Spotted Horse and Frank White were the leaders, was on
its way.

The party visited first the Otoes and Kaws, and then going south came
to the Wichitas, Comanches, Kiowas and Apaches, and were everywhere
hospitably entertained, and given presents of horses. They asked the
chiefs and headmen of the various tribes which they visited to come
together at a certain specified time at the Wichita camp, telling them
that they had something that they wished to say to them there. The
Pawnees then returned to the Wichita village, and awaited the
appointed time.

Soon the representatives of the different tribes began to arrive. Day
after day they kept coming in, until all were present. When they had
assembled in council, Spotted Horse rose to speak. He said, "My
brothers, I want you to know one thing--We, the Pawnees, want to be
brothers, and to be at peace. I have made up my mind to come down here
with my party of Pawnees to live with you."

The chiefs representing the different tribes all expressed their
satisfaction at this announcement, and urged him to come as he had
intended. They said, "We have good land here, and lots of buffalo. We
shall be glad if you decide to come." After all had spoken, Spotted
Horse again stood up and said, "Brothers, there is here with me one
leading man among the Pawnees. He, also, will tell you what he thinks
about this." Frank White then spoke and said that he intended to
accompany Spotted Horse when he should move south. The chiefs of the
different tribes again expressed the hope that they would carry out
their intentions, and arrangements were made with the tribes that they
should come down and live with them.

It is stated that just before this visiting party started north toward
their home, news came from the Pawnee agency that the tribe had been
attacked and massacred on the Republican River by Sioux, and as they
journeyed north they learned the details of the occurrence. On
reaching the village, Spotted Horse and Frank White reported to Lone
Chief and to their families what they had done, and their action was
confirmed. The chiefs of the tribe and the agent were then notified.
Soon afterward a general council was held, at which public
announcement of their intention was made by these three men. To most
of those present the project was wholly new, and there was a good deal
of confusion in the council, the people exclaiming at the news and
discussing it.

Efforts were made by the chiefs of the bands to dissuade those who
proposed to move. The Head Chief, _Pi´ta Le-shar_, tried to persuade
Frank White not to leave the tribe, but he said that he had promised,
and he should go.

In the autumn of 1873, Lone Chief, Spotted Horse and Frank White,
accompanied by their personal following, started south. With them went
about two-thirds of the tribe. The three leaders had a pass from the
Superintendent of Indian Affairs at the Pawnee agency. The chiefs of
the tribe were still bitterly opposed to the notion of the removal,
and _Pi´ta Le-shar_, the Head Chief, exerted all his influence to
prevent the movement. After the migrating party had gone about fifty
miles, messengers from the chiefs overtook them, directing them to
return to the village. The march was stopped, and the three leaders,
as delegates, returned to the agency to learn the cause of the order.
They reached there in the evening, and spent the whole night
conferring with the agent (Burgess), to whom they gave presents to
persuade him to accede to their request to continue their journey.
Lone Chief was the most determined, and insisted that they should be
permitted to go on without interference.

At length the authorities yielded, and a new pass having been given
them, they returned to the camp. The responsibility of taking away so
large a part of the tribe was weighing heavily on these three men,
however, and they determined to send back all except their own
families. On reaching the camp, therefore, they told the Indians that
they all were to go back, but hid their own horses, pretending that
they had strayed off, so that the main body would start back without
them. After the others had moved out of camp on their return march to
the agency, the lost horses were at once found, and the three men
with their families went on south.

The following year all the tribe followed, except the Skidi, Lone
Chief, and a few personal friends, who still refused to leave the old
reservation. This small company remained in their old home one year
longer, and then they, too, went south to their present reservation.

Shortly before the removal of the tribe to the Indian Territory in
1874, _Pi´ta Le-shar_, the Head Chief, was shot, and died from his
wound. It has been stated, and generally believed, that his death
resulted from the accidental discharge of his own pistol, but there
are well-informed persons who believe that he was murdered. There is
reason to believe that the shot did not come from his own weapon, but
that he was shot by a white man in order to get rid of his influence,
which was consistently exerted to keep the Pawnees in their northern
home. The Chief's wound was not a serious one, and he was doing well
under the charge of a white surgeon, when he was induced to put
himself in the care of a Pawnee doctor, under whose treatment he died.

_Ti-ra´-wa Le-shar_, another bitter opponent of removal, had been
killed in 1873; and the death of _Pi´ta Le-shar_ left Lone Chief,
Skidi, the only man of strong character to oppose the movement.

The full history of the plot to eject the Pawnees from their northern
home may never be recorded, for there are few men alive who know the
facts. If it should be written there would be disclosed a carefully
planned and successfully carried out conspiracy to rob this people of
their lands. This outrage has cost hundreds of lives, and an
inconceivable amount of suffering, and is another damning and
ineffaceable blot on the record of the American people, and one which
ought surely to have had a place in Mrs. Jackson's "Century of
Dishonor."


II. PRESENT CONDITION AND PROGRESS.

During the first four years of their sojourn in the Indian Territory
the condition of the Pawnees was most miserable.

They had left the high, dry, sandy country of the Loup, and come south
into the more fertile, but also more humid country of the Indian
Territory, where they found a region entirely different from that to
which they had been accustomed. Soon after their settlement on their
new reservation, they were attacked by fever and ague, a disease
which had been unknown to them in their northern home, and many of
them died, while all were so weakened by disease and so discouraged by
homesickness that their nature seemed wholly changed. They lost their
old spirit and their energy, and were possessed only by a desire to
return to their northern home. This was, of course, impossible, since
their old reservation had been thrown open to settlement, and in part
occupied by the whites. During the first ten years of their sojourn in
the Territory more than one of the agents appointed to look after the
Pawnees were either incompetent or dishonest, so that the people
suffered from lack of food, and some of them even starved to death.
They were miserably poor, for they did not know how to work, and no
one tried to encourage or help them to do so. The few horses which
they had were stolen from them by white horse thieves, and they were
now in a country and under conditions where they could not practice
their old war methods. The tribes against which their expeditions had
once been made were now their neighbors and their friends.

When Major North and his brother Luther visited the agency in 1876, to
enlist scouts for General Crook's northern campaign, they found the
Pawnees in a pitiable condition. They were without food, without
clothing, without arms and without horses. Their sole covering
consisted of cotton sheets, which afforded no protection against cold
and wet. It is not strange that under such circumstances the people
died off fast. At this time Major North had orders to enlist only one
hundred scouts, but he was greatly perplexed in selecting his men, for
four hundred wanted to go with him. Every able-bodied man in the
tribe, and many who were not able-bodied, tried to get their names on
the muster roll. Each man, at any cost, sought to get away from the
suffering of his present life; from the fever that made him quake, the
chill that caused him to shiver, and above all from the deadly
monotony of the reservation life. After Major North had enlisted his
quota of men and started with them on his way north, more than a
hundred others followed him on foot to Arkansas City, in the hope that
he could be persuaded to increase his force, or else that some of
those enlisted would drop out through sickness, and there might be
room for others.

The wretched condition of the Pawnees continued up to about 1884 or
1885. Before this time the people had become in a measure acclimated
in their new home, and had come to realize that it was absolutely
necessary for them to go to work if the tribe was to continue to
exist. They began to work; at first only a few, but gradually many, of
the Skidi, and then the Chau-i and the Kit-ke-hahk´-i. Presently a
point was reached where it was no longer necessary to issue them
Government rations. They raised enough on their farms to support
themselves. Each year of late they have done better and better. A
drought one season, and a cyclone another, destroyed their crops, but,
undiscouraged and undaunted, they push ahead, striving earnestly to
become like white men. The Pita-hau-erats are the least progressive of
the four bands, and many of them still live in dirt lodges, and
cultivate patches of corn scarcely larger than those tilled in their
old villages; but as the other bands advance, and as the results of
manual labor are seen and understood by those who are more idle, they,
too, will catch the spirit of progress, and will lay hold of the plow.

Last March, as I drove along toward the agency, and as we came in
sight of Black Bear Creek, I was surprised to see what looked like
good farm houses dotting the distant bottom. A nearer view and a
closer investigation showed me that the most well-to-do of the Pawnees
live in houses as good as those of many a New England land owner, and
very much better than those inhabited by new settlers in the farther
West. Many of them have considerable farms under fence, a barn, a
garden in which vegetables are raised, and a peach orchard. They
realize that as yet they are only beginning, but to me, who knew them
in their old barbaric condition, their progress seems a marvel.
Nowadays by far the greater number of the Pawnees wear civilized
clothing, ride in wagons, and send their children to the agency
school. They are making rapid strides toward civilization, just such
progress as might be expected from the intelligent and courageous
people that they are and always have been.

The Pawnees receive from the Government a perpetual annuity of thirty
thousand dollars, of which one-half is paid in money, and one-half in
goods. Besides this they have a credit with the Government of about
two hundred and eighty thousand dollars (the proceeds of the sale of
their old reservation in Nebraska), on which they receive interest;
and for some years past they have leased to cattlemen about one
hundred and twenty-five thousand acres of their reservation, for
which they receive about three thousand eight hundred dollars per
annum. It will thus be seen that in addition to the crops which they
raise, the tribe is fairly well provided with money. While a
considerable part of this is, of course, wasted, being spent for
trifles and for luxuries, it is nevertheless the fact that a certain
proportion of it is invested by the Indians in tools, farming
implements, and in furniture. Three years ago the Indians merely
dropped their corn into the furrow, while some planted with a hoe.
There was then only one corn-planter on the reservation. Now there are
thirteen of these implements of improved pattern, bought by the
Indians, and paid for with their own money. Reapers and mowers belong
to the Indian Department, and are loaned, not issued, and these pass
round from one family to another. Within the last four years one
hundred breaking and stirring plows have been issued, and one hundred
and five double shovel cultivators. Eighty wagons and one hundred and
fifty sets of harness have been issued in the same length of time.
Besides these, eight two-horse cultivators are loaned them by the
Government.

The Pawnees seem to be saving up their money to put into farming
implements, and they are looking ahead. Two-thirds of the houses
built in the last three years have been built by the Chau-i, who are
pushing the Skidi hard in their advance toward civilization.

The following table, taken from the official papers of the Indian
Bureau, gives some statistics as to the progress made by the Pawnees
during the last three years:

                                    1885.     1886.     1887.     1888.

    Number of Indians              1,045       998       918       869

    Number of male Indians          ....       483       414      ....

    Number of female Indians        ....       515       504      ....

    Number speaking English         ....       289      ....       225

    Number can read (youths)        ....       100        90       100

    Number can read (adults)        ....        58        60        75

    Number wearing citizen's
      dress wholly                  ....       300       350       200

    Number wearing citizen's
      dress in part                 ....       400       450       600

    Number doing some farming       ....       324       400      *125

    Number having other
      civilized work                ....         5         6        *7

    Number of births                ....        28        45        54

    Number of deaths                ....        77       125       106

    Houses occupied by
      Indians                       ....        61        82        98

    Proportion of Indians
      self-supporting               ....       2/3       1/2       2/3

    _Farming operations--_

    Number of acres cultivated
      by Indians                     971     1,360     2,094     2,560

    Number of acres broken by
      Indians                       ....        67       310       340

    Number of acres under
      fence                          400     1,597     2,597     5,200

    Number of rods fencing put
      up during year                 200     4,435     2,181     2,975

    _Produce raised by Indians--_

    Number bushels of wheat        1,177     1,273     5,000     2,500

    Number bushels of corn,
      estimated                   35,000    26,120    30,000    60,000

    Number bushels of oats           969      ....       640     2,300

                                                        Est.
    Number bushels of potatoes       100       100     2,500      ....

    Number bushels of onions          10        50       100       150

    Number bushels of beans          300      ....       500       750

    Number of melons               5,225    50,000    50,000      ....

    Number of pumpkins             3,000     5,000      ....      ....

    Number tons of hay               500      ....       600       800

    _Live stock owned by Indians--_

    Horses, estimated               ....     1,200     1,400     1,500

    Mules, estimated                  15        20        20        25

    Cattle, estimated                300       380       575       500

    Hogs, estimated                  100      ....       200      ....

    Fowls, estimated                 200     2,500     2,500     3,000

        * Families.

    Twelve allotments of land made 1888. Whole number allotments
    to date (1888), 175. In 1885 Indians sawed 50,050 feet of
    lumber, and cut 126 cords of wood.

    In 1886 the Indians hauled 83,814 pounds of freight, for
    which they were paid $541.54.

    During the year 1888 three Indian apprentices learned a
    trade.

    Besides the crops raised, the Indians during 1888 sawed
    50,000 feet of lumber, and cut 300 cords of wood.

    In 1886 a severe cyclone and hail storm destroyed the growing
    crops, and in 1887 a prolonged drought again ruined them.
    During these two years it was necessary to issue to the
    Indians half rations and one-third rations respectively. This
    year (1888-89) no rations have been issued.

As will be seen by these figures, corn is the principal crop raised
by the Pawnees, and a large part of the surplus beyond their own wants
is sold at from twenty-five to fifty cents a bushel to the dealers in
Arkansas City, or to the cattlemen in the neighborhood. The Pawnees
have as yet few cattle, their old meat-eating habits have not yet been
overcome, and there is a tendency among them to eat any cattle they
may obtain rather than to use them for breeding purposes. They ought
to be encouraged to keep cattle, to which they could feed their corn,
and in this way obtain a better return for their labor than is yielded
by the direct sale of the grain. They are fairly well provided with
horses, but most of these are small, and of the old-fashioned Indian
pony type. They should be encouraged to raise a better class of
horses, and at least two well bred heavy stallions should be kept by
the Government at Pawnee for Indian use. There is one now at Ponca,
thirty-five miles away, but the Pawnees will not take their mares so
far.

Much of the improvement in the condition of the Pawnees has taken
place within the last three years, and much of it has been due, as I
believe, to the wisdom and judgment of Major Osborne, their agent,
and to the Messrs. McKenzie, who have for three years or more been the
clerks directly in charge of these people. These gentlemen appear to
have been honest and firm, and yet helpful in their treatment of the
people under their charge, and the results of their administration
show for themselves, and are something in which these officials may
feel a just pride.

Few and rapidly diminishing in numbers as are the Pawnee people, I
have yet confidence that by the innate strength of their character
their decline may be checked, and their race may rise again. It can
never do so in its old purity. It must take to itself fresh blood from
other stocks, and thus renew its vitality. What I hope for the Pawnee,
to-day and in the future, is that the native vigor of the race, the
strong heart and singleness of purpose, which in ancient times led the
wild brave to success on his warpath, and gave his tribe so high a
place among the savage warriors of the plains, may now be exercised in
the pursuits of peace; and that the same qualities may give to these
earnest toilers, as they tread new paths, strength, courage and
endurance to hold a front rank among those Indians, who, to-day so far
behind, are nevertheless resolutely setting their steps toward a place
with civilized people.

But whatever the fate of the Pawnee people--whether, like so many
other native stocks, it shall dwindle away and disappear, leaving
behind it no reminder of its existence, or whether its native force
shall enable it under its new conditions to survive and make some
mark--we may remember it always as a race of strong, brave people,
whose good qualities are deserving of more than a passing tribute.

       *       *       *       *       *

It was the last day of my stay at the Pawnee agency. I had seen many
an old friend; had laughed and joked with some over incidents of
former years, and with others had mourned over brave warriors or wise
old men who were no longer with us. My visit had been full of
pleasure, and yet full of pain. When I had first known the tribe it
numbered more than three thousand people, now there are only a little
more than eight hundred of them. The evidences of their progress
toward civilization are cheering. They are now self-supporting. They
no longer die of hunger. But the character of the people has changed.
In the old barbaric days they were light-hearted, merry, makers of
jokes, keenly alive to the humorous side of life. Now they are
serious, grave, little disposed to laugh. Then they were like children
without a care. Now they are like men, on whom the anxieties of life
weigh heavily. Civilization, bringing with it some measure of material
prosperity, has also brought to these people care, responsibility,
repression. No doubt it is best, and it is inevitable, but it is sad,
too.

It was my last day, and I was again sitting with Eagle Chief, telling
him that the time had come for me to go. He said, "Ah, my son, I like
to see you here. I like to sit with you, and to talk over the old
times. My heart is sick when I think that you are going away, and that
we may never see each other any more. But," he added, solemnly, "it
may be that _Ti-ra´-wa_ will be good to us, and will let us live a
long time until we are very old, and then some day we may meet again."




INDEX.


    Agriculture in the old times, 253;
      present, 401.

    Animals, sacred character of, 17;
      see also Nahu´rac.

    Antelope and deer, story of, 204.

    Apaches, 392.

    Arapahoes, 47, 323 _et seq._

    Arickaras, Arickarees, 159, 218, 229, 231, 239.

    Arkansas, Pawnees in, 229.

    Arms, 263.

    Arrows, 205, 264, 282.

    Arrow heads of stone, 249, 251, 253, 352, 365;
      of bone and horn, 252;
      of sheet-iron, 252, 377.

    A-ti´-us, 198 _et seq._

    Auger, General, 325.

    Ax, 66.


    Baby on board, 141.

    Battles, mode of fighting, 312.

    Bear Chief, 20, 141, 225, 235, 252, 363.

    Bear dance, origin of, 128.

    Bear Man, story of, 121.

    Bear's-eyes, 241.

    Big Knife, 141.

    Big Shields, 235.

    Blackfoot story of deer and antelope, 205.

    Bone implements, 170, 254.

    Bows, 205, 264, 282.

    Boy who saw A-ti´-us, 195.

    Boy who was Sacrificed, 161.

    Buffalo, hunting, 135 _et seq._, 249;
      summer hunt, 270.

    Buffalo staves, 271, 277.

    Bundles, sacred, 351, 360, 364, 371.

    Burnt offerings, 361;
      see sacrifices.


    Caddos, 218, 222, 228.

    Captive, sacrifice of, 362.

    Carr, General, 325.

    Cedar tree, 126.

    Ceremonies, of the hunt, 272;
      religious, 360.

    Chau-i, 215 _et seq._, 233, 241, 260, 400.

    Cheyenne Blanket, A, 76.

    Cheyennes, 39, 48, 64, 65, 74, 76, 190, 246, 266, 307, 309, 323
        _et seq._

    Chief, office of, 260.

    Clothing, 257, 262.

    Comanche Chief, 25.

    Comanches, 25-44, 49, 65, 83, 186, 246, 307, 392.

    Cooper's Indian characters, 13.

    Corn, origin, 254, 356;
      sacred character, 254, 256.

    Corn dance, 369.

    Counting _coup_, 47, 93, 179, 188, 366, 367.

    Court House Rock, 67, 88.

    Crier, 163.

    Crook, General, 325, 399.

    Crooked Hand, 317.

    Crows, 307.

    Curly Chief, 20, 235, 257, 347, 369.

    Customs, 249.

    Cyclones, 361, 404.


    Dakotas, 307, 309.

    Dances, 190, 369, 387.

    Dancing, 192.

    Deer, chase of, 251;
      and antelope, story of, 204.

    Deer dance, origin of, 190.

    Dishes, 256.

    Dog as beast of burden, 265.

    Doctors, 98, 99, 350, 374.

    Dress, 262.

    Dull Knife, 74.

    Dun Horse, The, 87.

    Dunbar, John B., 19, 212, 213.


    Eagle Chief, 5, 20, 363, 408.

    Elk, chase of, 251.

    Elk Left Behind, 383.

    Emory, General, 325.

    Enemies, 303.


    Faith, Story of, 98.

    Farms and Farming, 401.

    Fire-sticks, 203, 257, 259.

    Fleshers, 170.

    Flint stones, 252.

    Flood, tradition of, 356.

    Food as pledge of hospitality, 59.

    Fremont, General John C., 329.

    Future life, belief in, 356.


    Ghost Bride, The, 191.

    Ghost Wife, The, 129.

    Ghosts, belief in, 356, 357.

    Giants, tradition of, 354.

    Good Chief, 20, 217.

    Government, form of, 260.

    Grand Pawnees, 216, 240.

    Guide Rock, 359.


    Hair, mode of wearing, 25, 239, 243, 263.

    Head chief, office of, 260.

    High priestship, 353.

    Hoes of bone, 255.

    Horses, 249, 265, 398;
      stealing, 15.

    Houses, ancient, 266;
      modern, 400.

    Hunting methods, early, 269;
      see buffalo hunting.

    Huecos, 218, 227.


    Indian character, 11-15.

    Indian Territory, removal to, 389.


    Jackson, Mrs., her "Ramona," 12;
      "Century of Dishonor," 397.


    Kansas, 307.

    Ka´wis, 148, 291.

    Kaws, 308, 392.

    Keechies, 218, 227, 228.

    Kiowas, 49, 65, 307, 309, 323 _et seq._, 392.

    Kiri-kur´-uks, 241.

    Kit-ke-hahk´-i, 215, 241, 400.

    Kitz-a-witz-ük Nahu´rac lodge, 165, 358.

    Knives, 75, 120;
      of flint, 249, 352;
      scabbard, 75.

    Kut-a´wi-kutz, story of, 25.


    Language, 21, 212.

    Lariats, 257.

    Leader of Soldiers, 74.

    Left Hand, 391.

    Lipans, 41, 218 _et seq._, 227, 231.

    Little Warrior, 70.

    Little Warrior's Counsel, 79.

    Lodges, 194, 266, 349.

    Lone Chief, the Kit-ke-hahk´-i, story of, 45;
     removal to Indian Territory, 391 _et seq._

    Lone Chief, the Skidi, 160, 396, 397.

    Lone Tree Nahu´rac lodge, 112.

    Louisiana, Pawnees in, 227, 228.

    Loup River Nahu´rac lodge, 112.


    Mackenzie, General, 74, 325, 332.

    McKenzie, Messrs., 406.

    McKinney, Lieutenant, 74.

    Magic, 375.

    Man who Called the Buffalo, 132.

    Mats, 257.

    Medicine, 374.

    Medicine men, 350, 374.

    Mexico, Pawnees in, 224.

    Mystery, 375.


    Nahu´rac, 18, 102 _et seq._, 122, 147, 154, 164 _et seq._;
      lodges, 104 _et seq._, 165, 358;
      messenger bird of, 105, 164.

    Names of the tribe, 239;
      of the Skidi bands, 237;
      personal, 241, 242;
      changing, 329.

    Nebraska, the home of the Pawnees, 229;
      removal from, 389.

    North, Captain Luther H., 20, 47, 212, 398.

    North, Major Frank, 20, 47, 212, 216, 322, 323, 398.

    Notes on the Pawnees, 211.


    Omahas, 230, 273, 305.

    O´re-ka-rahr, 182.

    Osages, 47, 49, 307.

    Osborne, Major, 405.

    Otoes, 273, 305, 392.


    Pack ponies, 279, 281.

    Pa-da´-ni, 240.

    Pa´howa Nahu´rac lodge, 110, 358.

    Pa´hut, 185.

    Pa-hük Nahu´rac lodge, 103, 165, 358.

    Pa-hûr´ Nahu´rac lodge, 165, 359.

    Pa-hu-ka´-tawa, story of, 142.

    Paint, 263.

    Pa-na´-na, 240.

    Pa´-ni, a form of Pawnee, 21.

    Pa´-ni Le-shar, 323.

    Parfleche, 195, 198, 388.

    Pawnee Loups, 216.

    Pawnee Picts, 215, 217, 239.

    Pawnee sign, 243.

    Pawnees, The, past and present condition, 9, 10;
      character, 10;
      religion, 17;
      language, 21, 212;
      relationships, 215;
      the four bands, 215;
      origin and migrations, 223;
      the Skidi band, 231;
      name and emblem, 239;
      early customs, 249;
      endurance, 251;
      every-day life, 259;
      as horsemen, 265;
      kind disposition, 269;
      on the hunt, 270;
      enemies and methods of warfare, 303;
      relations toward the whites, 310;
      battles with the Sioux, 313;
      the Pawnee Scouts, 323;
      war parties, 335;
      religious beliefs, 350;
      religious ceremonies, 360;
      medicine and mystery among, 374;
      later history, removal to the Indian Territory, 389;
      present condition and progress, 397.

    Pawnee Scouts, 47, 74, 261, 322 _et seq._, 399.

    Peace-Maker, story of, 25.

    Pemmican, 139.

    Pipe, 44;
      passing the, 34, 36, 37, 109, 110, 113, 114.

    Pi-ta´-da, 33, 56, 240.

    Pita-hau-erats, 215, 241, 400.

    Pi´ta Le-shar, 278, 281, 283, 293, 394, 395, 396.

    Pities-the-Poor, Chief, 342.

    Poncas, 273, 305.

    "Poor in mind," 50, 104.

    Pottery, 255.

    Prayer, 18, 19, 53, 68, 99, 101 _et seq._, 181, 201, 271, 338,
        342, 345, 348, 362.

    Priests, 350.

    Prisoners of Court House Rock, 67.


    "Ramona," 12.

    Rattle, 128.

    Rawhide, story of the, 311.

    Rees, see Arickaras.

    Republican Pawnees, 216, 240.

    Ropes, 257.

    Royal, General, 325.

    Runners, 251.

    Running Chief, 47.


    Sacrifices, 18, 49, 66, 79, 102, 161, 253, 271, 346, 348, 357,
        361, 362, 370, 382.

    St. Louis, Skidi near site of, 233.

    Scabbard, 75.

    Scalp dance, 329.

    Scalp lock, 239, 243, 263.

    Scalp sacrifice, 362.

    Secret Pipe Chief, 21, 224, 235, 352.

    Servants, 261.

    Shamans, 350.

    Shield, 78.

    Signs, 243.

    Sinew, 254.

    Sioux, 67, 92 _et seq._, 123, 152, 156, 232, 291, 312 _et seq._,
        323 _et seq._, 390, 392.

    Ska-di´ks, 317.

    Skidi, 216, 229, 231, 248, 400;
      bands, 237.

    Skür´-ar-a Le-shar, story of, 45.

    Smoking, 101, 118, 119, 344;
      to Ti-ra´-wa, 342, 354.

    Snake Brother, The, 171.

    Song of triumph, 305;
      songs of different tribes, 220.

    Spoons, 256.

    Spotted Horse, 391 _et seq._

    Spotted Robe, 89.

    Stick Game, 337.

    Summer hunt, 270.

    Sun Chief, 385.


    Tall Bull, 329.

    Tapage Pawnees, 216, 240.

    Tawaconies, 218, 228.

    Texas, Pawnees in, 227.

    They-know-that-Leader, 336.

    Thornburgh, Major, 79.

    Thunder, 360.

    Ti-ke-wa-kush, 132.

    Ti-ra´-wa, 17, 19, 45, 117, 122, 126, 136, 252, 253, 271, 337,
        342, 350, 352, 360.

    Ti-ra´-wa Le-shar, 396.

    Tonkaways, 41, 218 _et seq._, 227.

    Travois, 265, 279.

    Treaties, 258, 397.

    Tribal mark, 243.

    Turkey Leg, 331.


    Union Pacific Railway, 324.

    Utes, 41, 71, 80, 307.


    Wacos, 217.

    Warfare, 303.

    War parties, 15, 304 _et seq._, 335.

    War stratagems, 234, 246.

    Weeks, Ralph J., 20, 74.

    Whip, 73.

    Whirlwinds, ghosts, 357.

    White Eagle, see Eagle Chief.

    White, Frank, 21, 391 _et seq._

    Whites, Pawnees' relations toward, 310;
      first meeting with, 258;
      aggressions of, 389, 397.

    Wichitas, 49 _et seq._, 215, 217, 220-229, 239, 241, 246, 265,
        307, 308, 391, 392.

    Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi, 65, 308.

    Wolf, name for Pawnee, 240, 244, 245, 248;
      sign, 244.

    Wolf disguise, 71, 246.

    Wolf Pawnees, 216.

    Wolves in the Night, 70.


    Yellow Fox, story of, 206.




Transcriber's Note

Archaic and variable spelling, grammar and punctuation usage is
preserved as printed.

With some few exceptions listed below (where there was a clear
typographic error, a single inconsistency against a number of uses of
another form or a discrepancy between the contents listing or index
compared to the main text), variations in Pawnee words are preserved as
printed. For example, A-ti-us and A-ti´-us; Pa-huk´ and Pa-hük´;
Chau-i and Chaui; Ka-wa-ra´-kish and Ka-wa-ra-kish; tüt-tu-ta-rik and
tüt-tû-ta-rik; U´-ra-rîsh and U-ra-rish; we´-tüs and we-tüs;
Cha´-ra-rat and Chah´-ra-rat; Ski´-di and Skidi; Tapaje and Tapage.

The following amendments have been made:

    Page vii--Le´-shar amended to Le-shar--"Lone Chief, Skür´-ar-a
    Le-shar, ..."

    Page xxi--Kit-ke-hahk-is amended to Kit-ke-hahk´-is--"... by
    Good Chief and Curly Chief, Kit-ke-hahk´-is; ..."

    Page 45--Le´-shar amended to Le-shar--"Skür´-ar-a Le-shar."

    Page 47--le-shar-uspi amended to le-shar´-uspi--"At this time
    the boy's name was _Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi_, Running Chief."

    Page 65--Skü´r-ar-a amended to Skür´-ar-a--"... was changed
    from _Wi-ti-ti le-shar´-uspi_ to _Skür´-ar-a le-shar_ ..."

    Page 105--comma moved from following 'said' to following
    'this'--"As soon as he had said this, he vanished like a
    wind; ..."

    Page 155--omitted comma added following 'man'--"Whenever any
    human being on this earth, man, woman or child, ..."

    Page 220--omitted period added--"... additional and more
    satisfactory evidence of such a connection."

    Page 240--themselve amended to themselves--"... the name by
    which the Pawnees call themselves, _Pa´-ni_."

    Page 241--forgotton amended to forgotten--"... but these
    divisions have almost been forgotten."

    Page 296--Ti-ra´wa amended to Ti-ra´-wa--"... about to slay
    the wild cattle that _Ti-ra´-wa_ had given them for food."

    Page 301--ka´-wis amended to ka´wis--"... fat ribs were
    roasted, _ka´wis_ boiled, and _boudins_ eaten raw."

    Page 363--Ti ra´-wa amended to Ti-ra´-wa--"The Skidi alone of
    the Pawnees sacrificed human beings to _Ti-ra´-wa_."

    Page 363--Ti ra´-wa amended to Ti-ra´-wa--"... and I hope
    that I may be blessed from _Ti-ra´-wa_; ..."

    Page 376--operaation amended to operation--"... where men who
    had swallowed arrows died from the injuries received in the
    operation."

    Page 385--KIT-KE-KAHK´-I amended to KIT-KE-HAHK´-I--"SUN
    CHIEF--KIT-KE-HAHK´-I."

    Page 408--It amended to it--""... But," he added, solemnly,
    "it may be that _Ti-ra´-wa_ will be good to us, ...""

    Page 413--O´-re-ka-rahr amended to O´re-ka-rahr--
    "O´re-ka-rahr, 182."

    Page 415--omitted comma added following 229--"Skidi, 216,
    229, 231, 248, 400; ..."

    Page 415--Skur´-ar-a amended to Skür´-ar-a--"Skür´-ar-a
    Le-shar, story of, 45."

    Page 416--Ti´-ke-wa´-kush amended to Ti-ke-wa-kush--
    "Ti-ke-wa-kush, 132."

Some errors in page references were found in the index. These have
been amended as follows:

    Page 409--252 amended to 253--"Agriculture in the old times,
    253; ..."

    Page 410--356 amended to 366--"Counting _coup_, 47, 93, 179,
    188, 366, 367."

    Page 411--7 amended to 5--"Eagle Chief, 5, 20, 363, 408."

    Page 412--228 amended to 227--"Huecos, 218, 227."

    Page 415--120 amended to 128--"Rattle, 128."

    Page 415--310 amended to 311--"Rawhide, story of the, 311."

    Page 416--219 amended to 220--"... songs of different tribes,
    220."

    Page 416--175 amended to 304--"War parties, 15, 304 _et seq._,
    335."

    Page 417--241 amended to 240--"Wolf, name for Pawnee, 240,
    244, 245, 248; ..."

The frontispiece illustration has been moved to follow the title page.
Other illustrations have been moved where necessary so that they were
not in the middle of a paragraph.







*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PAWNEE HERO STORIES AND FOLK-TALES ***


    

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may
do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
license, especially commercial redistribution.


START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™
electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work
on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

    This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
    other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
    whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
    of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
    at www.gutenberg.org. If you
    are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
    of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
  
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
provided that:

    • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
        the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method
        you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
        to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has
        agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
        Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
        within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
        legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
        payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
        Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
        Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
        Literary Archive Foundation.”
    
    • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
        you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
        does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™
        License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
        copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
        all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™
        works.
    
    • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
        any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
        electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
        receipt of the work.
    
    • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
        distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
    

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website
and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.